Angels' Healing: A Practical Guide For The Development of The Spiritual Healer

Eilon, Angels' Healing
Angels' Healing
A Practical Guide for the Development of the Spiritual Healer
Received by Channeling from Light Beings, Guides of High Levels, and God
Margalit Eilon
All rights reserved, copyright 2004 First printed in Israel July 2004 Be'er Publishing House Edited by Zahava Mayusef and Michal Reuven Translated into English by Orly Doron and Pamela A. Lord Cover art by: Amir Starik No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in or introduced into a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means: electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, manual, or otherwise; without the prior written permission of the above author of this book.
About this book

In this unique Light-filled book, I offer practical guidance for energetic-spiritual healing and treatment. Inside you will find a rich variety of easy to apply yet powerful healing techniques that will enhance your spiritual development and enrich you as a healer. Among the subjects that are covered in this book you will find: methods of energetic purification and protection; applying Cosmic tools for healing; releasing energetic blockages; past life regressions; techniques for passing positive energies; working on the subconscious level; purifying the home and objects; retrieval of lost soul sparks; balancing the chakras, auras, and the meridians; meditations; and more.
Created through channeling, this book holds within it high energies that will vibrate your light body. Reading the book, learning, and practicing may cause a true energetic transformation within you. Connect to the Divine within and create the miracle of your life!
Dedication
I dedicate this book to my dear friend and husband Zvika and to my daughters, the special souls, Raz and Mickey, who have accompanied me and supported me along the way, who have accepted so naturally the great transformation in my life, and who lent an attentive ear to all the stories of miracles and marvels that I shared with them day and night.
I thank my mother, Alma Ronen, rest in peace, Who in her hard way has taught me so much, and to my father George Roman, rest in peace, who had always believed in me, encouraged me, and served as a pillar of strength for me to lean on.
Index Blessings and Messages from the Guides

Blessing From Orin A Message from Rachel, Jacob, and Joseph (Biblical ancestors) The Words of Metatron Jehovah
Prologue
The Great Miracle In My Life About the Book About the Course Messages and letters from students
Introduction
A Recommendation by Adrian Dvir A Blessing By Dr. Faina Elhazova Healing: An Article by Talya Tal
Part One: The Foundations of Healing

Energetic Purification What Are Black and Negative Energies? How Can You Identify the Black Energies? How Do Black Energies Reach A Person? How Would You Avoid Hurting Yourself and Others? Where Does the Black Energy Localize In the Body? How Does the Black Energy Work? Other Opinions So What Can You Do? Act Now! How Frequent Is the Cleansing Done? How Is the Work Performed? Energetic Cleansing: First Illustration--The Ellipse Second Illustration--'The One Who Cursed' Third Illustration--Into the Black Hole Fourth Illustration --Triangle, Circle, Square Fifth Illustration--Circle within a Circle Sixth Illustration--The Spiral Three Combined Ellipses Words of Caution Personal Development The 'Pool Effect' In Cleansing Physical Empathy
Protection Why Do We Need Protection? The Blue Bubble Star of David 'Concrete' Bubble Triple Protection Cosmic Tools The Spiral Opening Chakras with Spirals Apples Atomic Apples Erasers Radioactive Erasers Needles Misty Clouds The Rainbow A Silver Cloud and A Golden Cloud The Four Elements of the Universe The Sun--Represents the Element of Fire The Black Hole--Represents the Element of Air Mother Earth--Represents the Element of Earth The Sea--Represents the Element of Water Connecting to the Elements for Work Purposes The Cosmic Stores Recharging A Love Treatment from the Angels The Inner Screen What Is the Inner Screen? What Can You See In the Inner Screen? Working On the Inner Screen Connecting to Trees--by the Guides Jacob and Rachel (Biblical ancestors) What Kind of Energies Does the Tree Give You? Orin On Gratitude--by Orin Opening of Channels by Rachel, Jacob, and Joseph (Biblical ancestors) Opening Channels between Two People Opening Channels To Circles--To Create Positive Change Opening Channels between a Person and a Better Future What Do We Have So Far? (Intermediate Summary) Working Procedures for Treatments
Basic Principles In The Process of Spiritual Development What to Expect at this Stage? Should You Study Channeling? Connecting with Your Spiritual Guide Know with Whom You are Communicating. Know Whom You are Treating Working with Extraterrestrials The Federation of Extraterrestrials Implants Placed By Bad Extraterrestrials Transmitters Placed By Bad Extraterrestrials Extraterrestrial Parasites Capsules for Emotional Balance Catheterization Alert Button
Part Two: The Nave Healing

The Nave Healing The Divine Lights What are the Divine Lights? The Divine Lights and Their Functions How to Invite the Divine Lights How do You Direct the Lights where to Go? Pure Divine Light Self-Treatment with Pure Divine Light Treating a Client with Pure Divine Light Groups of Healing Lights Healing Green Lights Healing Disinfecting Yellow Lights The Group of Anesthetizing (Pain-Killing), Relaxing, and Calming Light Fortified Anesthetizing Lights The Group of Washing, Purifying Lights A Group of Cheerful Lights A Collective Invitation The Lights Divided into Groups Lights For Special Functions A Group of Attacking Lights Brown Light Using Brown Light to Prevent Energetic Leakage Grey Light Orange Light and Dark Orange Light Crimson Light Purple Light Deep Purple Light Brilliant Purple Light Black (Positive) Light
Milky Light Sparkling Light Brilliant Lights Brilliant Radioactive Lights An Agreement to Extend the Work Treatment with 'Intense Cold' Treatment with 'Intense Heat' Purifying a Home and Objects Low or Negative Entities Purifying Objects General Purification of the Home Energetic Recharge of Water Divine Submerge Opening The Third Eye For A Client Ways to Open the Third Eye for a Client How Will You Know that the Third Eye is Opening? A Visit to Paradise A Strong Treatment for All Disease Working With the Light of the Creator Breathe In the Light of the Creator Purifying Bubble Treatment By the Creator Techniques for Flowing Energy Recharging and Grounding with the Assistance of the Guide A Continuous Flow with the Assistance of the Guide Bombarding Automatic Increase of the Flow A Twist and Cross Flow A Flow in Circular Motions Flow from an Opposite Location The Lotus Flower The Energetic Center Line Aligning Our Own Energetic Center Line An Exercise for Emotional Balance Balancing the Center Line for a Client Straightening the Center Line for a Client Tips For Various Treatments Grounding with Mother Earth Intense Grounding A Ball of Tranquility for Treating Insomnia Black Pockets
Improving the Sight Emotionally Strengthening Energy Stimulation to Relieve Fatigue and Exhaustion Releasing Negative Energy Closing Open Circles and Balancing The Crown What Is the Crown? How Will You Know You are about to Receive a Crown? The Crowning Ceremony What Will You Do with the Crown? What Does the Crown do for You? Programming the Crown Programming for Performing Cleansing and Purification of the Aura Programming for Performing Protections Programming Preparation for a Treatment Programming for Treatment with Divine Lights How Do You Treat Through the Crown? A New Working Order for Treatment Thought Reading Entering the Head Of Releasing Negative Thoughts Installing a New Thought Pattern A Distant Telepathic Conversation In What Cases Should You Perform a Telepathic Conversation? Rules that You Must Respect and Obey Protection Gloves How Will You Receive the Gloves? Implants for Increasing the Energetic Flow Implants in Your Palms Implants in the Body How Will You Receive the Implants? How Will You Activate the Implants? Thoughts That 'Become Independent' How to Discover Thoughts That 'Become Independent' How Do You Remove Thoughts That 'Become Independent' A Dark Entity Inside the Head Sealing a Leak Inside the Head Flowing of Dark Negative Energy Sealing the Hole or Crack Positive Plasma
Positive Polarity and Negative Polarity by Archangel Raphael Receiving Support from Groups of Angels AHAVA Group How to Connect to the AHAVA Group How to Get Help from the AHAVA Group HEIOT Group NEHAMA Group Harassment and Taking Over by the Negative Polarity The Phenomenon What Happens to Such a Person? How Can You Help? What Is a Cosmic War? The Vacuum Phenomenon Collaboration with Convent ional Institution
Part Three: The Real Healing

Energetic Blocks What Is an Energetic Block? How Are Blocks Formed? What do the Blocks Look Like? Removing Blocks The Process of Removing Blocks Block Dispersal An Open Process A Quick Process for Removing Blocks Drawing Out 'Junk' How Will You Get Rid of the Junk? Tubes Magnets About Twin, Sister, and Identical Souls Twin Souls Sister Souls Identical (Complementary) Souls Unwanted Influences between Complementary Souls How to Disconnect these Channels The Wand The Wand as a Diagnosing Tool Using the Wand to Extend Meridians Other Functions of the Wand 'Umbilical Cord' Grounding The Treatment Procedure Connecting the 'Umbilical Cord' to Receive Love
Eilon, Angels' Healing 10
A Multi-Channel Grounding The Treatment Procedure Grounding through a Guide Grounding through the Angels 'Black Holes' in a Person's Body Treatment Procedure Love Treatment for the Heart Treatment Procedure Heart Massage Treatment Procedure Drawing out Excess Karma Drawing out Lethargy Problem Solving for a Client The Treatment Procedure A Fixed Problem The Treatment Procedure Bombarding with a Laser Beam Deep Meditative State Putting a Client in a Meditative State 'Reorganizing Rooms' How to Perform a 'Room Reorganizing' Problematic Issues in 'Room Reorganizing' 'Room Reorganizing' for a Client Applying to the Subconscious The Treatment Procedure The End of the Process 'Going Into the Archives' The Treatment Procedure Past Life Regression The Treatment Procedure Repairing the Experience The P ower Animals Making Contact with the Power Animals Soul Redemption How Does a Person Arrive at this Situation? The Difference between 'Capturing the Soul' and 'Harassment by the Negative Polarity' What Is 'Soul Redemption'?
How Do You Perform 'Soul Redemption'? Soul Splitting By Archangel Raphael Symptoms of Soul Splitting Retrieving Lost Soul Parts The Treatment Procedure Ceremony of Forgiveness and Pardon, and Connecting to the Soul What Is Expected after the Treatment? Energy Retrieval--By the Guides Stealing Energy The Treatment Procedure Retrieving Lost Energies What Is Expected after the Treatment?
Part Four: High Spiritual Healing

Demons What Do Demons Look Like? How to Discover Demons How to Remove Demons Diabolic Entities Removing a Diab olic Entity Spiritual Possessions An Active Spiritual Possession A Quiet Spiritual Possession How to Release a Quiet Spiritual Possession Possession by a Living Person An Unborn Baby The 'Beam of God' How to Activate the 'Beam of God' Shooting Historical Bodies with the 'Beam of God' Energetic Image of the Disease What Should You Do? Surgery How to Perform a Surgery Looking inside the Belly I Am God! A Message from the One and Only The Ancient Monster What Does the Ancient Monster Look Like? Treatment Procedure
The Cocoon Black Pockets that 'Become Independent' Brain Massage The Great Grounding--Reptiles and Insects How Will You Know if the Client is Ready for the Great Grounding? What Does that 'Dirt' Look Like? Treatment Procedure Manual Treatment Treatment with the 'Grounding Group' Canceling an Ancient Curse Treatment Procedure On Diminishing the Devil and On Salvation by Metatron Jehovah Contemplating Salvation
Part Five: Meditations and Exercises

'In Nature' by Archangel Michael Filling with Golden Light by Orin 'The Shell' by Orin An Exercise for Inner Listening by Orin 'The Divine Bird' by Orin Meditation for Removing Anger by Orin 'In the Planet of Purification' by Orin 'The Biggest Tree In the World' by Great Eagle 'The Holy Lake' by Great Eagle 'The Worm' by Great Eagle 'Opening Doors in the Body' by Great Eagle 'The Babies' Train'--A Repairing Experience Treatment by Rachel Healing with Sounds by Archangel Raphael 'The Black Box'--Cleaning the System from Emotional Loads--by Rachel Forgiveness and Pardon--Releasing People and Hurts--by Rachel The Little Child inside Us--by Rachel Work for Releasing Anger--'The Cocoon' --by Kryon
Blessing from Orin This book is intended for everyone who aspires to a life of health and happiness, fulfillment and balance, love and abundance. This message brings blessings and light to the recipients. In this special age on Earth, the Age of Aquarius, many changes occur daily. The light increases and is being spread by messengers of good will, volunteers, people of light. High -level guides are reincarnated and exist with you upon this earth. These are souls who came to guide and heal, to teach, and be a bridge between the worlds. Every day new people are joining the ever-growing movement in an exodus from the darkness towards divinity, toward heaven. The gaps are decreasing and closing by the hour. The gaps between heaven and earth are not that wide anymore. There are many bridges and passages through which knowledge is passed and distributed among humanity. This knowledge will be available to you in your blessed way, it will help in advancement, and will ease the way for those who are still on it. The day is near in which salvation, unity, and eternity will be achieved. The mission will be completed. Blessed people, be proud of your work and achievements. People of light, we count on you. We are with you always. Ask and we shall help! We will not let you fall and be hurt. We are with you day and night, be strong! Orin.
A message from Rachel, Jacob and Joseph (Biblical ancestors) We wish to let you know the value of these days, their importance. Never before has spirituality bloomed on Earth as it is blooming today. This is a special age, the age of transformation, the age of light and enlightenment. Each and every one of you is committed to take an active part in the main stream of climbing the stairs of wisdom. Each and every one of you has taken upon himself, before birth, a role, and an assignment, whether in guiding, in healing, in cou nseling; or in spreading love and kindness in your surroundings. The heaven and highest guidance do not expect much of you. Just be faithful to yourselves, be yourselves. Stick to the light for this is the essence of your existence. In evil you perish, in darkness--you ache and yearn for the complete Unity. But Unity stands in front of you--it is in your heart, your soul, inside you. You are the children of God. In each one of you exists the knowledge and the ability to be the architect of your own lives, to heal your fellow men and to create miracles. All you have to do is desire it! Look for God within yourself and you will find Him. With a lot of love, Rachel, Jacob, and Joseph
The Words of Metatron Jehovah My dear people, I love you with eternal love, all-embracing love. I know how hard things are for you, how painful. I feel you at all times. You can't imagine how much the connection between us is increasing, what transformations you bring upon the world and the universe. Even though it seems that the days are difficult and bad, violence wins and the evil is spreading, the forces of Light are rising and getting stronger, you are the channels through which they flow. Every day you cleanse yourselves, purify yourselves, and are getting ready to the arrival of light. It will arrive. Be strong and brave! Hold on since you are not alone. All the Heaven is with you, for you and to help you. Open your hearts to receive the light, wisdom, and love. Heal yourselves and remove all doubts, hesitation, and uncertainty from your path. They cloud your eyes and prevent you from seeing the way. Believe in the spiritual way because it will bring you to wholeness, to unity, to the great enlightenment toward which every soul aspires to achieve. I bless you for your courage and your loyalty to the goal. With these words I fortify you and fill your hearts with my love. Metatron
Prologue
The Great Miracle in My Life On June 2000, I had an experience that has opened a wide door for me into a wonderful and exciting world that I didn't know existed. Not only did I not know of the existence of this place, I also didn't know of the existence of the entrance to it. I hardly noticed the fact that I had been standing in front of it for quite some time until it opened up in front of me, inviting me to pass through it and enter. I have never known of realities other than the physical tangible certainty of my life and that of the people around me. I never imagined how high and wide the heavens were, how full of life and events. Indeed, a month before this astonishing event of my life occurred, I started wondering about different questions. Such as, what is channeling? I'd heard the word before but hadn't grasped its meaning. I asked myself: what does channeling mean? With whom do the channelers speak? It was all very mysterious and intriguing. In those days, I amused myself with Tarot cards. I received insights and answers to my questions from the cards. The readings were very accurate and it only increased in me the sense of mystery and need to know: who is answering my questions? How do the cards know? Who's behind the drawing of the cards? The most amazing thing of all happened. The heavens opened for me. And so the story goes. One day, I went to the house of a nearby family to give my condolences on the death of their son. He had been a twenty-seven year old fellow who passed away from liver cancer. I didn't know him personally, but I had heard about his illness from his sister, who, in those days, was the friend of my younger daughter, Mickey. After spending about fifteen minutes in the house, I left with an odd feeling from the place accompanying me. I felt shivers, pressures in my head, and an odd fear. In spite of the fact that there was no logical reason for this, I felt as if something was happening, and that I had no control over it. Shortly after, things cleared up. Then while washing the dishes, I suddenly heard a voice echoing loudly in my head: "Margalit! Margalit!" I was startled and scared, but at the same time, it felt as if I was familiar with this situation. As if I was coming home, a feeling of deja vu. I asked, "Who is calling me?" The answer was, "It's me--" He gave his name. It was the deceased young man. "I would like you to give messages to my family. I was thrilled, excited, shaking, afraid, and confused all at the same time. For a moment, I doubted my own sanity. Had I gone crazy? I asked myself. A clear gut feeling convinced me. This was really happening; someone was actually talking to me; it wasn't my imagination. The young man implored me to take paper in hand and write down his words. I accepted and wrote for him. This was the first time in my life that I had ever done such a thing, which turned out to be my first experience of channeling. All that happened to me subsequently came from the deep desire to keep this unique and exciting experience, to prevent it from getting lost, from vanishing into thin air. I sat down and wrote three pages full of information and requests. The young man dictated to me messages to each member of his family and asked me to pass them on. In the
messages, there were warnings about bankruptcy and indications of preventative actions. The older brother was cautioned about contracting a dangerous disease. Other messages were to the girlfriend the young man was going to marry, and more. After many doubts that had kept me awake nights, I decided to contact his mother. I told her what had happened. Unfortunately, the family refused to see me and accept the messages due to reasons known only to them. For three more days, the deceased man continued to beg me to contact his family. Since they refused, he left. Two years later, he returned to me. Again, he asked me to deliver the messages to his family. As they rejected me once more, he finally let go. In the next few days, my channeling was like a twenty-four hour open line. I was a conduit day and night. I felt elated, euphoric. The situation felt unreal, as of something that was not yet perceived and assimilated. I was stunned and thrilled. Patterns of thought that I had held for forty-eight years suddenly collapsed. I was required to reexamine them, make changes, and reorganized quickly. On the one hand, I lost ground, on the other, a new path was offered to me. I had to adapt rapidly to the situation. All at once, I became sensitive to energies surrounding me. Energies of people, objects, and places. I could feel the energies and make the distinction between good ones and bad ones just by being near them. I started seeing visions. Soon I developed increased spiritual abilities, without any effort on my part. I had never read books about spirituality. I didnt study healing or channeling. I didn't listen to lectures or had any contacts other than a short self-awareness workshop and a few healing treatments that I received from my healer friend, Dr. Faina Elhazova. I went through a deep transformation. As a non-religious woman, I had known nothing about Heaven. I didn't know whether I should believe in the existence of angels and God. Moreover, being a daughter of a family that survived the Holocaust, and the remains of the persecutions and murders by the Nazis, I had grown up feeling that the name of God should not be mentioned in our home, let alone pray to Him. I had always considered myself an earthly practical, logical person with both feet on the ground. I'd always thought that spirituality was a matter for a few weirdoes, for strange, and off center people. What had happened to me occurred so quickly and unexpectedly that it left me dizzy. Soon my head became like an operator, full of channeling and requests. I found myself talking to my personal guide, Viran. He appeared to be my companion and a guide for thousands of years. He had incarnated along with me as one of my ancient reincarnations. Later, I met my counsel of sages that included three angels who accompanied me on my path and taught me healing. After that, my first contact was made with Orin who became my guide for subsequent years. As time passed, other guides appeared to me, different and unexpected. Such as "Great Eagle" who appeared to me as a huge American Indian head with a feathered headdress, Kryon, who had proposed methods of treatment. Alien groups from 'The High Council' suggested that they establish a clinic in my house. I met angels: Michael, Raphael, Gabriel, Ariel, Uriel, Nathaniel, Azriel, Adon-El, Hai-El, Daniel, Samuel, Hannanel, Zerubabel, Shir-El
Various groups helped me in guiding and healing: MERKABA; AHAVA; HEIOT, RIVA, NEHA MA, also, Biblical ancestors such as Rachel, Lea, Rebecca, Jacob and Joseph. Divine entities at different levels visited me throughout the years: Jesus, Jehovah, 'The Compassionate One', Adonai, 'Father of Peace', 'Father of Mercy', 'Father of Safety', 'The Holy of Holies', 'Hakadosh Baruch Hu', ('He Who Is The Sacred One'), 'The One and Only', and Metatron Jehovah who was my guide in the last year. They all guided me, taught me, gave treatments, helped, supported, protected and healed me day and night. They stood beside me at all times. The days grew into a special routine: every morning when I awoke, the guides greeted me with, "Good Morning Margalit." Afterwards, I would start studying in my 'University of Angels' with papers and notebooks, pencils and pens, in classes that sometimes lasted until the late hours of the night. The angels and divinities had taken a place of respect and love in my life; conversations with them became natural and their presence tangible and real. Over four years all of them taught lessons, secrets of healing, techniques, meditations and methods of practice that have accumulated into the complete course of spiritual healing which I am happy to share and pass forward with love throughout this book to whomever desires to take part in the great miracle of our time. The bond with the heavens anchored me, gave me roots, and gave direction and meaning to my life. The guides answered all my questions with eternal patience and treated me, my family, and whomever else I asked help for. I had never encountered any rejection or negative response. Channeling opened endless opportunities for me. First and foremost, I was able to have a blessed and moving relationship with my father, George Roman who died in 1983 from lung cancer. My father, whom I had considered all my life as my closest friend and the person nearest to me, had been painfully absent all those years. Now I talked with him at every occasion My wounds began to heal My emotional needs were being fulfilled. The studying opened my eyes, removed fears and anxieties that had been a large part of my personality all my life, and gave me satisfaction and self-esteem like nothing else ever did before. My life became a celebration, a series of miracles, an enchanted legend. Still in the beginning of my new path, one night at 2 a.m., the guides woke me with an urgent message: "Margalit, call your mother and wake her up! It's extremely urgent, a matter of life and death. She's only a few minutes from 'slipping away'!" Frightened and shaking, I called her. My older daughter Raz, who was living with her grandmother, answered the phone. After what seemed to me like forever, per my request, she tried to wake up my mother. She tried with great effort for several minutes until she succeeded. My mother was confused, disoriented, and sounded drugged. After a short conversation I let her return to sleep. When I asked the guides what had happened here, the guides explained that my mother had taken a 'cocktail' of contradictory medications at a high dose and nearly passed away. Needless to say, that night I hardly closed my eyes. The next morning, I talked to my mother. She recalled nothing of the events of the previous night. When I inquired more deeply, she admitted that she had forgotten to tak e her regular medications in the morning and at noon, and decided that it would be a good idea to take all of them at once in the evening!
This is not the only miracle that the angels performed. One evening about a year ago, while driving in my car, Metatron Jehovah contacted me and announced, "Margalit, I am going to perform a miracle for you!" I was happy and very excited. I was certain that he was referring to my client, a woman with cancer who was to arrive the next day. However, what happened was even more amazing. The next evening my husband, Zvika had a stroke accompanied by an epileptic seizure. We're talking about a healthy young man who had never been sick. This unexpected occurrence was very traumatic. Zvika collapsed on the floor, breathing harshly, foaming at the mouth. He lay unconscious for about forty minutes. He almost stopped breathing. His color was dark then paled. For some reason, the ambulance was detained and didn't arrive for all this time. In my heart, I had already accepted the worst. Suddenly, a minute before the paramedics arrived, Zvika opened his eyes and sat up like a man reborn. He was confused but slowly recuperated and spoke coherently. There was no visible damage or injury. In the examination and scan at the hospital, a medium-severe brain hemorrhage could be seen. The trauma was serious. Doctors and nurses repeatedly said, "It is really a miracle that he came out of it without any damage!" A miracle indeed!
About the Book This book is dedicated to both beginners and advanced. I hope and believe that the abundance of important information that was transferred through me from Heaven, will find its way to every person who is walking in the path of spirituality and healing. Whether one will become a professional healer, practitioner, spiritual guide, or uses the information for private needs in healing oneself and family members. I write this book for conventional practitioners as well, doctors, psychologists, and psychiatrists, that are interested in alternative ideas, and are willing to look into them, and examine them in depth. This book is also dedicated to all people--for we are all holy children of God--who want to know more, get connected, and take part in the change and transformation process that is going through all humanity in this special time. I hope that this book will also find its way to sick people, who have given up hope for finding a cure with conventional means, and will bring inspiration and new hope to them and into their hearts. In spiritual healing, one can find answers to many questions which conventional healing cannot give. This book demonstrates many such cases. In most cases, reading and studying this book cannot be a substitute for a course that allows for experiencing, development, and progress under supervision, but it can add, support, teach, demonstrate directions, and trends in the holistic spiritual healing. Throughout the four years of collecting and arranging the material of this book, I have refrained from reading other books or studying other subjects of spiritual development and healing. It did not come from a conscious decision, but rather from an odd 'coincidence'. For some 'reason' I encountered difficulties such as tiredness, lack of time, unwillingness, etc. Now I know, there was an intention behind this 'coincidence'--it was to preserve my naivet and prevent me from being influenced by other sources. It turned out that all the knowledge and information that is given in this book, without exception, was passed directly through channeling from Heaven. Nevertheless, I am aware that knowledge is universal, every day throughout the world, thousands of people are opened to channeling, and perhaps other spiritual teachers in other places received and are still receiving similar info rmation every day. In such cases I would be happy to exchange information.
About the Course The course is based on the individual progress and spiritual development of the student. It is not just a hollow endless list of tips and recipes for healing. The progress is conditional on doing and experiencing the work of repeating the material and applying it on clients, self-treatment, and fulfilling the guidelines of spiritual and energetic cleansing in a step-by-step progress--without skipping any part. The method that is given here is quick and focused. It has shortcuts and concessions. It is a work performed through the emotional intelligence and not through conventional education and learning. Nonetheless, the guides promise us that the simplicity of the method will not conflict or diminish the work that we have to accomplish as human beings on earth.
Throughout This Course Several Principles are Manifested Anyone can do this! The information already exists within the un-conscious of each and every one of us. The purpose of teaching is to help us recall this information and to bring it to our full awareness. The process is done through expanding and adding information and then condensing it. Alternatively: To know--to be aware, to recognize, to trust, to apply, to internalize, to condense. The process leads the spiritual student from the concrete to the abstract, from the tangible to the spiritual. Throughout the path, the student is required to self-test, to have self-awareness, and complete personal integrity. The healing requires a holistic approach and applies to the person at all levels: physical, emotional (psychological), cognitive, and spiritual (energetic). The universe helps healing, it gives free treatments, cosmic tools and energies, but the person himself does the real healing. At the root of every illness exists the decision to be sick. In order to heal, the person must cancel this decision, to consciously choose and decide to be healthy. One should also be aware and recognize outer forces that jeopardize and harm him and neutralize them. Genuine healing involves a process that occurs in three major steps. 1. 2. 3. Cleansing Energy charging Working on developing your awareness. Making a journey into one's self for the purpose of finding the essence of the problem, revising the moment of decision when the illness was created and make a change, replacing the pattern or repairing the experience to cancel the initial decision. The methods of treatment and healing given in this book are in no way to replace conventional healing or treatment, but to compliment and support it. In any case of problems or illness, the conventional way should be sought out first.
Messages and Letters from Students

Throughout the way I receive a positive, supporting attitude form clients and students. Everyone is overwhelmed by the easiness, the grace and charm of the method. Here are a few citations chosen from the multitude of Thank-You letters.
Dear, beloved Margalit! I arrived to you on the day of, confused, worried and not knowing to where I have arrived. I thought that I have reached yet another storyteller. It was a day before my birthday and little I knew that it was the beginning of my re-birth. I stepped out of your clinic surprised, excited and very confident that I have found that which I was looking for, and I believed in your way. I sensed that it was my way too, even though it looked very long I have been through many things in that way and all thanks to your patience, your understanding, your listening to the whispers of my heart. Even when it happened in odd days and hours, I always had a sympathetic ear. All that, thanks to the benevolence and love that you had towards me, and towards all that surrounds you. I feel like a newborn baby, and far as I'm concerned, Margalit, I have two birthdays: a biological one and a spiritual one, the one in which I rediscovered the truth that you allowed me to see. This path leads me to this very day. I hope that I will have the same strength that you have, to give the same way that you have given, and keep on giving me every day, of my new life. This love you gave with the full intention of giving, one, which I have never seen through out all my life. I'm proud to be in your presence Margalit. You are a great soul, and greater than life. May you be blessed for it, and may the heavens keep on providing you the strength that you give to others. With deep feelings of love and appreciation, like a baby to his mother, Meir Vakyl, Nahareya
Dear Margalit, It was not by chance that I turned on the radio on the same day and the same channel on which you were speaking. I simply thank the mighty Lord for bringing us together. I came to receive a treatment from you and I saw what amazing results can be achieved. Thank you very much Margalit, for your benevolence, your investment, your attention and love,
Alisa Mizrachi, Holon
One day in the year 2000, I felt extremely bad: I had pains all over my body, every small area was painful, and more than that: I had pressure in the chest and difficulty in breathing. I could not function. I didn't sleep during the night or during the day. I didn't have a moment of peace. I stopped working; I lay in bed and suffered. Until salvation arrived--Margalit I called Margalit and told her what the problem was, and through the phone, Margalit helped me to get free from the pains. She found out what the problem was. I would like to emphasize that Margalit spared no effort. I arrived to her with a strong seizure of difficulties in breathing. I felt that this was it! I was going to end my life then and there. The treatment started immediately. Margalit made sure that I was cleansed from all the poisons in my body. It wasn't easy; Margalit took care to go through the entire process without despair. After two hours of treatment I felt that I was a new person, a person that functions as well as before. I was not afraid to go back home at a late hour. I don't have enough words to thank Margalit for her treatment and for her dedication, for her concern, even after the treatment ended, and calling me on the phone. What would I have done without Margalit? Thank you; thank you very much for everything. May there be many such people as you. Leah C., Afula
To Margalit, It was the first time that I watched the TV series, Super TV. When I saw you appearing and talking about your work. I had a feeling that it was not a coincidence. I was connected to your words immediately. I arrived to you for a treatment for a ruptured disc in my spine that had caused me terrible pains. You promised nothing--on the contrary, you explained that in situations like that, sometimes even surgery doesn't help. (Who knew that better than I--about a year prior to that, I already had such a surgery, without success.) Here the unbelievable has happened, in only one treatment the pains completely stopped! With thanks and appreciation, Raphael S., Beersheba
Margalit, I'm sure it was God who has brought me to you. Never before have I read the magazine, 'La'isha', and I don't know what possessed me to buy it on that critical day. I read through it like a person looking for something without knowing exactly what, until I stopped at your
picture. I read the article about you at once, and immediately I understood why I had bought the magazine. I arrived to you at the last minute before hernia surgery, with sharp pains in my stomach. I don't remember anything from the treatment, only that I fell asleep and dreamt that I was floating three feet above the bed, but you cannot argue with the results--the surgery was canceled and so were the pains. With eternal love, Natalie F., Kfar-Saba
To the dear soul Margalit, We wish to say to you a few words: Thank you for all the magic and wonders, For your time and your effort, For your willingness, dedication and especially the intention, For wonderful channeling, your teaching and your attitude. You have led us to new worlds We could see and feel the heavens open wide We were connected to lights, stores and guides, To healing energies, entities and extraterrestrials. We have learned how to channel and cleanse ourselves We have been connected and rose to higher frequency levels For this and much more, we send you a blessing, May you arrive quickly to the highest wisdom May you see the most sublime light And enjoy all the best that still awaits you. With love, (with hope, with joy, with vigor) Ella, Gila, Hagit, Kohava, Lisa, Lily, Fannie, Zila
One morning several years ago, my friend Margalit called me up and invited me to her house. After I arrived she started telling me, with great excitement, about the frightening strange thing that had happened to her and that she could not explain: she told me that she could hear her young neighbor who had passed away several days before. He was pressing her to make contact with his family. At the end of her words she asked me what my opinion was about the matter. I had known Margalit for about forty years, and I had already seen her as an earthly realistic woman. I didn't know how to react: on one hand she was clearly telling the truth, on the other hand it was difficult to accept what she had told me. This was actually the beginning of the way. In the first few months, Margalit was amazed, thrilled, and full of wonder, and then slowly she got used to it.
About a year ago she invited me to participate in a workshop that she gave in order to teach people to heal themselves and others in the energetic level. Often I arrived to the workshop upset and in pain, but always at the end I felt much better, full of energy and a lot calmer. No doubt that my good friend broadened the limits of my understanding and perception, enriched my life and contributed to my health, my happiness, and my inner peace. With lots of love, many thanks, and wishing you much success, Bina Woorman, Rishon Lezion
Introduction
A Recommendation by Adrian Dvir I was happy to read Margalit Eilon's new book. All the information that arrives from a healer -channeler is welcome and sheds light on an area that is complicated, and mostly hidden from the public's understanding. For that she will be blessed. I know well the investment and great effort required in writing such a book, and publishing it. I was delighted to read about methods of treatment that are familiar to me, and even more delighted to read about methods that are unknown to me. Actually, every healer develops his individual methods of work. That area is wide and complex, the foundations of the healer-channeler work are found deep in the vast experience of his ancient soul. From my own experience, no two treatments are alike, and I keep finding out --or better yet, remember a new-old method that is appropriate for a specific case. I was happy to meet in the pages of this book, 'old friends' such as entities, extraterrestrials, councils, and super organizations that are found in daily channeling connections with Margalit and other healers. A healer usually doesn't work alone; he is like the front of a building that the client sees. Behind this front, numerous dimensions exist and in them, dozens or even thousands of various agents that wish to help each one in his area. Starting with angels, beings, and light beings, extra-terrestrials with medical tools, and ending with a diversity of 'divine means' for which, in our language, we have no definition. We have to use abstract definitions such as energies, colors, etc. The definitions do not contribute to the understanding of the tools themselves. To clarify the subject, in hospitals for example, 'energies' are used to allow us to see into the body. By that, I mean of course, x-rays, ultrasound, and Magnetic Resonance Imaging. As well, healing 'energies' are used, such as infrared, ultrasound for breaking up kidney stones, and various radiations to cure cancer, etc. Of course, behind the abstract definition 'energies' exist a very advanced technology. Imagine then, civilizations that are hundreds and thousands of years more advanced than civilization on earth and you can understand what an impressive technology stands behind these energies. Even though most clients only see the healer making odd incomprehensible motions, in fact, what happens during the treatment is beyond our grasp. Those who have supersensory vision can report on what happens behind the scene of the physical world and in different dimensions. These are not mysterious secrets but rather knowledge that we have yet to learn. Have an enjoyable read! Adrian Dvir, rest in peace, healer with extra-terrestrials.* *Adrian passed away three days after writing these lines. I was blessed that this great man read my book, encouraged me, and guided me with his characteristic kindness. Thank you Adrian. Margalit.
A Blessing By Dr. Faina Elhazova I would like to give my blessing to Margalit for her enlightened way and the mission that she has chosen. Each one chooses his mission in this world; one bakes bread, another takes care of souls. The New Age, the Age of Aquarius, is characterized by strong spiritual development. People are attracted to the light, love, and joy. They need to connect to them in order to develop. People are returning to God, and they are doing it in the same manner in which they 'separated' from Him. If a person is angry with someone, he needs to forgive him. If a person is angry with himself, he must make peace with himself. If a wall of negative thinking separates man and God, then cleansing and initiation of oneself is the right path to take. It is enough to decide to rectify the situation; the Universe will help. The role of the healer is to help us find out and neutralize all the blockages and their interference that are standing in our way. I truly believe that if this book had been published years ago, I would have been spared many mistakes. I think that this book should be a guide for everybody. It is wrapped in light and full of practical information. I thank you Margalit, for your contribution to the world, and bless you the reader, for the path of light, which you have chosen. Good luck. Dr. Faina Elhazova, A healer in bio-energy and a spiritual teacher Israel
Healing: An Article by Talya Tal Disease is an illusion. Disease is a shield from the truth. Disease is a result of a conflict in the brain that is manifested in the body. Therefore, healing depends on understanding the reason that created the disease illusion. Disease is a choice, a way to protect our self. A decision, (usually an unconscious one,) is made by the patient out of weakness, out of not wanting to deal with a certain 'reality'. In the subconscious, the patient is certain that the illness gives him strength. Obviously it gives him some secondary benefit. In such a case, healing is perceived as 'dangerous'. Health--which is the true power--is perceived as danger. The patient believes that he is separated from the total unity that threatens him. He believes in his heart that the total unity threatens his individual existence that it might lead to his extinction, and hence, he thinks to 'conquer' the total unity and to 'cause' its absolute 'extinction'. Hence, healing signifies defeat for the patient. Healing represents the greatness of the total unity. Healing makes the patient understand that he is united with the total unity. Healing stands with all the things that the patient has been hiding from himself in order to 'protect' his life. If the patient heals then he is responsible for his thoughts. If he is responsible for his thoughts, then he will be prepared to 'sacrifice his life,' in order to prove to others how weak and helpless he is to himself, (because that's how he gets a
secondary benefit). If he chooses death, then his weakness is seen to him as strength, for he is punishing himself with the same punishment that, according to him, the total unity would have caused him. By this, he takes a preventative step and 'cancels' its ability to 'punish' him. The change in concept: Once the patient understands the uselessness of the disease for him, he is immediately healed. All he needs is to accept the fact that the illness gives him no profit. Not a spiritual one, nor a material one. However, in order to accept that, first he has to understand several facts: 1. 2. 3. 4. It is obvious that the decisions are made by the mind and not by the body. If the disease is a way 'to solve guilt problems' then this is clearly a decision. If the disease is a decision, then it is obvious, that it is created by the mind, not the body. If the mind created the disease, the healing must come from there as well.
Usually the patient refuses to accept the fact that the disease is a decision of the mind, not the body! Accepting this will break the belief that the body has functional qualities for which the mind is not responsible. Such a belief will break the notion that the person is not responsible for his own illness and that it is not connected to his mind. Healing is based on changing this notion. This is also true for every healing method. The patient must understand that the disease is a choice of the mind to use the body in an unfavorable manner to achieve a certain effect. A patient that truly understands this is healed immediately. If not, the healing will not last for long. A patient who decides against healing will not be healed. Therefore, the mind of the patient is the healer. The consequence depends of course, on the decision of the patient. As for healing, faith is a tremendous and powerful force. Where then is the place of the healer? In this situation, the healer appears as if he is helping the patient to get better. The patient has chosen the healer in order to manifest his wishes in a concrete way. This is exactly what the healer does and no more. Actually he is not needed at all. As a matter of fact, the patient can get up and walk without the help of the healer, if he says: "I have no use for this disease." There is not even one form of illness that will not be cured at the same time, once the patient decides to do so! All the patient has to do is to decide. He has to accept the fact that the illness arises from the mind and not the body. Actually, it has no connection to the body. However, if he is willing to accept that, it might 'cost him' the price of changing his perception of the world. Since the world has no control over him, the world is not responsible for his disease. In this case, the responsibility for his disease lies only upon him because he is the one that interprets the way in the wrong manner.
We see only what we choose to see. No more, no less. The world for itself causes nothing, certainly not these diseases. Only the thought that the world is causing our illness causes us to be sick. In this lies the freedom both from guilt and from the disease, since they are identical. However, to reach this freedom, one needs to accept the non-existence of the body. If we accept that the body is an illusion, clearly the pain will disappear, and with it, our confusion, and lack of clarity about the world will disappear as well. Now the understanding will appear for the real sequence of events. Now the order of creation will be understood. The cause and the effect (karma) happen concurrently. This understanding will change the world. Its value is priceless, without measure. Once understanding has been achieved, one can control all aspects of life. You cannot continue living in an illusion. It is like the domino effect. Once the first tile has fallen, the rest of the tiles will fall by themselves throughout the entire structure. Such an understanding reminds us that we are together in total unity. At that instant, the moment of understanding, there is no meaning to pain, loss, suffering, or guilt because without the reason, they just disappear. Now you can see the karma, (the cause and effect) from a sane point of view without alteration or fear. The karma only 'copies' creation and rebuilds the 'reality' that we experience. Talya Tal Astrologer and spiritual teacher Israel
29
Part One: The Foundations of Healing
Energetic Purification
What Are Black and Negative Energies? Just as there are good positive energies in the Universe that we could use in order to heal and improve our condition, also exist negative bad energies that interfere with our healing, create blocks in us, and close us from the option of being healed. Whereas the positive energies appear to us in the multitude of the rainbow colors with all their beautiful hues, the negative energies always appear to us in dark tones of black or gray, sometimes as smog, and therefore they are called black energies. The energies, which we perceive as 'good' or 'bad', are an outcome of the Cosmic Order, an expression of the positive polarity and the negative polarity. The plus and the minus are at the source of All That Is. If we believe in the existence of good healing energies, we also have to accept the existence of the black energies as well. How Can You Identify The Black Energies? When examining the aura of a person who has been harmed by black energies, dark spots or black aggregations can be seen. Sometimes in extreme cases, the whole person looks as if a turbid cloud surrounds them and closes upon them like a smoke screen. In more severe cases, there might be the phenomenon of 'crawling' of this black cloud from the client to the healer, as if in a desperate unconscious intent of the client to get rid of the problem and pass it to the healer: whether from a deep need to share, as if the healer could bear the burden with him, or whether from a will to 'infect' that comes from negative thinking. One way or the other, the healer should act swiftly in forming a defense for himself, if he has not done so before, and cleanse the client quickly. A healer that is not aware of this phenomenon might feel sick within minutes from the beginning of the encounter. The unpleasant, to say the least, sensations that the healer might feel are suffocation, pressure in the head or chest, dizziness, nausea, etc. An enlightened healer with a pure heart is immune to this kind of contamination; black ene rgy will not cling to him. But why should one take the risk? Even if you are not yet a healer, and do not have extra-sensory abilities, you could still use your natural sensitivity to sense the black energies and their influence on you when you stand next to a person who is engulfed by them: unease, shuddering, and unexplained feeling of disgust, a feeling that something bad is crawling on you or is touching you, goose bumps, etc. If you feel one of the sensations that were previously mentioned, suffocation, pressure, dizziness, etc.,--run! You have been contaminated!
How Do Black Energies Reach A Person? There are several ways: the first is by 'contagion'. When we are at a low level physical, emotional, energetic--we are vulnerable, exposed and might magnetize masses of black energies to ourselves, from another person or from the surrounding area. The second is 'self-manufacturing'. From the viewpoint that negative thinking equals negative energy, we should understand that every emotion that arises from negative thought patterns, such as anger, fear, hatred and more--automatically creates black energy in us. Untreated, this will continue to accumulate within us, creating the basis for blocks, and later on for illnesses and physical problems as well.
30
The third and most important is accepting them from another person who simply sent them to us for his own reasons, envy, anger, hatred, etc. This is what is called in layman's terms the 'evil eye'. In folklore, in addition to the evil eye, there are also curses and spells, black magic, voodoo, and similar other names and terms, that express the same idea. Someone is sending a 'message' to someone else by using black energies that are being drawn from the negative polarity. What differentiates between the different types of these activities are the intensity, the amount of black energy that is being sent and the intent of the action. For example, did I mean for you to only scratch your new car, or do I wish you dead? One way or another, whether the black energy is sent consciously and with great intent, or unconsciously ---it works!
How Would You Avoid Hurting Yourself and Others? If indeed you really want to be of pure heart and advance in the spiritual way, aspire toward the positive polarity with full intention to stay with the Light and the Light only. At this moment, stop cursing, stop speaking bad about others, convert negative thinking into positive thinking at all times. Be aware of negative feelings that you might feel towards other people and be aware what you are transmitting by 'airmail' and neutralize those mind-sets. Apparently, this may seem as a difficult endless labor, and it is! But it is not an impossible mission. It is a matter of awareness and choice at each and every given moment. If however, you do curse someone in a moment of anger, for example, saying, 'Go to hell' to a driver that cut you off, you always have the right to cancel it. Say silently or aloud 'Canceled' (you may repeat this up to three times as necessary). Imagine that you send some kind of Packman-like thought following the black energy bubble that you had previously transmitted; it catches, swallows and cancels it. Moreover, and I stress this with sincere concern, that there is a wide active industry of malevolent professionals, evil mages and witches, spell-casters, servants of the dark forces. All you have to do is pay them and they will cast an evil spell for you on anyone you wish, ruin your competitors' business, separate couples and families This is not a recommendation, of course, but a warning. If you are using such a service, it is as if you had done it yourself! In the Heavens, on your record, this is a stain against you. Stay away from it!
Where Does the Black Energy Localize in the Body? The black energy sits in the body in different places. Usually it will magnetize first to areas that are already vulnerable, areas that are in an energetic deficit. Areas that have gone through trauma, sick areas, or that are developing an illness, which probably have an energetic block. Black energy sent by another person could home in to the exact area to which it was sent. For example, if you wish someone would not get pregnant, the black energy will be focused in the genitals and prevent normal function. In a person who suffers from negative thought patterns, black energy would accumulate in the places that are associated with his thoughts. If he is afraid, excited, anxious, the black energy will usually focus in the stomach. If he is worried, stressed, hurt, the energy will generally focus in the heart area, or according to interpretations of his internal emotional world. The person who has been through continuous traumas and or received black energy from different directions would be filled by it. How Does the Black Energy Work? The black energy works by blocking the natural flow of the energy of the body, like a blood clot, which blocks the passage of blood in the vessels. Without the regular flow of the energy of the body to the blocked areas, the energy will decline to a negative level, which means problems, pain, and illness.
31
A person who suffers from black energies is a sick person bothered by various problems. He might feel discomfort in the chest and heart, and nothing is able to release it. He suffers from aches in different parts of the body, from ailments that were diagnosed in conventional medicine, but that for some reason could not be cured. This person may also suffer from sleep disorders or other complaints, and may feel physical and emotional blocks. Many times this person complains that: 'Nothing goes well for me. I can't get anywhere. No matter what I do, nothing changes.' He might be depressed, feel hopeless, down in the dumps. His personal relations are stalled and so on, and so forth, in an endless list of problems. In no way do I claim that all the above problems and more; are caused solely and directly by the black energies. However, according to my experience, energetic cleansing releases a major part of them and opens a path to treatment and healing that will come out later. Hence, the cleansing is beneficial. Moreover, black energies may also prevent one from accepting the treatment. In which case, no techniques of energy flow or healing will help and in some cases not even conventional treatment. The place is closed to healing. Nothing can get in. This fact is very important to both healers and clients. If we take the time to cleanse and purify the client with energetic cleansing prior to the treatment, we might save ourselves from the disappointment of an unsuccessful treatment. Energetically purifying ourselves often will bring us to an optimal level of energetic purity, which will be followed by a regular flow of the energy of the body and will prevent illness.
Other Opinions Unfortunately many people negate the phenomenon, calling it primitive nonsense that has no place in the modern world. It's a pity. Black negative energies are sent from one man to another daily with hateful thoughts, malicious words, curses, and ill wishes. This black energy arrives precisely to the intended address and sticks, where it may harm and cause damage; create problems, illnesses, various blocks, and even death while the poor victim doesn't understand what happened. I have heard people saying, 'Black energies don't exist for me! I stick to the light. I am full of light and therefore black energies are not relevant in my world.' I say correct! This is the optimal condition. This is the highest spiritual level to which we all aspire, the ultimate in purity. Nevertheless, how many people do you know have reached such enlightenment? Such complete self-awareness? Complete control of the ego? That are never sick, whose thoughts are only positive and are above the influence of the black energy? What does this resemble? To a man who is going for a walk in nature. If he has been privileged enough to reach the mountain top, he can see the sun from rising to setting. If he is still in a low place, in the valley, he occasionally finds himself in the shade as well. It is only natural that most humanity is still walking in the low valleys, some are climbing the hills, only a few exceptional people have reached the mountains, and even less have reached the top.
So What Can You Do? Act Now! Already in the beginning of my path as a student of spiritual healing in my 'university of angels' my spiritual guides took care to teach me energetic cleansing. They stressed again and again the importance of the matter and were very strict about the details. To my delight, I received an easy technique from them that did not require me to dedicate too much time to this subject and yet was very powerful and yielded astonishing immediate results. With this technique, you can, within a few minutes, and with no effort, cleanse the aura of black and negative energies even if they have been stuck there for many years.
32
Most important of all--anybody can do it! There is no need to have special abilities or have experience. Even if you cant 'see-hear-feel' energies you can still do the cleansing process easily. Just follow the instructions and you will succeed. It works! You can also cleanse and purify other people in their absence. Cleanse yourself, your family and your friends, release the black energies and make room within for the Divine healing energies. Remember, releasing black energies is similar to detoxifying the body, a process that is sometimes accompanied by discomfort. If you fasted to perform the detoxification then you know that the process might cause headaches, dizziness, and even vomiting. Likewise in an energetic cleansing. The array of reactions is varied and unexpected. It ranges from feeling no effect or discomfort to feeling sick and vomiting. But don't worry. These sensations end within minutes of finishing the cleansing, and the cleansing is worthwhile. Keep track of your sensations carefully as you cleanse and be aware. What do you feel? Do you feel some energetic movement in your body? Do you feel nausea? Do you feel pressure in your head? Your chest? Do you feel dizzy, choking? Experience difficulty in swallowing? Watch to see whether these sensations pass at the end of cleansing. At the end of the process, try to compare the feelings in your body before and after. Did you have some kind of ache that disappeared? Was there a heavy feeling that is now gone? Does your breath come deeper, more relaxed? What else? Watch not only for the changes that occur in the same day but in the days and weeks to follow. Do you sleep better? Have certain bodily functions improved? Remember or write it down. This way you learn to trust the process.
How Frequent is the Cleansing Done? I am always being asked, how long does the cleansing last? I ask in return, how long does a shower last? It is recommended that a cleansing should be done as often as possible. For the first week --every day; for the second week --on alternating days. In the third week --twice a week, and over the next few weeks, once a week. After that follow your intuition and your needs. When you are sick or have some kind of pain, perform the energetic cleansing. Remember the equation: pain or illness = black energy. Cleansing the aura from the black energies might immediately release pain or illness. This action is not a substitute for a real deep healing but in many cases it can be used as a temporary and satisfactory first aid. The more you cleanse yourself the better you will feel. The process becomes routine and quick, and your spiritual development will be accelerated. An example from my work: Svetlana S., a woman in her sixties, arrived at my clinic accompanied by her daughter. The problem: she had been suffering for more than twenty-five years from a skin ulcer on her left leg. Her leg from the knee to the foot was swollen three times the normal size and in a dark red color. The skin was tough and tight; the wound was large and open as if the skin had burst open. The daughter explained that if her mother hit her leg, she would have strong unbearable pains that would last for a long time. It was hard for her to walk. She had been through all conventional treatments and also tried various alternative methods. Nothing helped. The situation remained unchanged. When I put my hand above her leg, I could feel the emission of black energy. It was so intense that I could feel it even when I was standing six feet away from her. I asked my guides and received information. I asked Svetlana if she could remember a woman that she had known some twenty-five years ago, that lived next to her who worked with clothes (perhaps selling clothes). I explained to her that that woman put a curse on her and closed any options for healing. The treatment should be first and foremost canceling the curse and
33
perform energetic cleansing. Svetlana could not remember such a woman but towards the end of the treatment could walk on her leg almost painlessly. After several days, her daughter called me and told me with great excitement that her mother remembered. It had happened back in Russia. There was a neighbor, a young widow, a dressmaker who wanted Svetlana's fianc, but he married her mother, Svetlana. The leg awoke from its frozen condition. The color became a healthy red, the skin became tender, pus started to ooze from the wound. Healing had begun.
How is the Work Performed? There is a series of seven illustrations for cleansing and purifying the aura. Each of them deals with the subject from a different angle and all together they complete the work. You have to advance step-by-step while carefully following the instructions. Once you have completed all seven illustrations your job is done for today. First gather eight sheets of paper, a pen, matches, and a glass bowl or an ashtray. The work requires drawing on the paper, but this is only to help us to focus our thoughts. The real work is done within our body. The written work is accompanied at all times by declarations and affirmations that express making a choice, taking a stand, and taking control and responsibility for ourselves. Pay attention: when you are speaking silently or out-loud --you are giving an order. When you are giving an order you are declaring your intention, once you are declaring, the work is being done. Fire as a purifying element, has been used since the beginning of time; this is alchemy at its best. Work with ease and with self-confidence. God is with you, where black energies are concerned you are the boss. You command and they go away without a doubt. Start: 1. 2. 3.
4.
Draw the shape of a Star of David on a sheet of paper. Write your name in the center of the Star, (or the name of the person to be cleansed). Draw an arrow out from every point, (six altogether). The Star of David provides you with protection throughout the process. It fixes the direction of the exit of the black energy from the body to the outside and prevents recontamination. Put aside the piece of paper with the Star until the next cleansing. This paper should not be used for any other drawing.
John
34
Energetic Cleansing --First Illustration--The Ellipse Cleansing of black energies from the physical body in general. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Draw an ellipse. Write your name or the name of the person whom you are cleansing in the center of the ellipse. Draw seven arrows pointing from inside the ellipse to the outside. Write next to each arrowhead, 'Begone Black Energy' or BBE for short, while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the letters BBE at each arrow sequentially according to the order around the ellipse while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the arrows, one by one, starting with the arrowhead inward to the ellipse while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the ellipse lines itself while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy'. Crumple the paper slightly, put it in the glass bowl and light the paper with a match. Wait until the paper is completely burned. Sometimes you will encounter difficulties: matches will blow out, one after another, the fire will extinguish by itself, and so on, as if invisible powers are trying to stop you. Be persistent. Try again! Dont give up! Look at the fire, its color, its behavior, listen to the sounds it makes. Don't inhale the smoke! After the paper is completely burned, do not touch the ashes with your bare hand. Use a match to go through the ashes. Look for 'pretenders': small pieces of paper that were not burned. Insist on burning them as well. Its a must!
9.
Spiral Scribble: BBE
BBE
BBE
BBE
John
BBE
BBE
BBE
Continue to the second illustration.
35
Energetic Cleansing--Second Illustration--'The One Who Cursed' This illustration cleanses black energies sent by other people, cancels the evil eye, curses, and other malevolent spells. Remember, we do not hurt the person who sent us the black energies. Our purpose is only to release ourselves and be cleansed from these harmful energies. Nevertheless, one can assume that throughout the process that person can feel that something is happening. He might feel hot, feel suffocated, etc., but it will pass as we burn the pieces of paper. To the channelers among you, listen! If the spell was put with intent or in a professional manner, you can hear while you do the spiral scribble, the person who put the spell screaming, cursing, threatening, and demanding that you stop immediately. Professional malevolent mages and spell casters can tell when somebody is trying to cancel their work. Maybe with time, if you become an expert and gain more experience, you might be able to distinguish between them, as if they have a personal signature. But do not fear. The spell caster cannot harm you anymore than he already has. Now he is in your hands. Do not bother to communicate with him, for he will lie and make false promises, anything to make you stop the cleansing. Continue and carry on your work. The screams will fade away as the paper is burned. If you do choose to have a telepathic conversation with him, use it to get some information from him. Who is he? Why has he done this? Who is he working for? Give him an opportunity to cancel the spell himself; he might earn some credit in Heaven. In any case, do not trust his words. Probably there will be more lies than truth coming from him. Important: this illustration can cancel black energies that were sent not only by one person but by many. It works simultaneously in many directions. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Draw a sketch of a person's body. Write in the center, 'The One Who Cursed', and then add your name or the name of the person whom you are cleansing in the center of the body. Draw seven arrows pointing from inside the body to the outside. Write next to each arrowhead, 'Begone Black Energy' or BBE for short, while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the letters BBE at each arrow sequentially according to the order around the body while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the arrows, one by one, starting with the arrowhead inward to the body while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the figure itself while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy'. Crumple the paper slightly, put it in the glass bowl and light the paper with a match. Go through the ashes with a match. Look for 'pretenders'; burn them as well.
36
BBE BBE BBE
The One Who Cursed BBE John BBE
BBE
BBE
Go to the third illustration.
37
Energetic Cleansing--Third Illustration--Into the Black Hole This illustration cleanses black energies from deeper within the system as well as self-made black energies. It is also beneficial for treating aches and pains, (headache, backache, stomachache). Here we use the 'Black Hole' as a representative of the Air element in the Universe. (See chapter: The Four Elements of the Universe.) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Draw a sketch of a person's body. Write your name or the name of the person whom you are cleansing in the center of the body. Draw a colored-in circle nex t to the person and write 'Black Hole' next to it. Draw seven arrows pointing from inside the body to the outside. Write next to each arrowhead, 'Begone Black Energy' or BBE for short, while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the letters BBE at each arrow sequentially according to the order around the body. Finish each scribble by extending the line into the black hole while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the arrows, one by one, starting with the arrowhead inward to the body. Finish each scribble by extending the line into the black hole while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the figure itself and finish by extending the line into the black hole while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy'. If you experience aches in any part of your physical body, draw seven lines from that area in the drawing into the black hole. Crumple the paper slightly, put it in the glass bowl and light the paper with a match. Go through the ashes with a match. Look for 'pretenders'; burn them as well. BBE BBE BBE Black Hole
7.
8. 9. 10. 11.
John BBE BBE
BBE
BBE
Go to the fourth illustration.
38
Energetic Cleansing--Fourth Illustration--Triangle, Circle, Square This form is beneficial for deep cleansing of all types of black energies. It cleanses well and draws outside from the center of your being and from the historical bodies. This form is the most complex of them all, but don't let this discourage you. The result is worthwhile. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. Draw a triangle and write your name or the name of the person whom you are cleansing in the center. Draw a circle around the triangle. Draw a square around the circle. Draw four arrows from the four corners of the square pointing to the outside. Draw three arrows from the three corners of the triangle, past the edges of the square, pointing to the outside. Draw seven arrows from the circle, past the edges of the square, pointing to the outside. Write next to each arrowhead, 'Begone Black Energy' or BBE for short, while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' fourteen times. Scribble in a spiral motion over the letters BBE at each arrow sequentially according to the order around the drawing. Scribble in a spiral motion over the arrows, one by one, starting with the arrowhead inward to the drawing. Scribble in a spiral motion over the edges of the square. Scribble over the area that is located between the edge of the square and the edge of the circle. Scribble over the edges of the circle. Scribble over the area located between the circle and the triangle. Scribble over the edges of the triangle. Scribble over the inside area of the triangle. Crumple the paper slightly, put it in the glass bowl and light the paper with a match. Go through the ashes with a match. Look for 'pretenders'; burn them as well.
BBE
BBE
BBE
BBE
BBE
BBE
John BBE
BBE BBE BBE BBE BBE BBE BBE
Go to the fifth illustration.
39
Energetic Cleansing --Fifth Illustration--Circle within a Circle This form cleanses energies that are trapped between a sender and a receiver due to energetic protection around both of them. Nowadays many people are aware of putting up protection around themselves, (see chapter: Protection). This protects against invasion and the harmful effects of black energies. Sometimes the mass of the black energy remains active, moving back and forth between the sender and the receiver. This erodes the protection until damage is possible. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Draw a small circle. This circle represents you. Write your name or the name of the person whom you are cleansing in the center of the circle. Draw a big circle around the small one. This circle represents the sender. Draw seven arrows from the small circle out to the big circle while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Draw seven arrows from the big circle out to the small circle while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' seven times. Scribble in a spiral motion while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' as follows. Scribble in a spiral motion over the arrows, one by one, according to the order of the circle starting with the arrowhead to the inside. Scribble in a spiral motion over the edge of the big circle. Scribble in a spiral motion over the area located between the two circles. Scribble in a spiral motion over the edge of the small circle. Scribble in a spiral motion over the area located inside the small circle Crumple the paper slightly, put it in the glass bowl and light the paper with a match. Go through the ashes with a match. Lo ok for 'pretenders'; burn them as well.
John
Go to the sixth illustration.
40
Energetic Cleansing --Sixth Illustration--The Spiral This form cleanses self-manufactured black energies caused by worries, excessive concerns, fears and anxieties, and generally alleviates emotional stress. Here we use the spiral as a cosmic tool, (see chapter: Cosmic Tools). Drawing a spiral on paper as a representative of the cosmic spiral activates it. The spiral then draws and removes everything we send to it. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. In the center of the paper draw a big spiral. Determine in your consciousness that this is a spiral. Draw a square at the outer edge of the spiral. Make sure that the square touches the end of the spiral. Write your full name or the name of the person whom you are cleansing in the square. Draw a line from each corner of the square into the center of the spiral, four lines total. Draw a line from each letter of the name into the center of the spiral, one line per letter. Crumple the paper slightly, put it in the glass bowl and light the paper with a match. Go through the ashes with a match. Look for 'pretenders'; burn them as well.
JOHN DOE
Continue to the seventh Illustration.
41
Energetic Cleansing--Seventh Illustration--Three Combined Ellipses This form is a repetition of the first one, the ellipse; only it is stronger by the power of three squared, (27fold). It completes the entire series by general cleansing and purifying of the aura of debris stuck to it. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Draw three combined ellipses. Write your name or the name of the person whom you are cleansing in the center. Draw seven arrows from each ellipse from inside to the outside, twenty-one arrows total. Draw a spiral scribble while you command silently, 'Begone Black Energy' as follows. Scribble in a spiral motion over the arrows, one by one, according to the order of the ellipses starting with the arrowhead to the inside. Scribble in a spiral motion over the area of one ellipse Scribble in a spiral motion over the area of the second ellipse Scribble in a spiral motion over the area of the third ellipse Crumple the paper slightly, put it in the glass bowl and light the paper with a match. Turn the ashes with a match. Look for 'pretenders'; burn them as well.
John
42
Words of Caution Pay attention! At the end of the process, check how you feel. If you feel any heaviness, stress, headache, prickling sensations, etc., feelings that you haven't had before, it is very likely that there are some 'pretenders' left in the glass bowl. Look thoroughly and burn them. Even one crumb may contain in it a mass of black energy. Pay attention! Never interrupt the cleansing process! If for some reason you must take a break --you don't have to continue and finish all seven forms of the series, but finish the form of the energetic cleansing that you are currently doing. Take care to burn everything! Do not postpone burning the paper at a later time! Pay attention! Never leave the ashes exposed after finishing a process! This is black energy! Make sure to get rid of it immediately after you are done. Dump the ashes down the toilet or put everything in a plastic bag, tie it well and dump it in the trash. Make sure that the ashes do not blow away or be scattered in any manner. Pay attention! Thoroughly wash your hands and the glass bowl with soap and water. Do not touch your face, eyes, or mouth before you wash your hands.
Personal Development After you've got the hang of it you can start cleansing two or more people in each cleansing series and even be able to cleanse a large group of people. It all depends on the amount of your personal dedication that you have put into it from the beginning. The more times you do it, the stronger you become. All you have to do is write inside the illustration the names of several people instead of a single name and focus on them. You will succeed; it works! You can cleanse a person in their absence. Distance has no meaning where energies are involved. That person could be in another room, a different city or a different state. However, if you are a beginner, it is advisable that you stay in contact with the person during and after the process. Talk to them and get updates on their condition. Feedback from your client will give you information on the value of your work and will help you establish confidence in the method. After a month or two, after you have specialized in the technique of energetic cleansing, your skills increase and the process comes quicker. Your will power gets stronger and your control over the energies is absolute. When you are more aware of energetic events and changes, control the sequence of the method, and have no need to use the book, then you may start working on an erasable board. You can buy an erasable board in any stationery store including special markers. This board takes the place of the sheets of paper. From now on you can do the work on the board exactly as you have done so far, with one difference: in the last step of every form of energetic cleansing, instead of burning the illustration, you are requested to erase it in a spiral motion. Use a dry cloth or a tissue and trash it afterwards. This is an additional step in the developmental process of moving from the concrete to the abstract. After a while, at the next level, you will be able to do the whole process in your mind, without any need of tools. Later on, when you have matured spiritually, the process will move over to your crown. (See chapter: Crown.) All you will have to do is ask the crown to energetically purify you or others and it will perform it for you. Actually, when you work from the crown, you can cleanse and fully treat dozens and hundreds of people at the same time. It works.
43
The 'Pool Effect' in Cleansing Throughout your spiritual development you will have to continue your cleansing and purifying work. The cleansing process never ends! You start with cleansing and purifying the aura and continue with processes that go deeper and deeper with time. It can be explained as a metaphor of cleaning a deep pool that has accumulated a lot of dirt for many years. In this pool there is mud, sand, insects, leaves, straw, etc. All the debris is stacked one atop another. The maintenance man arrives with a net and collects all that floats on top of the water. This action allows the deeper debris to float to the surface of the water. Next time he returns, he collects again all that has floated, etc.
Physical Empathy If you are treating someone and cleansing him, it is a great opportunity to learn and perform a physical empathy with him. That means that you can feel everything he is feeling, sense his sensations, experience his emotions. Address your body and silently say: "My body, I ask you to create a physical empathy with John. Feel all that he is feeling." Continue the treatment or the cleansing and be more aware of what your body is transmitting to you. Do you suddenly feel a lump in your throat that hasn't been there before? Pressure? Pain? Anything that you know is not yours? You are feeling your client! To stop the empathy feeling, simply ask your body to stop.
44
Protection
Why Do We Need Protection? Protection is done to keep us from getting hurt, from contagion, and from getting contaminated by black and negative energies. It can save us a lot of trouble with minimal effort by not allowing any type of black or negative energies to pass through and hurt us. Whether these energies were sent to us by other people with full intent, (curses, spells, etc.), or whether they freely exist around us, and are trying to magnetize to us for whatever reason. A good protection can stand against massive attacks of black and negative energies from the evil eye to malevolent spells! Pay attention: The protection will not prevent us from self-manufacturing black and negative energies, as well as not prevent magnetizing of these energies because these are a result of our choice and our inner decisions. Whether it is made consciously or not. The Blue Bubble The blue bubble, as its name indicates, is made of dark blue light, (see chapter: Divine Lights). From the moment we created it, it will surround and contain us, follow us wherever we go, and fulfill its duty of guarding and protecting us day and night. Since it has divine intelligence, you can communicate with it, assign tasks to it; agree on strategies, etc.
Text for creating the blue bubble: "I invite dark blue light. I ask to be surrounded by a protective bubble." Imagine the dark blue light arriving and surrounding you in a bubble. You decide what its size is to be. Address the bubble and define its role: "Protection bubble--you have to be hard, inflexible, unyielding, impervious to any type of black or negative energy that will try to pass through and harm me." In addition, you can ask: "Direct the attacking energies to the black hole." This addition will make sure that the attacking energy will not continue to hit the bubble in an attempt to penetrate it. The dark blue light, like any energy at work, is eventually eroded and a hole can form in it. Distracting the attacking energy will ensure longer endurance of the bubble. Renew the protection bubble every day, (preferably in the morning.) Create a bubble for each of your loved ones. Use the protection bubble to surround your pets, your cars and your home.
45
You can trust the blue bubble--it works! To the channelers among you: if it is important to you to be informed of who is attacking you and when, ask the bubble: "Blue bubble, I request that you tell me in case of attack." You can go on with your daily work. The bubble will call you and let you know as soon as something happens. During an energetic attack, you can feel pressures placed on the bubble. After a few seconds this will stop too. The bubble can give you information about the attacker. If you suffer from repeated harassment from the same person, especially if he is a professional spell -caster, you have the option of directing the attacking energy back to the sender. This is not an option that I favor but it exists. Ask the bubble, "Return the attacking energy to the sender." Pay attention: the responsibility lies upon the sender and not upon you. On your part, this is protection, not an attack. In any case it has an educational purpose. It is therefore said: never curse because you can't tell how it will come back to you.
Star of David We create a three-dimensional Star of David, (two pyramids combined, overlapping one another, one is inverted) and we are in its center. The Star of David is made of the attacking lights: dark red light, dark blue light, and dark green light. (See chapter: Divine Lights). Text for creating the Star of David: "I call upon dark red light, dark blue light, dark green light. I request that you come together and create a three -dimensional Star of David around me.
'Concrete' Bubble This is a bubble of radioactive radiant lights that keeps away all types of negative energies. It is created the same way as the blue bubble. Text for creating the 'Concrete' Bubble: "I call upon radioactive radiant lights to surround me with a protective bubble."
Triple Protection On November 2001, my guides informed me that the intensities of black energies were getting stronger and an increase in protection was required. They suggested the Triple Protection. The idea is to combine all these three protections: the Blue Bubble, the Star of David, and the 'Concrete' Bubble. If you feel that you need a more powerful protection surround yourself with the Triple Protection: 1. 2. 3. First create the Blue Bubble around yourself. Around the Blue Bubble create the three dimensional Star of David made of attacking lights. Surround everything with the 'Concrete' Bubble made of radioactive radiant lights.
46
Cosmic Tools
The universe supplies us with many tools to use. Just like a doctor uses tools and instruments for his work, so can we use the cosmic tools to improve the healing process. These tools are available to us at all times. All we have to do is ask and they will come at once to help us. The invitation can be done aloud or silently; it makes no difference.
The Spiral The spiral works as a kind of 'vacuum cleaner'. It can suck everything from a person that he doesn't need: black energies, aches, slight blockages. It can be described as a three-dimensional conical coil with a rotating motion. It comes in different sizes, (small, medium, large, extra large). It is preferable to order a spiral in a size that fits your needs. Text to call upon a spiral: "I invite a medium spiral to locate above my head and draw out my headache." Sit down and try to sense what is happening. Imagine the spiral rotating above your head. Feel the spin. Feel the pulse of the energetic work. After a while check: is there an improvement in your condition? Is the pain gone? You can invite a spiral to treat someone else: "I invite an extra big spiral to locate above John's stomach and draw out everything that he doesn't need." (Stomachache, nausea, stress, nervousness, etc.) You can invite a spiral to treat a person who is away from you. Imagine that you send a spiral to him. Define its role. You can invite several spirals to several places in your body that will coordinate together. You can invite several spirals for several people that will work simultaneously. When the spiral finishes its work it leaves on its own.
Opening Chakras with Spirals Chakras are energy centers that are responsible for the correct activity of the human system in different levels, body, emotions, mind and spirit. In fact, they are energetic occurrences of motion and flow in our electromagnetic field. Each chakra has its own frequency and is responsible for a different part of the body. Energetic balance of the chakras signifies correct functioning. Getting out of balance means having problems, a disease, an unhealthy condition. In a simplified way, the chakras can be imagined as small doors that should remain open for energy to pass. Negative thought patterns may block these passages. A blocked chakra indicates a problem. Our bodies have a central system of seven chakras. According to different methods of spiritual healing, there is also a secondary chakra system, but here I will only refer to the main system, believing that treating it will start pulsating and awaken the whole network.
47
7 Crown chakra 6 Third Eye chakra 5 Throat chakra 4 Heart chakra 3 Solar Plexus chakra 2 Sex chakra 1 Base (Root) chakra
Text for inviting spirals to open the chakras: "I invite seven small spirals. I ask you to locate in front of my chakras to open them and create an outflow. "Sit down and feel the sensations. Feel the activity in your body. Allow a few moments for this process. Imagine the spirals as fast turning cones. For highly blocked chakras, you can invite big spirals to increase the working power. Pay attention: this manipulation is meant to allow balancing and renewing of the correct flow in the chakras but it is not a substitute for treatment. The same negative thought patterns that created the blockage in the first place still exist and may return the situation to the way it was, unless we take care of them during a healing process.
Apples The apple is a small tool that can enter the energy channels in the body, travel in them and locate energetic blockages. Once it locates a block it enters into its center and creates an explosion that breaks the blockage to pieces. The apple can advance through the energy channel by its own logic by jumping from one side of the body to another like a fast ping pong ball, while locating more blocks and breaking them up. Once it's finished its work, it will leave on its own. To achieve faster results you can invite ten to twenty apples simultaneously. Text for inviting apples: "I invite twenty apples to enter my body, locate energy blocks and break them." Sit down and try to feel what is going on inside your body. Imagine the apples quickly running around in your body doing their job. Feel the small "explosions" while your blocks are being taken care of. You can invite the apples for treating another person. You can also ask them to go to a person who is far away.
Atomic Apples For healers: In case of serious blockages, you can order atomic apples whose potency is a hundred fold stronger than the potency of regular apples. Text for inviting atomic apples: "I invite ten atomic apples to enter John's body, locate energy blocks and break them." Pay attention: another use for the apples is combined with the wand. (See chapter: Meridian Expansion).
48
Erasers With the eraser you can 'erase' from your inner screen or from the body accumulations of black or negative energies that cause a disease or an illness. You can invite up to fifty cosmic erasers depending on the gravity of the situation. Tell the erasers where the diseased areas are. You can also ask them to work faster. Text for inviting erasers: "I invite ten cosmic erasers to go inside my head and erase my headache." Follow their work and decide if there is a need to invite more erasers.
Radioactive Erasers For healers: you can order radioactive erasers for erasing disease or illness, tumors, blocks, etc.
Needles The needle is used for various situations, for example: 1. 2. 3. You discover a collection of traumatic bubbles in the client's body. You ask the needle to prick the bubbles. They will dissipate and their contents spread out. If a client has an ear infection, pricking the tympanum with the needle will release the inner pressure and ease the pain. For treatment of depression, you 'transplant' a bubble filled with golden light in the brain, in the center that is responsible for emotional balance. You ask the needle to prick the bubble. In this way, the golden light will be released slowly and for an extended time.
Text for inviting a needle: "I invite a needle to enter John's stomach and prick all the trauma bubbles." You can invite up to ten needles according to your needs. Make use of the cosmic tools in your work. Play with the various possibilities and combinations. After a while, you can start inventing your own tools. You are welcome to be creative!
Misty Clouds These are a type of energy clouds that appear like white mist and they are always available to us. They surround the person and provide him with good feelings of tenderness and warmth, as if he is wrapped in a cloud of love and compassion. They relax the body, dissipate stress, calm the nervous system and help you to fall asleep at night. You can use them in order to get into a meditative state or to decrease anxieties. Healers can use the misty clouds in order to help get the client into a receptive state, calm and relaxed. They can be used to calm an irritated skin, over tanning, rash, insect bites and itches. Students tell me with a wink that they came up with a trick: in the evening, they call upon the misty clouds for their sleepreluctant kids who later fall asleep and sleep like angels. It works! Text for inviting misty clouds: "I invite a misty cloud to come and surround me from head to toe." You can watch the mists in complete darkness. See them with your third eye or with your eyes wide open. Play with them before they go lower to envelope you. Ask them to stop at a certain height a few inches above you. They are obedient, reach out your hands and touch them. Feel them, feel the tingling, the warmth and other feelings.
49
You can mix and stir them while they are still in the air. It feels like energetic cotton wool. Feel the density of the air inside the misty cloud in contrast to the air outside it. To increase their influence, breathe them into you or ask the clouds to be absorbed into your body. When necessary, you can invite more misty clouds. Do not fear, there is no danger of overdose.
The Rainbow The rainbow gives a roof, provides support and foundations to the treatment, and protects from energy escape or leakage. It can prevent losing leaking energies by trapping them and returning them to us. Also, the rainbow supports and balances the different systems of the person. If you can visualize it, you can see that it is made of colors. Text for inviting a rainbow: "I invite a rainbow to locate above me." That's enough. The rainbow will be located at once and knows its job. You can also make a deal with the rainbow so it will stay with you for a longer time. Express your request: "I request that you stay with me for one week."
50
A Silver Cloud and a Golden Cloud These are stores of silver light and golden light, (see chapter: Divine Lights), that we can use to improve our mood, bring joy and diminish sadness. Using them in a treatment gives cheerfulness and a feeling of ease. They are both invited together for a common work and they complete each other. Text for inviting the clouds: "I invite a silver cloud and a golden cloud to locate above me and shower me with a rain of silver and gold." You can invite the clouds for another person as well as send them far away. Invite them for someone who is feeling down and check after a few minutes and see how improved his mood is. It works!
51
The Four Elements of the Universe

The universe helps us in the healing process. In order for the treatment to be balanced and complete, it is advisable to use in it all the four elements: Fire, Air, Earth, and Water.
The Sun--Represents the Element of Fire Good for grounding accumulations of anger, of negative energies, that are bubbling inside a person causing restlessness, nervousness, violence and rage.
The Black Hole--Represents the Element of Air Good for grounding of aches (headaches and others), stress and pressures, fears and anxieties, negative thoughts. Mother Earth --Represents the Element of Earth Good for grounding of black and negative energies, bad moods, depression, anger, worries, stress, pains, electrification. The Sea --Represents the Element of Water Good for grounding of black and negative energies, accumulations of hard, burdening feelings such as disappointment, frustration, envy, apprehension, guilt, etc. You may connect to the elements of the universe and use them for two major goals: One - empty into them all your self manufactured energetic trash, black or negative energies, heavy emotional burdens that were not taken care of and left unprocessed, negative thoughts and anything that you do not need. The universe will take them away from you with love. Do not worry that you might contaminate it. In some divine marvelous way, the balance of the universe is maintained. There are those who are taking care of that. Two - accept from them the wonderful energies that they offer you and fill yourself with them. These are healing energies, building and stabilizing, balancing and fortifying. Pay attention: In the methods that are proposed here, all four elements are good for grounding, but only the Sun and Mother Earth are good for energetic charging. From the air we receive the divine lights, (see chapter: Divine Lights). From the sea we can recharge ourselves by real physical immersion.
52
Connecting to the Elements for Work Purposes Creating a connection between you and the elements is done with channels. Like a baby who is connected to his mother through the umbilical cord, so will you be connected to the universe. Express your wish precisely. Imagine the channels and they will be formed instantly, you created them. Text for connection: "I call upon the sun, mother earth, the black hole and the sea. I connect myself to each one of you thr ough a grounding channel and request that you take away from me all that I don't need." To improve the treatment, you can connect to them in more than one channel and up to a hundred channels. (No more than that since the treatment might be too strong.) You can imagine or name a specific area from which you want to do the grounding, especially if a local problem exists (a backache, stress in the stomach, a wound in the leg, and so on.) Without naming the area, the connection will occur automatically between you and the universe according to an unconscious decision of your body. Continue and say: "Sun and Mother Earth, when you finish the grounding I also ask that you recharge me with your wonderful energies" (through the same channels.) In case of emergency, you can ask the elements to work faster and stronger. You can communicate with the elements, talk to them, request a report on the progress of the work, make changes during it, etc. You can give such treatment to others. You don't need to remember to cancel the channels at the end of the healing work. They will cancel themselves.
The Cosmic Stores

Think how wonderful it would be if you could go to your local grocery store and buy a package of love energy. Or maybe a bag of courage? A box of happiness? Or perhaps a little bit of vigor, some hope and a lot of passion? What a dream! If you like the idea and delight in it, know that it is no dream. Reality is better than a dream. These items do exist and not in your grocery store, but right at the place that you are now. More than that, they cost nothing and come free in abundance and effortlessly. The cosmic stores are energy reservoirs, seven in number. I will talk here about six of them. My guides asked me not to make the seventh known (It is accessible only to individuals of extremely high spiritual level.) The reservoirs are: a cosmic store of love, a cosmic store of joy, a cosmic store of vigor, a cosmic store of hope, a cosmic store of courage, and a cosmic store of passion. Love, joy, vigor, hope, courage, and passion are not just abstract concepts or ideas; they are divine energies. A lack of these energies or of some of them causes suffering and distress for a person. He withers, tends toward depression and bad moods, and gets sick easily. He is unbalanced, restless, always hungry, tired and listless. The universe lends you a helping hand. Take it and get charged as much as you can.
Recharging Call the cosmic stores in your heart and ask for treatment. Once you synchronize with them, they are ready to listen to you and to act. In effect, there is a guardian angel who is responsible for every cosmic store and you can speak with him.
53
Text for inviting energy: "I call upon the cosmic store of love and ask to be recharged with your wonderful energy with as much as I can contain." Summoned in this way, a mass of energy will be sent to you from the cosmic store according to your needs and the magnitude of your deficit. This energy gets charged at once through the chakras. You can call upon any cosmic store that you want, and ask for its energy in the same manner. You can call upon all six cosmic stores in one request and ask them to take care of you simultaneously. Text for inviting energy from all stores: "I call upon the cosmic store of love, joy, vigor, hope, courage, and passion and ask to be recharged with your wonderful energies with as much as I can contain." Another form of recharging from the cosmic store is by creating a connection via channels, (like the connection with the four elements of the universe.) It allows recharging for a longer time while having control over and keeping track of the process. Text for connecting through multiple channels: "I call upon the cosmic store of joy. I connect to you with fifty channels and ask to transfer your wonderful energy to me throughout the entire day." Likewise, depending on your needs, you can connect simultaneously to all stores: "I call upon all the cosmic stores (love, joy, stamina, hope, courage, and passion). I connect to each one of you with a hundred channels and ask that you transfer your wonderful energy to me." You can order such a treatment for another person. You can also reach an agreement with the cosmic stores and schedule treatments for the following week or month. Add to the text: "I ask you to treat me during the following week, on every day at the same time." Even if you forget about the treatment and go to the movies, the next day at the scheduled time, the cosmic stores will remember and will take care of you whether you have noticed it or not. It works! Alternate between the different possibilities, try all of them and be creative. For healers: the best way for treating and recharging the energies of the cosmic stores into the client is by transferring those energies through you. You can call upon the cosmic stores and ask to transfer the energies into you, passing them through the palms of your hands to the client. It greatly amplifies the treatment and has astounding effects. Furthermore, one healer can give such a treatment to a roomful of people by directing the energies simultaneously to all of them.
A Love Treatment from the Angels Everyone is entitled to receive a love treatment from the angels. You may ask and receive such a treatment at all times, under any conditions and up to several times a day. There are no limits. All you have to do is call upon your guide and ask him to summon a group of angels for a love treatment. Within minutes, the angels gather and the treatment starts. The greater the circle of angels--the stronger the treatment will be. The group of angels that surrounds you will transmit the pure energy of love to you. To get the greatest benefit from the treatment, be in a restful position. Don't run around; don't answer phone calls, etc. Maintain a conscious connection with the angels throughout the treatment; be aware of the marvelous flow of energy in your body. Feel the warm waves that are running through you, and the elevation of spirit that the treatment provides you. The energy of love recharges our body as healing energy and is unconsciously directed to wherever it needs to go. The body knows where we have deficits and decides where the energy should go. Another possibility is to work with the angels. You can ask them silently in your heart to divert the energy of love to certain areas in your body according to your choice: to the stomach, head, limbs, heart,
54
genitals, intestines, etc. Every time you specify a body part, stop. Focus your full attention on it. Count to three and absorb the energy into that area. Continue and specify another location; repeat the process. Stay open; don't block yourself. Accept what you deserve. Enjoy every moment of it. If at the first time you didn't feel a thing, never mind, don't be disappointed. Your sensitivity will develop as you experience more love treatments like this and you will enjoy them more and more. If you fall asleep during a treatment, that's okay too. You can order a love treatment and chose to receive it non-consciously: watching TV, reading a book or sleeping. One way or another, the treatment works and the outcome will be the same. Your well-being will greatly improve; your emotional stores will be filled. Deficits are healed and the system equilibrates on the physical, emotional and energetic levels. In fact, if you ask for a love treatment every night before going to sleep, it will be the best gift that you can give yourself. You are sure to sleep better and wake up invigorated in the morning. You can also give this beautiful gift to another person, but try to let him know in advance so he can prepare himself and be aware.
The Inner Screen

What is the Inner Screen? If you close your eyes and pretend that you keep looking straight ahead, you automatically transfer your view to your third eye, i.e. shifting to a super-sensory vision. Use the inner side of your eyelids as a movie screen and watch it--you are now connected to your inner screen. The inner screen represents the situation of your energy field. Every energetic event that has happened to you is registered and appears on it. It is likely that all you will see the first time is a turbid or black screen. You have to do two things: clean your screen and clear the black areas from it and exercise watching while taking notice of even the smallest of details, even those that at first appear insignificant to you. In the inner screen, everything has a meaning. After you clean you inner screen, you can see many things in it. Pay attention: there is no connection between the process of energetic cleansing as we learned previously and cleansing the inner screen. The inner screen is cleaned separately.
What Can You See in the Inner Screen? Eyes--represent the evil eye, curses, being persecuted by negative polarity. (See chapter: Control of the Negative Polarity.) Twinkling stars--represent people who love us. Lights and colors --these are the divine lights. Light beings --guides and angels that are entering our energetic field. (They may look to us like bodies of lights or figures.) Auras--the body of light that surrounds a client, which represents a map for diagnosis and treatment. Cosmic windows--look like passages of time and space through which aliens can pass. Visions--pictures from previous reincarnations or from the future, a figure of a person with whom you have a telepathic connection or you can see and hear people who gossip about you.
55
Working on the Inner Screen Before you start to work on your inner screen, it is recommended that you record the instructions so that you can devote yourself to the task without being dependant on the book and having to open your eyes. You can also do this with a friend and guide each other through the process. Prepare yourself to have a lot of patience and self-discipline; do not open your eyes during the work unless you are tired and ready to stop. The process: 1. 2. 3. 4. Gently close your eyes and look at the inner side of your eyelids as if looking at a movie screen. The screen is round and adjusts to your circular eye movement. Give yourself a few seconds to adjust. Use peripheral vision--roll your eyes clockwise and back. Pay attention to the different hues. Even if everything looks dark, there are lighter areas, (usually in the center), and darker places, (usually on the periphery).
Start cleaning the inner screen, wait a minute between each step: 5. Wave your hand from side to side in front of your eyes, (like a windshield wiper). That way you rush any black particles off the screen. 6. Invite a big spiral to locate in front of the screen and suck up the black particles. 7. Order the black particles to leave your screen. 8. Connect to the four elements of the universe and ask them to pull the black particles away. 9. Connect to the cosmic stores and ask them to flood your screen with their energies, (these energies will take over the screen and banish the blackness) 10. Invite cosmic erasers to get onto your screen and erase the black particles. 11. Blink your eyes a few times while they are still closed. 12. Invite cosmic apples to go onto your screen and do their work. Pay attention to the energetic transformations that occur on the screen; how it becomes clear--first in the center then towards the edges. Pay attention to your third eye. Do you feel it working, pulsing, enlarging, pressing? Repeat steps 5-12 until the screen gets cleared up. Lights in various colors and shapes will then start to appear. Little balls of light move toward you from a distance, and grow larger as they get close to you. Waves of colors that are washing the screen usually start at the upper right hand side moving to the lower left hand side. They push the black particles outside and create whirlpools of radiant colors. The cleaner the screen, the clearer the divine lights will appear. Invite the divine lights to fill you from head to toe and surround you. Imagine a new color arriving; invite colors in hues that you especially prefer. Watch their reflections on your screen. Dedicate a few minutes a day for working on your inner screen. See it as a meditation, as an educational, developmental experience. A self-treatment that will open your communication channels, improve your clairvoyance, increase your telepathic abilities, and will give a push toward your energetic transformation. I would like to share an amazing experience with you regarding the inner screen. After the angels had given me the secret of the inner screen, I loved to spend a lot of time watching it, mainly out of curiosity. What else could I see in there? I also enjoyed detecting 'evil eyes' and harass them with questions such as: Who sent you? What were you supposed to do to me? etc, before I neutralized them. Prior to this, I developed sensitivity, a heighten ed awareness to the events in my body. I noticed that every once in a while, my throat chakra would be blocked. It felt like a slight suffocation that was
56
accompanied by a cough, twisting of the vocal cords and a feeling that I couldn't swallow, as if a lump was stuck in my throat. My guides explained: this is the reaction of your system to an attack of negative energy. Someone is talking about you in a negative way. With their guidance, I went into my inner screen. With a slight tuning, I received an image of two people standing with their backs to me, speaking to each other. I was amazed to find out that I could listen to the entire conversation. Moreover, when I called to them, they turned around and looked at me. I asked, "Who are you?" They gave me their names. Only then did the feeling of suffocation in my throat stop and my throat chakra opened up. This ability developed into some kind of a warning system for me. Since in those days I became subject to a lot of gossip, I often entered my inner screen in order to release my throat chakra. At first, my 'eavesdropping' amused me, but later I was bored and I found an alternative way to be released from this negative energy. After all, how many times can one listen to people saying "She's a witch," or, "She's gone crazy," and so on and so forth? It's banal!
Connecting to Trees--by the Guides Jacob and Rachel

(Biblical ancestors) Connecting to trees will give you healing, abundance, joie de vivre, happiness, tranquility, etc. This connection is full of magic and tenderness and it's a way of return to innocence and childhood. Go outdoors, to nature and look at the trees. Feel which one of them is inviting you to it. The trees that are recommended for connection are olive, oak, and pine trees. There is also a matter of energetic compatibility. You may try different types of trees until you find the best one with which to connect. You can lean your back against the trunk, standing or sitting, or put one or two hands flat on the trunk. You can hug the tree if you want to. Address your tree and silently tell it: "Please transfer some of your good energies to me." The tree responds immediately and gives happily.
What Kind of Energies Does the Tree Give You? The tree itself receives different energies from the universe, from Mother Earth, from the Sun, from the water, and from the divine energy stores. Basically, it will transfer the exact same energies to you. It also does another job by being a mediator between these energy sources of the universe and you. The tree is your healer. Sometimes a person needs someone or something to give him these healing energies: other people, animals, plants instead of receiving them directly from the universe. This way the treatment has an extra value, there's a tangible healer rather than an abstract one. The giving from the tree has something enchanting and heart-touching in it. The connection to nature is beneficial by itself as well as satisfying. Trees (and flowers) can also take black and negative energies away from us. That is the reason why some plants may get sick or wither and die despite a good treatment. They absorb harmful energies from the surrounding area and redeem us. This is not an insight or an acknowledgement of their destination. It happens simply because they are sensitive beings. When you feel that the flow from the tree weakens, it means that you are already recharged. It is time to disconnect. Give gratitude and thank your tree. Read what Orin has to say about gratitude.
57
Orin
I first met Orin two to three weeks after I had started channeling. It occurred during a conversation that I was having with Viran, my personal guide for thousands of years, and with my counsel of sages. I read in my diary and still get emotional. "In the middle of the conversation, my thoughts suddenly became fuzzy and started scattering toward Sanaya Roman and Duane Packer. Suddenly I knew that they were writing a new book. I could see its name and its content. The instant I thought about it, I saw at a distance a beautiful strong source of light changing colors and drawing closer. At this moment, Viran stepped aside; his presence became unnoticeable. I asked my sages: 'Who is arriving?' They told me to invite him over and so I did. The light was very beautiful. It looked like light waves in various colors and it also contained flickering lights. Occasionally in the center, just in front of me, there was a circle of light--like a beautiful star with golden sparks. I asked: 'Who are you?' He said: 'Orin.' I was very excited. A part of me couldn't believe that it was true because I thought it was too great an honor for me. Orin had stayed with me and began guiding and teaching me in his loving, humorous way. He explained abstract ideas with tales and fables and surprised me with marvelous lessons while using simple examples of daily life. He laughed with me and amused me, in short, a teacher 'out of this world'! I simply fell in love with this wonderful being and I'm happy to share with you, the reader, a small yet representative part of the important ideas that Orin taught me.
On Gratitude--by Orin (Channeling April 2001)

Gratitude is an important subject. It creates an immediate connection between the person and the universe, and the person and their surroundings. If people wonder, do angels need to be thanked? The answer is Yes! Of course, higher beings do not need gratitude to satisfy the ego as with people in most cases. It has several reasons: the person who gives thanks is a person who establishes good relations with the universe. That is, he acknowledges that the universe is helping him. He acknowledges the existence of angels and God. He acknowledges that the heavens are involved in what is happening to him, and that the heavens are not disconnected or distant. All these ways of acknowledgement strengthens the person in several ways: if God and the angels help him, then he is entitled to it, he is worthy. Not all people receive the same amount of help and treatment, even though in principle, they are all entitled to it. The positive polarity wants the person to make a move, take a stand, choose it, entice it, make an effort, work towards it, cleanse and purify himself, and elevate himself to the positive. This means that every time that there is an increase in the level of his spiritual development, the person receives more help. Like a 'reward' for his efforts, a gift; a recompense for taking the right path, an encouragement. In cases of a person with ego problems, he will reject the universe, God, the angels, and the gifts that he received, and then he might remain without any of these. It's a feedback, the feedback of the universe to the person's choice. It's not a punishment. It's every person's right to choose to get ahead, to stop, to go back, or even move to the negative polarity. However, the person must know that the universe responds accordingly.
58
Gratitude advances the person in his connections with the universe and according to that, he magnetizes the gratitude of the universe toward him. Gratitude reminds the person that not all should be taken for granted. It is not --'just because'. This knowledge shows the person what is the right direction, which way to take, where to climb higher. If the person cannot give thanks, not even in a cursory manner, then he has a problem, a block, disbelief, confusion, an ego issue. All these, no matter what, will block him from going higher and being connected to God and the heavens. How to be grateful? At first, one should be grateful out of awareness and thought, decision and choice. With time, we expect the person to feel gratitude also on the emotional level. A gratitude that is a deceit will not be accepted, that is, that the person doesn't really feel grateful, but only says it out of self-interest. A person should be grateful for each gift that he receives, to make a point to remember those gifts and not to forget. Not to emphasize that which he is lacking, what he did not get. It is easier for a person to focus on problems, misery, and self-pity rather than be grateful for the good that he has, and by that, to connect to God and create more and more open channels to receive more gifts. If a person was treated by the heavens and after a while he claims, "Yes, I did feel better after the treatment but maybe it was a coincidence? Auto-suggestion? Actually, there is no proof that I really received a gift." This is a betrayal upon the positive polarity and an open door to the negative polarity, that doesn't need more than that to take over any good part in that person. Then there is a decrease, deterioration, a fall. Gratitude fixes a connection with the positive polarity and invites more of it. From now on, remember to thank the universe for every gift that you have received. Try the next exercise: Say "Thank you" three times, one from the heart, one from the mind, and one from the soul. Wait for two seconds, feel a wave of warmth and love washing over you from head to toe. This is the universe responding with its own, "Thank you."
Opening of Channels by Rachel, Jacob, and Joseph

(Biblical ancestors) Channeling October 2000 Energetic channels are flowing to different directions and are constantly being formed and cancelled around and from a person. There are channels of study, channels of work and career, channels of social connections, channels of love, channels of abundance, etc. These channels are formed as you direct yourself toward a certain target, such as another person, a place or an abstract idea such as success and fame. Your positive thinking and your will to fulfill the idea create the channels that connect you and your target. Those channels are canceled if you have given up and left the idea altogether. On the other hand, if you feel that your life is stuck, it is likely that your channels are blocked. They do not maintain a free flow of energies. Negative thinking may cause these blocks, mainly by fears. You can work on opening and cleaning energetic channels by drawing on a paper. When you express your choice in drawing or writing it focuses the will and the thoughts, it validates the action, fixes your standpoint and strengthens you more and more. Most important of all, you train yourself for positive thinking and take control and responsibility over your life. You commit yourself to make a decision out of a conscious choice.
59
This work of opening the channels exists on two levels at the same time. On one hand, creating energetic channels and an actual flow of positive energy, and on the other hand, sending positive thoughts into your subconscious with the aim of fixing them as a substitute to negative thought patterns and neutralizing existing blocks. Perform this work often and with great intention. The more you do so, the more you fortify and increase the chances of fulfilling your desires and creating positive outcomes in your life. You may also do this work for someone who asks it of you. It may help but it is not a substitute for his self-work. Teach him, share your knowledge with him and transfer to him the res ponsibility for his own life! Start doing this work now and you might be surprised, even today!
Opening Channels between Two People This kind of work is appropriate in the following cases. If the relationship between you and another person went bad: a friend, a relative, a neighbor, a boss, etc., you drifted apart, became disconnected. Or if you want to strengthen an existing relationship, or you want to get to know someone but they don't know you exist. If you want to create new social relationships, or someone is harassing you, holds a grudge, or persecutes you for some reason and you wish to send him light in order to cleanse the channels between you. The process: 1. 2. 3. Draw two figures. Write your name in the center of one figure and the name of the other person in the second figure. Draw seven lines, (channels) with arrowheads at both ends between the two figures. Make sure that the arrowheads touch both figures. While you do this, affirm silently: "I open a new channel between Jane and I." (Repeat seven times.) Strengthen the open channels as you affirm in your heart: "I strengthen and widen the open channels between Jane and I." (Repeat seven times.) Affirm silently: "I pass light through the channels." Imagine that you are doing so.
4. 5.
Jane
John
Opening Channels to Circles--To Create Positive Change Think and ask yourself, which circles in your life are stuck or blocked? What areas of your life are lacking: love? Money? Work? Friendship? Career and fame? Abundance? (The circle of health is not included in this list. You must work on your health issues.) Choose one subject and focus on it.
60
The process: 1. 2. 3. 4. Draw a figure and write your name in the center. Draw a circle around the figure. Decide what the circle is to be, for example: a circle of abundance, a circle of love, etc. Draw seven lines, (channels) with arrowheads at both ends between the figure and the circle. Make sure that the arrowheads touch both the figure and the circle. As you do so, affirm silently: "I open a new channel between me and the circle of abundance." (Repeat seven times.) Strengthen the open channels as you affirm in your heart: "I strengthen and widen the open channels between me and the circle of abundance." (Repeat seven times.) Affirm silently: "I pass light through the channels." Imagine that you are doing this.
5. 6.
John
Circle of Abundance Opening Channels between a Person and a Better Future This work will help you to release negative emotional baggage that the past has left in you, and affirm an aspiration and direction from the past towards a better future. The process: 1. 2. 3. 4. Draw a figure and write your name in the center. On the left hand side of the figure, draw a circle representing your past. Draw seven lines (channels) with arrowheads on both sides, between the figure and the circle of the past. Make sure the arrowheads touch both the figure and the circle. Scribble in a spiral motion one by one over the lines as you affirm silently: "I release difficult emotional baggage that my past has left in me. I release them with love and light. I take with me the insights that the hard lessons of my life have taught me. I make room inside myself for a better brighter more radiant future." Etc. Express yourself freely according to your personal story. On the right hand side of the figure, draw a circle representing your future. Draw seven lines (channels) with arrowheads on both sides, between the figure and the circle of the future. Make sure the arrowheads touch both the figure and the circle. Silently affirm in your heart: "I open new channels between me and a better future. I direct myself towards a brighter future. I affirm in my mind an easy enjoyable path towards my future. I choose a future that includes love, abundance, success, money, peace of mind, equilibrium." Etc. Express yourself freely and say whatever is on your mind. Express all your ambitions, dreams, and secret aspirations. It doesn't cost you anything. Affirm silently: "I pass light through the channels." Imagine that you are doing so.
5. 6. 7.
8.
61
9.
John Past Future
What Do We Have So Far? (Intermediate Summary)

If you were a hard-working enthusiastic student, if you eagerly experienced all the treatments shown here so far, at least once a day for two or three months, if you felt a deep need to share your knowledge, and an impulse to treat and offer treatments to other people--then you are on the right path to become a spiritual healer. The work that you have invested in yourself up to this point has undoubtedly brought you to a condition of internal purity and balance, which is the escalator towards an accelerated spiritual and energetic development. Let's summarize what you have studied so far.
Working Procedures for Treatments

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Energetic cleansing, (aura purification) in seven forms: The Ellipse, The One Who Cursed, Into the Black Hole, Triangle-Circle-Square, Circle Within A Circle, A Spiral, Three Combined Ellipses. Protections: The Blue Bubble, The Star of David, A Concrete Bubble, Triple Protection. Opening the Chakras with Spirals. Breaking Energetic Blocks with Cosmic Apples. Misty Cloud. The Rainbow. A Silver Cloud and a Golden Cloud. Connection to the Four Elements of the Universe for Grounding and Recharging: The Sun, The Black Hole, Mother Earth, The Sea. Connecting to the Six Cosmic Stores for Energetic Recharge: The Cosmic Store of Love, Joy, Vigor, Hope, Courage, and Passion. A Love Treatment from the Angels. The Inner Screen --Cleansing and Watching it. Opening of Channels: Between Two Peopl e, Opening to Circles of Positive Change, Opening Channels Between a Person and a Better Future.
Now you have a substantial list of procedures for treatment. Use it when you treat yourself or others in order to maintain a certain treatment routine, and also to remind you of the steps.
62
Basic Principles in the Process of Spiritual Development

Light: fill yourself with the light from the Creator, with the divine lights and healing energies. Cleanse: your aura, build protection, adopt a positive attitude at all times, advance in the path of selfawareness, release negative emotional baggage and blocks, and banish the darkness from within you. Balance: learn how to breathe correctly, exercise breathing. Meditate; develop a sense of calmness. Prayer: approach God with a prayer from your heart. Be grateful and give thanks. Affirm at every opportunity that you wish to be connected to Him. Giving: help, treat and give others from the abundance that you receive. The more you give, the more you receive. Receive from the Creator so that you can give to others. Pay attention: keeping these principles will qualify you to be a vessel to transmit the light of the Creator and will increase your abilities as a spiritual healer.
What to Expect at this Stage? You can expect an energetic transformation as well as other types of transformation, which may be manifested in different ways. What will you sense? What will you feel? This is a very individual matter and it's hard to predict. Your third eye will expand. Different students describe various feelings regarding this: pressure in the center of the forehead, a feeling of expansion, a pulsating sensation in the area, a feeling of heaviness between the eyebrows and the ridge of the nose, etc. You may also suffer from less pleasant experiences such as pain in the area of the third eye. It could be the result of an internal conflict: on one hand, a will and readiness for spiritual development, and on the other hand, internal resistance. Check what might be those internal resistors. Check with yourself whether you have fears or other drawbacks concerning spiritual development. Be honest with yourself. Self-awareness is an essential condition throughout the spiritual path. You might feel tension on your head, inside it, and in the temples. You might be somewhat nervous, have odd dreams, feel thirsty all the time. You are not sick. The reason why these feelings occur at the beginning of the process is that your body of light changes its frequencies and your sensitive nervous system responds accordingly. Accept everything with love. This is a blessed process. You might develop an increased sensitivity to energies. Pass your palms back and forth above crystals, and different energetic stones, connect to what you feel. Raise your palms forward in the air; try to perceive energetic movements in your surroundings. Be aware of fine differences. Turn your palms towards each other; imagine that you are throwing a dense energy ball from one hand to another. You are going through a basic change in your ideas and your perceptions of the world, in dealing with yourself, in the subject of your spiritual development, in dealing with the opinions of the people around you. You are expanding and rearranging your awareness preparing for raw insights that come to you at all times at an increased speed. These are pushing out old patterns of thinking and fixed beliefs from your inner being that are no longer valid. If until now you have been a complete atheist, the change that will occur in you will be tremendous. You will become aware of the fact that the heavens are not as 'low' as you thought, and not as empty. Open yourself and your world; enjoy your direct connection to energies, guides, angels and God. You might even hear about ex tra-terrestrials, God forbid.
63
Throughout your life you have been taught to ignore and rise above the feelings of your body. As a child, when you fell down and hurt yourself, you were told, "Nothing happened, the pain will pass." As a student, you would go to school sick and feverish because you had an exam. As an adult, you have a splitting headache, you get over it and go to work because you have a deadline for an important project. You must carry on! Now you are requested to turn your habits upside down! Listen to your body at all times. Allow any pain or other inconvenience to be. Your body is talking to you. This is its way of telling you that something is wrong, that something requires taking care of, needs investigating, needs attention. Don't 'shut it out' with aspirin and hurry on your way. Remember, that every pain, pressure, cramp, and sting has a meaning. Pay attention to the energetic movement within you, the flow, the heat and cold. Pay attention to the air, that's how you will develop your sensitivity, the ability to distinguish these sensations is valuable for a healer. Maybe lately you have felt slight stings, pins and needles, or odd shivers running down your spine. These are the reactions from your energetic field when an entity enters your space, or is trying to communicate with you and sends you an energetic message. Once your communication channels are open, you start receiving messages: words, ideas. Does a sudden thought appear in your mind that you are sure is not yours? Have you asked questions and received the answer in your thoughts? You are channeling!
Should You Study Channeling? I believe that the ability to channel is part of the capacities that develop in you throughout the entire process of awakening your awareness and spiritual development. It is not an independent goal by itself. What does this resemble to? When you take driving lessons you also learn to beep, operate the wipers and turn on the headlights. Obviously you are not going to take a separate course to learn how to operate the wipers or how to beep. It is all part of the complete process. If you take care of yourself regularly while you keep and fulfill the basic principles of spiritual development, your ability to channel will develop by itself. If you still encounter difficulties, you probably have blocks which you cannot break by yourself. In this case you will need individual guidance and attention from a healer who can identify those blokes and neutralize them in a more profound treatment.
Connecting with Your Spiritual Guide Have you started channeling? Congratulations! Your job has just begun. The first days and weeks may be turbulent, confusing, full of spiritual elevation on one hand and frustrating on the other hand. Like a cordless phone that is not tuned, your channeling may be interrupted, unclear at times, and straining. You may receive messages through telepathic hearing, pictures and visions that can be incomprehensible at times and even frightening. Pay attention: your 'antennae' are seen a long ways in heavens. All sorts of 'passers-by' and negative elements are attracted and home on your frequency and transfer to you messages that are often false. Dont be tempted to converse with all who try to communicate with you. If you are tempted--dont believe everything that you are told. In order to make the right connection, make a wish to be connected to your spiritual guide. Start a conversation with him, feel free to ask him questions and write down his replies. Even if you are already link ed to your spiritual guide, there still might be interference and bad connections in the channeling. You are the reason; your fears and anxieties close up the channeling. Work out the problem within yourself and let go of fear.
64
If you're not convinced that you are channeling, and it seems that you are talking to yourself, pay attention to these signs: 1. 2. 3. In channeling you might feel various sensations in your body, stinging, shivers, heat and cold, motion, swaying from side to side, etc. The guide talks to you in the second person, 'you'. When you talk to yourself, you refer to yourself as 'I'. The guide may call you by name or even by a nickname.
Write down the channeling. Even if things seem simple and obvious to you, take some time for perspective. After a few hours or days, read them again and you will understand how smart, special, and different they are from the answers you would have given to yourself. After some time, once you have acquired experience and confidence, your frequencies will be refined and your channeling will be clearer. Then you can channel with entities at higher and higher levels. Don't be afraid to ask for a higher guidance whenever you feel ready for it. You will not hurt anybody's feelings. Spiritual guides don't have egos and therefore they are not hurt. Beings of light will always want your highest good and will aspire to advance you. Sometimes you may feel that in spite of your readiness to go higher in your spiritual development that you stay in the same place for quite a while. You have finished a phase in the process, and you need more help and information for the purposes of treating and healing. You feel curious and you're thirsty for more knowledge, meet other light beings and higher guides. All these sensations are legitimate. Not only are you allowed to feel this way; this is the right way, the natural process. Remember: every time that you rise to a higher level, the Heavens are happy for you! At times, when you apply to your guides to ask a question or receive information, you might encounter a problem: the information is brief, unsatisfying or blocked. It's reasonable to assume that you still don't have enough maturity to receive or understand certain things. Don't be disappointed, don't get angry with your guide and don't despair. One day the answer will arrive and you will receive an explanation. The link between you and your guide is like the relationship between a piano and a pianist. If the piano has a wide range, an accomplished pianist can play the most complex masterpieces on it. If the piano has only one octave, the pianist can at most, play only simple pieces. However, if the lid of the piano is closed, even the most accomplished pianist can't play even a single note.
Know with Whom You Are Communicating If you have a doubt regarding the entity with whom you are communicating, if the frequencies make you uncomfortable, the messages you receive are frightening, annoying, irritating, or they have negative meanings. If you feel that things are being forced on you against your will, that they do not fit you in any manner, in short, you have a feeling that the connection is bad for you. Check out the one with whom you are talking. There is a way to do it. Make sure that a negative element, a dark entity, or a representative of the devil is not deceiving you. A demonic being could represent itself as your deceased uncle, as your grandmother who came to protect you, as a guide from a low level, etc, but no dark being on any level can pass as a light being from a high level. All you have to do when you feel uncomfortable is to confront that being. Ask to know, "Who are you?" Ask for their name. A demonic being that tries to present itself as an angel, (for example Michael) will cause its own destruction immediately. Even the devil himself cannot claim that he is a divine entity! If the entity identifies itself as a light being of a high level and you still have doubts, ask it to swear in the name of God.
65
Know Whom You Are Treating So far you were allowed to treat other people without having their consent, but from now on, you are going to learn about the Divine Lights and their uses in healing purposes. Therefore, you are obligated to inform the person whom you are going to treat, have his permission to treat him and also, to call upon your guide and find out if you may interfere in the client's illness or not. Sometimes the guide will tell you that you must not heal the person, but you may help in alleviating his pain. That is because some illnesses are a consequence of karma. That involves making amends by the person who is ill. If you treat such a person, you take away his karma, you prevent him from having the experience, the lesson, and learning that the disease has brought him, it is forbidden. Beyond that, the chances of healing such a person are very low. On the soul level, the person himself does not agree to get better, and by interfering, you will suffer a great disappointment. I have experienced cases in which the guide and God agreed to give up the karma but when I appealed to the soul of the client, it refused to be persuaded to give up the karma. Nonetheless, if you decide to treat such a person, you take a risk and might be hurt yourself.
Working with Extraterrestrials

I warmly recommend using extraterrestrials in your healing work. However, it is clear to me that first you have to establish your relationship with the high guides, the angels, and God in order for you to be protected from being hurt, and to prevent negative elements from entering your treatment area. Many groups of extraterrestrials from different cultures and different levels of development have arrived to Earth. They all came here out of their great interest in the place, its inhabitants, and a wish to get to know humankind. Extraterrestrials can and might follow people. They investigate how people live, what they feel, what they think, etc. Some of the extraterrestrials are trying to make contact with people in order to do experiments and cross breeding. Others are trying to take over people and/or kidnap them in order to manipulate them. Some extraterrestrials are very interested in helping mankind in various ways such as healing, guidance, providing knowledge, preventing disasters, etc. To clarify the idea, I will call by the name of 'good extraterrestrials' the ones who are considerate of humans and their feelings, who obey the Universe's rule number one of Earth, which is, "mankind has freedom of choice", and who avoid breaking it in any manner. On the contrary, the 'bad extraterrestrials' are those who treat humans as inferior creatures, like guinea pigs. They are the ones that take over people, kidnap, do experiments, and different treatments on humans without their knowledge, without their consent, and against their will. They completely ignore human feelings and can torment a person in cold blood, put implants and transmitters into him for purposes of tracking, research, control, and inflict damage and harm. The division of 'good extraterrestrials' versus 'bad extraterrestrials' is a bit arbitrary and naive, albeit necessary. A healer who wishes to work with extraterrestrials must know how to distinguish between them, he must know with whom he is working or else he might get hurt. To every healer-channeler, groups of extraterrestrials or individual 'freelance' extraterrestrials will arrive and present themselves, tell about their areas of specialty, and offer to work together. If you receive such applications, don't accept each one of them at face value, no matter what they promise you. Before every contact with extraterrestrials, turn to your guides and find out who those extraterrestrials are, are they 'good' or 'bad', should you work with them or not, etc. The guides will guide you and prevent you from having contact with negative or deceiving elements.
66
The Federation of Extraterrestrials This is a committee whose aim is to help humans while keeping the laws of the universe. The 'High Council' supervises this federation. The 'High Council' has authority regarding all the extraterrestrials working on earth. It guarantees that the federation only accepts law-abiding extraterrestrials and healers with approved experience in working with humans. It takes care to qualify new extraterrestrial healers and maintain a bas e of specialized doctors in every medical area. While writing these lines, I received an appeal from the 'High Council', (in my inner screen I could see four or five figures sitting around a table). Here are the details of the conversation. "Greetings Margalit. We see that you are writing about us. First, congratulations on your book. We wish to help and contribute to the information." "Thank you very much." "Write: only extraterrestrials who pass high level exams are accepted for work. For the first few years, they have to join groups of established specialists. They work under supervision at all times. "In addition, we send out groups with common interest such as, 'The Group of Nine', 'Dolphin Group', 'The Group of High Healers' and other groups that serve as dedicated, responsible teams that work together with a human healer. These groups are in constant communication with the management, the 'High Council', to receive new information and to keep updated in everything that happens on earth. Every discovery is published for all to know, everybody studies every new treatment. The information is available and common to all. "It is important to stress that the 'High Council' is responsible for everything that happens on earth. It works to prevent evil deeds, kidnappings, and torturing of humans. It has the power and the authority to catch those extraterrestrials, puts them on trial, and sends them far away from earth. Clinics are being established on earth at an increasing speed. Nowadays, there are already about 2500 extraterrestrial clinics around the world, they are all supervised by the 'High Council'. The area of healing with extraterrestrials has been accelerated in the past years and will continue to increase in the future. "Extraterrestrial doctors are still learning the healing of human beings and the pathology of earthly illnesses. We do not know everything yet. On many terms, humans are still a mystery to us, but thanks to the cooperation of human healers, enlightened, open -minded people, and the day in which we will know the answer to every disease and illness is not far off. "Blessings to all the people of Earth." 'The High Council.' If you wish to work with the 'High Council', call them, make contact. Ask to establish a clinic at your place. Don't be surprised if you find out that they have already noticed you or that such a clinic already exists in your home. The 'High Council' doesn't miss any person with a healing potential. You might receive a group of healers or doctors or you might meet your coordinator. He is a kind of general practitioner who examines your clients and decides which specialists should be summoned according to their problems and needs. Most extraterrestrial doctors present themselves by common human names in order to facilitate the connection. They will happily treat you, your family, and your clients. Extraterrestrials have a lot of knowledge in healing humans. Their range of treatments is vast and keeps increasing with time. I don't intend to give a list of all of their healing areas, but just give some short examples. Especially I'd like to mention phenomena such as implants and transmitters placed by bad extraterrestrials, and extraterrestrial parasites that a large percentage of the population suffers from
67
unknowingly. As well, I'd like to demonstrate a combination of extraterrestrials' work with the work of the high guides, and healing given by the human healer. You might prefer to let your team of extraterrestrial doctors perform the entire healing process on your client. Personally, I prefer the cooperation among all teams. The extraterrestrials are doing their job, the angels are doing theirs, and I do mine. And so, as I am fond of saying, the client receives several treatments for the price of one.
Implants Placed by Bad Extraterrestrials As I said before, when bad extraterrestrials are interested in a certain person, they may put energetic, biologic or organic implants (chips) into him. These implants should be removed since they cause damage to that person. You can always find a clear correlation between the location of the implants in the body and the problems that the person has. For example: Implants in the brain: the person may suffer from migraines and several other problems, depending on the location of the implants. Implants in the inner ear: phenomena of noises, tinnitus, deafness. Implants in the intestines: problems with the digestive system. And so on. Implants can be found in many odd places in the body. The good extraterrestrials help in removing these implants. The treatment is not painful. At most, the client might be aware of indistinct feelings in the afflicted areas. Sometimes during work, the bad extraterrestrials that put in the implants may appear and object, resisting the process. Allow the 'High Council' to confront and deal with them. Ask to put guarding and protection around your client for a while to avoid renewed interference from the bad extraterrestrials. A case study: This is a description from an implanted client that demonstrates the work of the good extraterrestrial team as she tells it. "Dear Margalit, I can never forget the first encounter between us. It opened a door for me to a wonderful, magical world that captured me with its enchantment. "For several years I have suffered from ringing in my ears. It became stronger to the point where I felt dizzy, lacked equilibrium and had strong headaches. I was living on painkillers and suffered a dramatic loss in my hearing. Countless visits to specialists and doctors, conventional treatments, alternative medicine treatments, reflexology, and other treatments did not solve my problem. "I saw Margalit's picture in a magazine. In the interview, Margalit was talking about her occupation. I wrote down her phone number and contacted her the next day. My first conversation with her was, 'I have ringing in my ears, headaches, loss of balance, dizziness, and I think I'm going deaf. The ringing noise won't leave me alone. Please help me.' "I arrived to the first treatment and felt relief immediately after it. The ringing in my ears was gone after two treatments. Beyond treating my ears, I received endless treatments and care from Margalit and the dear wonderful team. "I brought my daughter who suffered from a problem with her digestive system. Margalit helped her and solved the problem from which she had suffered from over a year, for which conventional medicine had
68
no answer. I can't find enough words to thank wonderful Margalit and the dear, wonderful extrat errestrial team that worked day and night to help us here. "With love and appreciation." Liora Malachi, Israel.
Transmitters Placed by Bad Extraterrestrials Sometimes you can find a transmitter in the client's body. It can be of any size or shape. A common transmitter has the shape of a matchbox with long wires protruding from it in different directions into the client's body. Such a transmitter is usually implanted in the body of a person who was abducted by bad extraterrestrials for the purpose of marking. The bad extraterrestrials can activate a communication system with the transmitter, which allows them to locate the person anywhere on earth and supervise his activities. While implants can be put in a person in his home, placing a transmitter is done in the extraterrestrial locations, since it requires a certain surgical procedure. The transmitter is more harmful to a person than the implants because it works on frequencies that interfere with the activities of systems in the human body, especially the nervous system and the heart. Removing the transmitters is a more complex procedure than removing implants, specifically because the wires need to be carefully removed without tearing them, in order to prevent energetic injury.
Extraterrestrial Parasites Extraterrestrial parasites arrive on earth from outer space, find host bodies in which to live, (humans and animals) and thrive on the energy of the host body. There are many kinds of extraterrestrial parasites. They can be large or small, static or mobile in the body, alone or in colonies, inactive or active and reproducing. In any case, they should be removed since they cause problems, illnesses, and aches that sometimes go on in a person for many years. In some cases, just removing the parasite solves the problem. Sometimes when the parasites are of an unfamiliar type to the good extraterrestrial team, they may take the parasites to the lab to test them. If you wish to see parasites, ask the extraterrestrials to show you. Some kind of a window will appear and you can see them magnified in x-ray vision.
Some Common Types of Extraterrestrial Parasites The Big Parasite: this is a very long parasite, sometimes with 'spikes'. It can settle along a leg, or the spine, or curl up in the brain, or any other place in the body. Usually several parasites of this type are found in the body of a certain person, and most likely they can also be found in his family members. The parasite may live longer than the human host, and when it senses that the life energy is decreasing; that is, the person is dying or dead, it may jump to the next closest person. This parasite is easily removed since it is in a sleep mode and therefore vulnerable. The good extraterrestrials release its grip, pull it out, then clean and disinfect the entire area. The Jumping Parasite: this is a very small parasite, but when it feels threatened, it may run around the client's entire body. It may also jump up and down as if trying to break through the skin and then you can see its location. The good extraterrestrials 'close up' areas in which this parasite is present, reducing the area until it has nowhere to run. Then they grab it and remove it. Many times a jumping parasite is the cause of a twitching eyelid or a twitching nerve. The Colony: the colony is usually located in the stomach. It looks like a nest of eggs for which a motherrobot is responsible. The mother-robot looks like a metal ball from which protrude two antennae with eyes. Cleaning the colony out of the body takes time. If the eggs have already hatched, it becomes a real problem.
69
There is a vast variety of extraterrestrial parasites, enough to fill an entire book. My aim here is not to give details on each one, but to give examples of working with the good extraterrestrials. Case study: One day, Haim, a forty-year-old cabbie appeared unannounced at my door. He simply parked his cab and came in. As he limped inside he uttered, "I can't take it any longer. The pain has been driving me nuts." He said that for more than two years he had been suffering strong pains in his lower abdomen, where it connected to his right leg. Conventional treatment didn't help. An x-ray showed nothing and the doctor was baffled. The treatment: I looked and I could see a big parasite entwined around his leg. Within minutes, the extraterrestrials took out the parasite. Haim got up and started walking back and forth in amazement. "Where has the pain gone?"
Capsules for Emotional Balance Opposite to the implants put in by the bad extraterrestrials, the capsules are implanted by the good extraterrestrial teams. They are given in order to help balance a person's entire emotional system in order to help him overcome difficult times in life. They also act very well on hyperactive children and adults. The capsules are meant to help emotional instability caused by specific events: anger, fear, sadness, sudden shocks, stress. They also help in prolonged times of emotional instability: a time of crisis, a continuous depression, anxieties, as well as for an extended period such as in psychological problems, abnormal behaviors, etc. The capsules are placed in the body. Upon activating, they release relaxing energies that are scattered around the body within twenty to thirty seconds, balancing and calming the person. There are two types of capsules: capsules that are activated by the client and capsules that are activated automatically.
Capsules that are Activated by the Client These are capsules that are usually implanted in the person's brain, (about four or five of them) and are activated upon the client's request. When needed, he should think: 'I want to calm down' or 'I want to stop being afraid' or 'I want to release my anger', etc. The thought itself activates the capsules and within thirty seconds there is a considerable improvement in his condition. The intention is that we do not take away the lesson from the client. He needs to learn to take responsibility for himself. The fact that he has to activate the capsules obligates him to develop selfawareness, get in touch with his feelings, find out what he feels in order to know what to ask for --and all that while experiencing an emotional distress. These are capsules usually recommended for adults.
Capsules That Are Activated Automatically These capsules (four or five of them) are usually implanted in the body and not the head. They are attuned and adjusted to a certain scale of emotional conditions that is considered normal for the patient. Any deviation from this range is interpreted as being out of balance and it automatically activates the capsules. That is, the capsules work without the request of the patient. Even if he is very angry, goes into deep depression, becomes frightened, etc., within thirty seconds he returns to balance. The capsules can also be adjusted according to the need, the condition of the person's life, or the severity of the situation.
70
These capsules are usually recommended for children. You can and may combine the two types of capsules together. Pay attention: the intention of the capsules is not to turn the person into an emotionless robot, but only to alleviate and help him to moderate the conditions. The capsules do not prevent him from experiencing the most delicate emotions. They also need to be replaced after a certain period of time depending on the consumption level and the frequency of the activation. Case study: The following presents a joint work from extraterrestrials, (implanting capsules for emotional balance) and mine, (removal of demonic entities) with an aggressive, bitter, and angry teenage boy. The mother tells the story. "Dear Margalit Eilon, I would like to thank you for your help and the treatment you have done for my son, Nathan. I arrived to see you after I was desperate and did not know what else to do with my son. He was very difficult to deal with, both with me, and the teachers at school, and in general, with everyone who met him. Already after the first treatment there was some calmness. We came to see you for three treatments and the results were amazing. Nathan relaxed, his sleep became quieter, and his concentration in school improved, he is less aggressive and more cooperative. All that thanks to your treatment, and the help of the extraterrestrials, and the high beings with whom you are working. Even though Nathan wasn't so cooperative with you, he did arrive at the treatments, because in my opinion, he felt that you were improving his condition. I thank you, the extraterrestrials, and the light beings for your dedicated care of my son. I wish you all the best." Edna Reshet, Israel.
Catheterization The extraterrestrials can reach places in the human body that are difficult to reach in conventional medicine. Various heart catheterizations, brain catheterizations, and blood vessel catheterizations that are considered as invasive, risky procedures, are easy, fast, and harmless actions when they are done by the extraterrestrials. Your work as a healer is to prepare the client, calm him, and explain to him that there is no risk. The good extraterrestrials can control any situation that may arise as a consequence of catheterization. The procedure, like a heart catheterization, occurs with minimal discomfort. There might be sensations like pressure in the chest, heat, a feeling of flickering or currents inside the heart for a few minutes. You the healer can join in and calm the heart with a love treatment, or if you are requested, with a heart massage. (See Chapter, Love Treatment For the Heart.)
Alert Button In cases in which the client suffers from heart problems, the good extraterrestrials can implant an emergency alert button in him. The button is implanted in two parts, at the front of the thumb on the pad, and in the index finger on the pad of the first joint. When the client feels sick, all he has to do is to put these two fingers together in a circle and press two or three times. The call appears on the control panel at the extraterrestrial clinic located above the healer's house and urgent help is sent directly to the client.
Case study:
71
The next case demonstrates a joint treatment: the extraterrestrials did work inside the body, a brain catheterization, a heart treatment, and work with the nervous system. I worked on past life regression in removing traumas. The client herself tells the story. "In April 2001, I suffered a brain stroke that was caused by a bad valve in the heart, I was taking Cumadin. The right hand side of my body was damaged. I couldn't use my right arm or right leg. I could not see well with my right eye. I couldn't talk because my tongue was hurt and I suffered from insomnia and depression. I tried to rehabilitate myself in conventional ways: physical therapy, occupational therapy, etc., without success. Later, I sought other solutions even though I didn't entirely believe in them. The first method I tried was to go to a healer who tried to help me. He wasn't successful. Then for two months I practiced speech therapy with no improvement. Then my sister suggested that we go to another healer, and we found you. We came to see you and there was an immediate improvement in speech, sight, and walking, (the hand still didnt function well.) I went back to sleeping well and my mood improved. What really helped me was a treatment in which I saw an image that frightened me a lot. After that, I didn't want to come back to you for a long time but you explained the encounter with the image. Apparently the treatment brought up a terrible trauma from one of my previous lives. I remembered being a slave, I recognized the image as the person who beat me and tortured me. Later, more traumas came up and I was able to resolve them. As a result, I was freed from many fears that I had, and my situation rapidly improved. Today, after studying alternative medicine, I am a healer in the system of bio-ergonomy, and I treat various illnesses and cancer. With many thanks." Adina Asher, Israel.
72
Part Two: The Nave Healing

The Nave Healing
The nave healing obligates you, the healer, first and foremost to cleanse yourself. According to the same principles that were given in previous chapters, the better you are cleansed, the finer your energetic frequencies will be. They become better adjusted to work with the Divine Lights. As a spiritual healer, you volunteer yourself and your body to serve as a vessel and a channel for passing those pure energies, which are extremely powerful, to your client. If your vessel is blocked or clogged with 'dirt', you cannot have the Divine Lights flow through you. They will lose their intensity and their healing effect will decrease substantially. The nave healer does not have to be a doctor or a specialist in human anatomy, or have knowledge of various diseases or illnesses, their history, the damage they cause, or the medications used to treat them. As a nave healer, you 'lack' knowledge. You don't cure with knowledge, but with the desire to heal. You appeal to the client with his problems, illnesses, and aches, and treat them in a direct, immediate manner. You interpret them on a basic nave level. Pain--you want to anesthetize it. Cramps--you want to release the strain. Tension, fear, anxiety--you want to calm them down. Wound--you want to cure it. Contamination--you want to disinfect it. Dirt--you want to clean it. Blockage--you want to explode it and break it apart. Leakage--you want to plug it up. A growth--you want to decrease and eliminate it. Weakness--you want to strengthen, and so on. The Divine Lights allow you to be the nave healer. They already know what needs to be done. They are programmed by their nature to perform the job. They already know the human anatomy and know how to bring the body to an optimal condition that will allow the healing. As a nave healer, you are the coordinator, the supervisor, the one who executes and orchestrates all this stirring activity that allows the process of healing for the person whom you are treating. You prepare the groundwork for him, using the tools that the universe provides. You transfer the healing energies to him, and most important of all, create an awareness in your client about the origins of the illness and teach him to take responsibility for it. As a nave healer, you do not glorify yourself; you don't put on airs claiming that you are able to do miracles. You do not take the disease from the client. You do not cure it. This privilege is restricted to the client himself. He's the only one in the entire universe who can heal himself, if he really wanted to do so. If he doesn't want to get better, eve n God will not take the disease away from him, let alone you. As a nave healer, you are invited to play and have fun by inventing new combinations of the Divine Lights with the use of different Cosmic Tools. Invent your own tools.
73
In one of my spiritual healing courses, the students had a home assignment: they had to invent a new tool and combine it successfully in some treatment. At the next lesson, one of the students reported: "I was treating my husband. He had a backache. I understood that a vertebra in his spine moved and was putting pressure on the nerve. I immediately imagined that I put a tire jack into his back, used it to lift the vertebra and the pain was gone." And more: In one of the classes a student arrived and landed exhausted in a chair. "I almost missed the class," she said. "I have a splitting headache." Another student volunteered to help. She stood behind her, treated her and after two minutes, the first woman said in amazement that the headache had passed. "What did you do to her?" The other students asked in awe. "I imagined that her headache was an iceberg. I pointed a hairdryer at it and melted it," replied the marvelous nave healer.
The Divine Lights

The 'Council of Sages' brought me into the secret of the Divine Lights. This was a group of three angels and high level guides. Their names were: Nathan-El, Yare-El, and Yemei-Shalom, who accompanied me in my first days as a healer. They were so full of love that whenever I called upon them, I felt aware of love flooding over me, and a smile of happiness would automatically appear on my face. With time, I have learned that if I suddenly find myself smiling for no apparent reason, they are probably nearby. The image that I received from them was of three lovely old men with long white beards, smiling. Therefore to myself, I used to call them my 'Old Men.' For weeks and months, my 'Old Men' taught me about the Divine Lights, how to call upon them, how to use them, and how they can help to heal people. Those were enchanted days in which I was thirsty for more knowledge and indeed it arrived. I thank you, my 'Council of Sages' for the marvelous lessons and for enriching me with such important knowledge. I am sure that the Divine Lights will heal and help any person who will use them, healers as well as clients.
What Are the Divine Lights? The Divine Lights are derivative of the Light of the Creator. They are characterized by such pure colors and hues that they appear as a beautiful marvelous kaleidoscope on our inner screen. (See chapter: Inner Screen) Color is frequency. Therefore the Divine Lights are energies in different frequencies that influence people in various ways, (and for that matter, also animals and plants), and therefore can function to achieve various goals. The Divine Lights are endlessly abundant in the universe. They are available at any time and place, and since they have divine intelligence, you can also communicate with them, program them for specific actions, ask them for special requests, and make deals with them. Naturally, they move at the speed of light. For that reason, whether we are treating ourselves, or sending them to someone who is on the other side of the world, they arrive at an instant. Within seconds, you can feel their work inside the body, and within minutes, you can feel their healing effect, depending on the task that was assigned to them. A real magic!
74
The Divine Lights and Their Functions If you know how to look into your inner screen, you can see the Divine Lights in it and get to know them by yourself. However, if you haven't yet learned how to do it, and since color cannot be described in words, you will have to rely on your inner knowledge. Since color and especially hue, is sometimes a matter of personal interpretation, you'll have to use your imagination. Some of the lights are doing similar or parallel work. Maybe for angels and other light beings, the difference is very clear, but to us, it is sometimes hard to make a distinction. I gather the Divine Lights into groups in a way that will facilitate their use.
How to Invite the Divine Lights Once you are ready to invite them, all the Divine Lights are ready and stand at your disposal. When you specify the color of the invited light, this color reacts immediately and arrives. There is no need to explain to the Light the nature of its work, only the destination, (if there is a specific ailing part in the body). Only with lights that have several functions, such as brown light or purple light, do you need to define the purpose each time. Examples for inviting different lights: Text for inviting a single light: "I invite a pink light to enter John's body, fill him from head to toe, surround him, and do the work." Text for inviting a group of lights: "I invite healing green lights to enter John's body, fill him from head to toe, surround him, and do the work." Text for inviting light to do local work: "I invite a lemon yellow light to go into this wound and do the work."
How Do You Direct the Lights Where To Go? 1. 2. 3. You can indicate a location in the body by thinking and mentioning the part, (hand, leg, stomach, etc.) You can place your hands above the afflicted area; the lights will be directed to it. You can direct the lights by hinting or pointing; the lights will know where to go.
Pure Divine Light

This is an energy that arrives from a high, and extremely pure source in the universe. You can use it for different purposes and in different ways. General recharging for balance, and physical renewal. Anesthetizing pain. Healing an energetic injury. Energetic Cleansing--replaces cleansing and purification of the aura in time of emergency. Emotional support, and lifting the mood. Calming anger, confusion, or a turbulent state of mind. Opening channels. Inner enlightenment.
Being filled with Pure Divine Light elevates the person to a higher state on all levels: physical, emotional, cognitive, and spiritual.
75
Self-Treatment with Pure Divine Light You can invite Pure Divine Light and fill yourself with it at any time you want without limits. You don't need a special reason to be charged with it. Text for inviting Pure Divine Light: "I invite a Pure Divine Light to fill me from head to toe, and surround me." The light arrives immediately, sit down and enjoy the treatment.
Treating a Client with Pure Divine Light For treating another person, you have two possibilities: 1. 2. You can invite the Pure Divine Light for him and recharge him at once, the same way you treated yourself. You can transfer the Pure Divine Light from you to the client. This is a more tangible manner for the client. He can see you turn your palms toward him. He gets to be near you and enjoy the attention you give him. Also, the method of transferring the energy allows the client's body to decide where it should be directed. The treatment becomes more powerful due to your meditation.
Declare silently: "I turn myself into an open channel. I invite a Pure Divine Light to flow through me and exit through my palms." The invitation occurs at once. The Pure Divine Light arrives and recharges through your crown chakra, fills you up, and flows through your palms toward your client. At your choice, you can stand next to the client, behind him, circle around him, or sit in front of him. Telepathically approach the client's body and say: "I call upon John's body and ask of you to take from me all that I am sending to you, as much as you need and where you need it." At once, you can feel a substantial increase and the intensity of the flow from your hands. The client's body reacts. You asked it to take and it does. The body knows. You can also direct the energy into the afflicted area by focusing on that area, or by placing your hands above it. You can increase the intensity of the flow by declaring in your heart: "I increase the flow through me by a hundred fold." After a minute or two, you can increase the flow again. Play with the intensities. Experience the various possibilities. A repeated increase in flow will strengthen you and increase your abilities. Follow the sensations in your palms; feel how the flow to the client's body reaches a peak and then decreases. That's a sign that the client has taken as much as he needed. At this point, you can end the process. Now continue to treat by inviting the following Divine Lights, both as a general treatment, and as a treatment that takes care of the client's specific problem. Invite lights according to the needs of each case.
Groups of Healing Lights

Healing Green Lights This group includes green lights in different hues: green, light green, dark green, brilliant green, and fluorescent green. They are all healing lights. They do the same work and have a similar effect; hence the
76
distinction between them is unnecessary. We will relate to them as the group of healing green lights and will invite all of them in a collective manner, so that they will act together. Use the healing green lights for all types of physical problems: a wound, an ache, an illness, a failure in the different bodily systems. The green lights are disinfectants, neutralize germs that cause disease, support the immune system, and facilitate the natural healing processes of the body.
Healing Disinfecting Yellow Lights Yellow light--softens, thaws, and melts lumps. This light is used as a preparation before the treatment itself, and as a preparation before removing black, negative energies and blocks. It works on the subconscious level to release suppressed materials, helps in revealing them, and brings them up to the conscious level. Lemon yellow light--does the same work as the yellow light, it also cleans the diseased area and removes waste. It disinfects physical wounds and helps with energetic injuries. Regarding its function, it is found between the green light and the yellow light. Fluorescent yellow light--disinfects wounds, ulcers, internal injuries, inflammations, arthritis, and internal and external skin infections.
The Group of Anesthetizing (Pain-Killing), Relaxing, and Calming Light Pink light--anesthetizes, relaxes, relieves pain, relaxes strained muscles and tension. Antique rose light --goes deeper into the body, acts as a stronger anesthetic, softens blocks and works on nerves. Light blue light--calms, and therefore also relaxes muscles, tension, and spasms that are caused by negative thought patterns. Beige light--calms the soul, gives emotional support, and provides a steady base, stability, and support to the soul. Beige light combined with grey --improves the mood and instills courage. Good in cases of stress or before a test, etc. The anesthetizing, relaxing, calming lights are also good for the following cases: Constipation--recharge the lights into the intestines and ask them to help in the bowl action until relief occurs. Muscle spasms--recharge the lights directly into the muscles or generally into the tensed areas, ask them to act, and relax the strained muscles. Headaches/migraines--recharge the lights directly into the head. Aches of any kind in any place in the body--recharge the lights directly into the painful area.
Fortified Anesthetizing Lights This is a group of lights that works to anesthetize pain. These lights are stronger than the anesthetizing lights because their frequencies are increased many -fold. A healer should be able to pass them through the palms directly into the ailing area. In this action, there is a feeling of strong vibration in the palms. You can increase the flow as needed, for a direct or long -range treatment.
77
The Group of Washing, Purifying Lights White light and radiant white light--these lights wash and purify the person of black energies or stores of negative energies that became stuck in the system, and which haven't left during the process of the energetic cleansing, because the client himself did not release them, (unconsciously). The washing, purifying lights work as an internal wash that combines opening and releasing of blocks.
A Group of Cheerful Lights Silver light and golden lightbring happiness, joy, and improves the mood. They are beneficial for treating depression, sadness, and are good for healing and giving support to all the cells of the body. These lights drive out the black, negative energies, and in this sense they also provide protection. They illuminate dark places in the body, banishing the darkness. They give protection to the body and allow it to take the time to heal. The combination of these two lights increases the work; they support and complement each other Examples for using silver light and golden light in healing treatments: A silver cloud and a golden cloud--are included to cheer up and improve the mood. (See chapter: Cosmic Tools.) A bubble of gold and silver--is used to treat prolonged depression and to achieve emotional balance. (See chapter: Cosmic Tools, Needles.) Fill up with golden light (see chapter: Meditation by Orin.) In cases of inflammation of the bones and joints, arthritis--direct recharging into the bones. In cases of diabetes--direct recharging into the pancreas for cleaning, balancing, and stimulation, in order to restore normal function. The silver and golden light also helps to cleanse the liver, kidneys, and other glands such as the thyroid, and the lymph nodes. Color all the body in gold: flesh, skin, blood vessels, muscles, skeleton. Use the golden light to envelope internal organs: heart, liver, pancreas. Also cover the internal walls of the organs such as lungs, stomach, intestines, etc.
A Collective Invitation All the Di vine Lights that you have learned about so far are best invited as a base for every treatment, and any problem from which the client suffers. They will work together and do a general treatment of preparation before the healer starts dealing directly with the specific problem. (There is no danger of overdose--the client's body can receive all that and more as long as the chakras remain open. (If the client complains during the treatment that he suffers from pressure in his head, check to make sure that the crown chakra is not blocked. Open it with a spiral, etc.) Don't be afraid that you went overboard with the magnitude of the invitation. Or that you pronounced it too quickly, that you gave the lights too much work, that you burdened the universe, etc. Every light that you invite will arrive! It works! Pay attention: to facilitate the work, instead of inviting every light separately, invite them in groups.
78
The Lights Divided Into Groups A group of healing green lights--included green, light green, dark green, brilliant green, and fluorescent green. A group of healing, disinfecting yellow lights--include yellow, lemon yellow, fluorescent yellow. A group of anesthetizing, relaxing, and calming lights--include pink light, antique rose, light blue, beige. A group of washing, purifying lights--include white light and brilliant white light. A group of cheerful lights--include silver light and gold light. Text for a collective invitation for all the groups of lights: "I invite healing green lights; healing, disinfecting yellow lights; anesthetizing, relaxing, and calming lights; washing and purifying lights; and cheerful lights to enter into John's body, fill it up, and do the work." After you have experienced flowing Pure Divine Light to a client, for a while, as well as inviting the above groups of lights, you can take a step forward and combine the two. At the same time that you are flowing Pure Divine Light into the client, also invite the groups of Divine Lights to recharge him. It is simple and effective.
Lights for Special Functions

The following Divine Lights should be invited only for specific treatments and not for general treatments!
A Group of Attacking Lights Blue light and dark blue light, red light and dark red light, green light and dark green light--these lights are used for bombarding lumps and energetic blocks, benign growths, polyps, cysts, swellings, discomforts. They strengthen in times of weakness, energize after a disease, help in treating muscle weakness or a low muscle tone since they invigorate and stimulate. These lights also serve for protection, (see Protection Bubble). The attacking lights are also good for cleaning the inner screen from the black particles from the evil eye, etc., (see Inner Screen). Canceling them on the inner screen reflects in canceling them in the body. Since this group of lights has various functions, when you invite them you must specify exactly what you want them to do. Examples for combining the attacking lights in different treatments: Case study: Zeke, a thirty-five year old man, complained of a growth the size of a tennis ball in his left side at his waist, just under the skin. The growth could be felt with a touch of a hand. A conventional exam showed that it was a benign growth. The treatment: my exam showed that there was a seed of black energy sent by another person at the base of the growth, (the evil eye). I cleansed and purified his aura, and afterwards, I recharged a large quantity of attacking lights directly into the growth, and asked them to reduce and eliminate it. A week after that, Zeke arrived and proudly showed me that the growth had shrunk to the size of a grape. I repeated the same treatment and we scheduled a third treatment for the week after that. A day before the last treatment; Zeke called, apologized and cancelled the treatment. He simply didn't need it any more; the growth was completely gone. Text for inviting the attacking lights: "I invite attacking lights to go into John's body, attack the growth, and reduce it." Case study:
79
Zahara, a fifty-five year old woman complained of pains and pressure in her chest, difficulty in taking deep breaths, and a feeling of suffocation in her throat. She diagnosed herself and said: "I feel that something is sitting on my chest because of worries and stress, at home and at work. I was treated by a psychologist, he helped me in other areas but the discomfort stayed." The treatment: when I examined her, I saw a dark lump, looking like a board the width of her body, and about eight inches high sitting on her chest. I bombarded it with attacking lights to break up the lump and cleared the shards into the 'black hole' through grounding channels. I called upon large spirals to stand in front of her chest and suck up black and negative energies. The treatment lasted almost an hour since the lump was dense and thick. I had to bombard it several times. At the end of the treatment, the sensations of heaviness, suffocation, pressure, and pain were completely gone. Zahara took a deep breath, "I can't remember the last time when I could inhale so deep. It is great to be able to get air into my lungs." Text for inviting attacking lights: "I invite attacking lights to explode and breakdown this discomfort." ? Caution: do not use attacking lights to treat discomforts around the heart, (see Treatment For the Heart With Love Energy).
Brown Light Brown 123light has three main functions: It sucks pus, phlegm, and secretions, for instance in ear infection, and infected wounds, etc. It cushions walls inside internal organs such as the heart, stomach, intestines, throat.' etc. It identifies and blocks energetic leaks in the aura.
Examples for using brown light in different treatments: Case study: Bethel, a five-year-old girl, arrived crying, with her mother. She had an infection in her right ear with pus secretions, a feeling of pressure in the inner ear, and she was in a lot of pain. She refused to take antibiotics. The treatment: first I cleansed and purified her aura. Then I connected grounding channels from the inner ear to the 'black hole' in order to ground all that which should not be there. I did a general recharge of Divine Lights into her body, and recharged healing green lights, and disinfecting healing yellow lights into the inside of the ear. I invited brown light to suck out the pus, and punctured the tympanum with a 'Needle' pricking it to relieve the pressure. Reach an agreement with the Divine Lights to continue the work for one week. The feeling of pressure decreased immediately. The pain decreased substantially throughout the treatment, and stopped completely after twenty-four hours. Text for inviting the brown light: "I invite brown light to go into the inside of the ear and suck up the pus." Pay attention: other examples for using brown light for sucking up pus or other secretions: in different infections, sinusitis, colitis, internal infections, open wounds, secretions from the genitals, etc. Case study: Abe, a seventy year old man arrived accompanied by his son and daughter. They said that he suffered from a dry annoying cough for almost six months. It might have started with a cold. Now he coughed constantly, day and night. Abe complained about a sore throat, a pain in his chest and back, which he felt that were caused by the prolonged coughing.
80
The treatment: I cleansed and purified his aura, did a general treatment with Divine Lights into the lungs, the bronchial tubes, and the pharynx. I recharged healing green lights, disinfecting healing yellow lights, and anesthetizing, relaxing, calming lights. I also used brown light to cushion the walls of the entire respiratory system--a treatment that gives relief and prevents irritation that causes coughing. I reached an agreement with all the lights to continue the work for a month. I didn't see Abe again, but after about two years, his son came for a treatment and gave me an update on his father: "The treatment cured him of the cough and since then, Thank God, he has been doing well." Text for inviting the brown light: "I invite brown light to go into John's respiratory system, the lungs, the bronchi, and the pharynx, and cushion all the walls from within." Pay attention: other examples for using brown light for inner coating: Cushioning the sides of the stomach--in case of an ulcer, heartburn, nausea/vomiting. Cushioning the throat--in case of a sore throat or an infection. You can cushion the vocal cords in case of laryngitis. Cushioning the spinal cord between two vertebrae. Cushioning the knees or other joints in cases of eroded cartilage as a partial, temporary solution until healing is achieved.
Using Brown Light to Prevent Energetic Leakage An energetic leakage is a very common phenomenon. What may cause holes in the aura, can be external or internal events: energetic wounds, an internal pressing accumulation of negative energy, negative energy that is trying to break through and burst out, negative thought patterns, (anxieties, worries, anger, etc.) that were not resolved or expressed in another manner. Since the aura was damaged, there has been a leakage of vital energies. In time, a hole may heal by itself, but only if the person does a conscious work to replace the negative thought patterns with positive ones, or if the problem that previously disturbed him ceases to exist, and his emotional state has calmed down. An energetic leakage can be expressed in a deep weariness in the client, (even if he takes care to rest), a feel of lack of energy, (in spite of appropriate nutrition), lack of vigor, and a general weakness. All these cause difficulties in daily functioning. To this person, even small tasks appear too difficult and beyond his ability. Insert the use of brown light in your regular order of work to identify, and close breaks and holes in the aura to prevent energetic leakage. For this purpose, the use of brown light saves you from having to locate the leakage. The brown light will locate the leak for you. Of course if the leakage repeats itself after a while, a more profound exam should be done in order to discover the internal cause of the problem, and solve it. Text for inviting the brown light: "I invite brown light to surround John from head to toe, locate energetic leaks and patch them."
Grey Light Grey light goes deep into the body; it melts and separates lumps, breaks up physical and energetic knots, and prepares the body for healing. It may attack an energetic block like a tiny atomic bomb and cause it to break up.
81
Orange Light and Dark Orange Light Orange light and dark orange light invigorates, provides with initiative, sexual stamina, sexual energies, vitality and joy.
Crimson Light Crimson light builds cells; it gives support for building bone marrow and stimulates the production of blood cells. It strengthens in anemia and blood loss. It is used in combination with other lights. In cases of severe illnesses, it is only to be used by experienced healers who are working under the direction of spiritual guides.
Purple Light Purple light is used for different purposes. Its function varies according to the task: 1. Cleaning the blood flow from toxic waste that may penetrate into the body by inhaling, eating or any other way. Removing various deposits, fats, (cholesterol), bacteria, and any element that isn't supposed to be in the blood system. It is used for breaking up blood clots but only by experienced healers, working under the direction of spiritual guides.
? Caution: Breaking up blood clots could be dangerous. A clot could be released, carried in the blood stream and arrive at different organs in the body including the brain, causing disaster. Therefore, talk to the guides before the treatment and get updated on the situation. Ask them if you are allowed to clean your client's blood system. You can include a cleaning of the blood system as a routine procedure in the work order in each treatment with no fear with almost every client except for elderly people, people with heart disease, and blood clots, (thrombosis). Text for inviting purple light to clean the blood system: "I invite purple light, I request that it goes inside of John's blood system and clean the blood from all the waste, and all that should not be there." The purple light is capable of trapping waste and toxins at the cellular level and can remove them from the body in a way that will not damage the client's health, or the function of other systems in his body. While cleaning his blood system, the client might feel an accelerated heart rate for a few minutes, or have strong heartbeats. There is no need to worry. The heart is readjusting to working under a new condition of a clean blood system. Once it finishes the adjustment, the heart calms down. At the end of the treatment the client might feel a bit dizzy, there might be an improvement in sight, hearing, reducing edemas, (especially with elderly people), and other systems, as a consequence of improved blood flow. 2. 3. 4. For opening the third eye. (See chapter: Opening The Third Eye For A Client). It can be used for surgery or deep penetration when it is radiated in a focused manner through the center of the forehead, or the fingertips, (see Chapter Surgeries). Softens and enlarges tense areas, cramps, and blockages.
Deep Purple Light Deep purple light is used for opening treatment channels between the healer and the client, and between the client and light beings who are treating him.
82
Brilliant Purple Light Brilliant purple light advances the spiritual-energetic development in a highly spiritual person. It refines frequencies. Only a healer, who has himself reached a high spiritual level, can use brilliant purple light on a client who is entitled to it, or else the invitation is not valid.
Black (Positive) Light Black (positive) light travels inside the body; it identifies black and negative energies, magnetizes them to it, and leaves with them into the 'black hole'. Text for inviting black (positive) light: "I invite the black light to go inside John's body, locate negative and black energies, trap them and remove them to the 'black hole'.
Milky Light Milky light is used for cleansing every cell in the body. It removes any waste and dirt from the cells that shouldn't be there that cause illness and disease. Text for inviting milky light: "I invite a milky light to go into John's body, cleanse all the cells, and remove what shouldn't be there."
Sparkling Light Sparkling light is a Pure Divine Light that is activated in a different manner--alternating flowing and bombarding. It is used to treat the nervous system, cleanse it, tune it, and calm it. The sparkling light recharges through the brain and flows through the nerves as it adjusts itself and its function to the nerve's structure and needs. It moves though the entire nervous system in a unidirectional flow. The light continues to flow until it finishes its work, depending on the conditions. It cleans the nerves from blocks, balances the flow, and brings the nervous system to a more comfortable relaxed state. The sparkling light is good for treating hyperactivity, hyper -nervousness, and high anxiety, because it fixes the short circuits or the overload of the nervous system. Text for inviting sparkling light: "I invite sparkling light to go into John's nervous system to cleanse, readjust and calm."
Brilliant Lights You have probably noticed the distinction between regular lights and brilliant lights: green, brilliant green; white, brilliant white; purple, brilliant purple; as well as silver and golden light--both of which are brilliant lights. The brilliant lights are doing the same work as the 'non-brilliant', however; in addition, they have the quality of expansion. Brilliant light works from within towards the outside until it expands to surround the body.
Brilliant Radioactive Lights Brilliant radioactive lights remove negative energies of all types; they are good for treating various types of cancer, treating growths and metastases, as well as benign growths, cysts and polyps. In contrast to a radiation treatment that is done in conventional medicine, which causes cellular destruction, the brilliant
83
radioactive lights are working to return the cells to balance. (Going out of balance is what caused the disease to start.) There is no danger in using them. Like all Divine Lights, they are programmed to work for healing and not destruction. First of all, the lights stop the progress of the disease. They enter into the cell and reorganize the information coded within it, bringing it back to a balanced function. They distinguish and separate healthy cells from sick cells and categorize them. The unhealthy cells are eliminated and expelled from the body. Combining these cleansing processes in the treatment will help to remove the dead cells from the body. You can recharge the brilliant radioactive lights in a general recharging to the entire body or in a local irradiation--depending on the problem. For example: Text for inviting brilliant radioactive lights: "I invite brilliant radioactive lights to enter John's body, fill it up, surround it and do the work." Or: "I invite brilliant radioactive lights to go into the growth that is found in John's colon, and do the work." In addition, you can activate these lights as absorbing lights, (similar to the positive black light) for cleaning the body from radioactive radiation. Text for inviting brilliant radioactive lights: "I invite brilliant radioactive lights to go into John's body, and cleanse it from radioactive radiation." Additional use and protection: (see chapter Protection--Concrete Bubble). ? Restriction and Warning: Treating a person who has a malignant cancerous disease is problematic on several levels. Naturally this person is found in a state of intense anxiety, he wishes with all his might for an immediate solution that will at once rid him of the disease and remove the threat. He might choose fast solutions that are offered in conventional medicines and with good reason. He will turn to alternate healing only if he is totally desperate, or he has decided to combine the two--which is the ideal way. A person who has been discovered to have cancer has probably had it for quite a while. Sometimes he arrives for spiritual healing when he is already in a deteriorating condition, in a physical, spiritual, and energetic deficit. Sometimes it is too late to save him, and on the other hand, he has no inner strength for a profound spiritual work, or time to invest in a lengthy treatment. All the healer can do is try and help to make it easier on him. What a person like that needs--is a miracle. Case Study: Eli and Maya, a young couple in their thirties, arrived to see me for an urgent treatment. Maya briefly explained to me that Eli had been diagnosed with a growth in his lower abdomen. He had been through all the tests and x-rays. The doctors said that they 'didn't like the growth'. Surgery had been scheduled to be done in six days, and in four days, they were going to do the last x-rays prior to surgery. The couple was under tremendous stress. I must note that Eli expressed lack of confidence. He was amused at the idea of alternate treatment, dismissed it cynically and said, "I am here because of my wife." Right at the beginning of the treatment, Eli entered a deep meditative state and woke up only after an hour when the treatment was finished. The process included cleansing the aura, flowing energies in extended intensities using the Divine Lights, attacking lights, and radiating brilliant radioactive lights
84
directly into the growth. I also worked on telepathic entry into Eli's thought store, neutralizing the negative thought patterns that caused the formation of the growth, (see chapter 'Entering the Head Of'). After four days, Maya called and excitedly said that Eli went through the last series of tests and x-rays before the surgery, and the growth was gone! The doctor couldn't understand it. He called upon the other doctors for consultation, they decided to take another x-ray, again--no growth. The end of the story is sad for me: in spite of the fact that the growth was not found again in any tests or x-rays, the doctors decided to go on with the surgery plan. Eli and Maya told them about the treatment that I gave him, which caused an immediate response of mocking and smiles: "There is no such thing," they said. "A growth cannot disappear just like that. The x-ray just doesn't show it." After two more days, Maya called, "The operation is over. The growth was not found. This is incredible." "And the doctors? What do they say?" "Apparently there had been a mistake with the first x-rays."
An Agreement to Extend the Work When you need to continue the treatment for a long time, you can reach an agreement to extend the work with the Divine Lights. For example: if you recharge the client's body with green healing lights and you wish them to continue to work throughout the entire week, or until recuperation--you appeal to the lights and request it from them. What happens is that the first dose that you invite during the treatment is doing the work and is used up. The agreement to extend the work will ensure that a constant supply of green healing lights will continue to arrive to the client throughout the entire week or longer. Basically, you can make agreements with Divine Lights for up to six months, but it's still not comparable to a regular treatment. Text for making an agreement to extend the work: "I call upon the Divine Lights that I have ordered for John, and request to make an agreement to extend the work for the next two weeks."
Treatment with 'Intense Cold'

This is a type of energy that upon contact with the body, creates a chill and cools a specific area of the body, or the entire body, depending on the need. For local use: Text for inviting an 'intense cold': "I invite an intense cold to go into the burn on the hand and do the work." Or: "I invite an intense cold to surround me from head to toe, and calm the surface of my skin from the sunburn." For use in the entire body: Invite an intense cold for recharging the entire body in cases of fever due to illness, (similar to a Tylenol pill), for breaking down the body heat not due to illness, for example: in hot flashes in menopausal women, or in a person who feels warm after intense physical activity. Text for inviting intense cold: "I invite an intense cold to go into my body and reduce the fever." You can make an agreement to extend the work.
85
For other uses: in cases of possessions or motile parasites (that run around in the body), you can use the intense cold to freeze them so that they are more easily removed, (see chapter: Spiritual Possessions And Parasites).
Treatment with 'Intense Heat'

This is energy that when coming in contact with the body creates heat and warms it. It can be used for local treatment or for the entire body. For local use: we invite intense heat when a certain area in the body is tense or is cramped and needs to be thawed, (a stiff neck, back spasm, muscle tension), or for hard painful blocks that don't dissolve in a treatment of attacking lights but will react well to intense heat. Text for inviting intense heat: "I invite an intense heat to go into the tensed muscle and relax it." For use in the entire body: we invite an intense heat if a person has been in a cold place and his body temperature has dropped, or he is feeling chilled. The energy of the intense heat will warm him up. Text for inviting intense heat: "I invite intense heat to go into John's body and warm him up." Pay attention: You should combine the treatment of intense heat with relaxing calming lights. ? Caution: do not use intense heat in cases of various growths, (cancerous or otherwise.)
Purifying A Home And Objects

Low or Negative Entities Lower or negative entities may invade your home, their frequencies will disturb and interrupt in various ways. The members of the household may suffer from: 1. Restlessness, unease, nervousness, a sensation that the home feels uncomfortable. 2. An odd feeling that someone is present in the room and watching you, sometimes accompanied by shivers and goose bumps. 3. Disturbed sleep, insomnia, many unexplained awakenings. 4. Animals such as cats and dogs, that can see the entities, chase them around the house, back and forth as if they have gone crazy. 5. If you are a channeler, these entities may disturb you by contacting you and giving you false messages. Treatment: call upon the archangel Gabriel in your heart, or aloud. Repeat your call twice; he arrives immediately. Ask him to check who is in your home who shouldn't be there. Who is disturbing the peace of the members of the house? Ask him to remove them. You can feel relief within two or three minutes. If your pet calms down, this is another sign that whomever was previously in the house is now gone.
Purifying Objects Black and negative energies can stick to various objects such as furniture, clothes, books, pictures, etc. It's advisable to purify objects every now and then, especially after having people in your home, or if you bought second hand furniture or clothes, or you received an inheritance. Such purification can also be done at places of business, shops, and exhibitions, which are public places where many people pass by. Declare aloud or in your heart: "I invite Pure Divine Light to come into my home and purify all the objects, furniture, clothes, books, etc., from all the black and negative energies that have stuck to them."
86
General Purification of the Home You should purify the home in the following cases: If there is a general sensation of an energetic suffocation in the home. When you move into a home that has had previous occupants. If you feel a bad atmosphere that is causing nervousness and quarrels between the inhabitants of the home. When someone in the home has died. Treatment: 1. Create grounding channels from every room to the Elements of the Universe, (the Sun, the Black Hole, Mother Earth, the Sea), and ask them to remove any negative element which is not supposed to be in the home. 2. Invite Pure Divine Light, (like in the previous case) to fill up the home and the rooms. 3. Create channels from every room to the Cosmic Stores, (of Love, Joy, Hope, Stamina, Courage, Passion). Ask them to fill your home with their marvelous energy.
Energetic Recharge of Water You can recharge your cup of water with good healing energies. Hold the cup in one hand and cover it with your other hand. Declare in your heart or aloud: "I invite Pure Divine Light and all the Divine healing lights that I know to come and recharge into the cup of water." In the exact same manner you can recharge healing energies into a whole bottle of water, in the meal that you cook, or any other food you are about to eat. The water and food will become something different altogether. Divine Submerge You can recharge the water to your tub or the pool in which you are going to enter, with marvelous energies. Simply declare in your heart or aloud: "I invite Pure Divine Light and all the Divine healing lights that I know to come in concentrated quantities and recharge into the water of this tub, (or in this pool.)" Recharging might last a few minutes. Give this wonderful gift to your loved ones as well. Immersion in water that has been charged with Divine energies is an experience you shouldn't miss.
Opening the Third Eye for a Client

If a person is interested in advancing his spiritual development, you can take the step of opening his third eye. If he is ready for the process, his third eye will respond well and stay wide open. If he has fears or internal blocks that require more work, the third eye will close shut on its own. If after this manipulation, the client will complain about pressure or pain in the area of the third eye, the forehead, or behind the eyes, it is possible that he has an internal conflict. On one hand he wants to 'see' and on the other hand, he is afraid. You can shut the third eye close in this case, or leave it as is, hoping that he will become accustomed to the situation. Of course you also have the possibility of finding out what his blocks and fears are.
87
Ways to Open the Third Eye for a Client Pass a purple light from your palm towards his third eye. Flow a purple light from your third eye to his third eye. Command his third eye to open in a telepathic order. In the first few times that you take this action as a healer, this process might last two or three minutes. As you become more proficient, you can perform it in a few seconds. Be in touch with your guides and/or your 'Crown' and receive guidelines from them. Sometimes they will warn you that the eye is open too wide and will ask you to stop. It is recommended that you open the client's third eye gradually and not all at once.
How Will You Know that the Third Eye is Opening? While you expand the third eye for the client, you can feel his feelings in parallel: Pressure in the center of the forehead. A feeling of expansion in the middle of the forehead. A feeling of 'pumping' or 'dancing' of the eye. The lights in the room seem to change color and become more grayish. Having an odd unreal feeling.
Prepare the client for the future. In the next few days, he might feel weird, floating. He might start seeing auras, or different energetic phenomena. If after a few days, the client can't get used to the situation, then the change is too drastic. You can ask the guides to close some of the eye, or you can ground him to Mother Earth.
A Visit to Paradise
One morning while I was meditating, my guides requested that I accompany them. Two of them held my hands and we had a light flight that took about two seconds. I found myself in a strange, unusual place. It was wide open and abandoned in all directions as far as the eye could see. The sky had hues of pink, blue, and purple like in an unearthly sunset. Over all laid a deep sense of peace, silence, clarity and brilliance. I became aware of the presence of all my guides around me even though I couldn't see them. I asked: "Where am I? What is this place?" The guides didn't answer directly. They asked me to look ahead to the horizon and watch for an arrival, so I did. I perceived a slight movement. Something was moving quickly towards me. It was a tree with ripe red apples. The guides said: "Pick an apple from the tree and eat it." I laughed and reached out to take an apple, "Where are we? In paradise?" No one answered. A sudden insight came to me: yes, this is Paradise. I couldn't believe it. I said to the guides, "It can't be. I have always imagined Paradise as a green place full of trees, flowers, running water, birds. You know, Paradise! Besides, what am I doing here? How is it that I am allowed to eat an apple from the tree?" The guides replied, "It has come full circle. Eat the entire apple. It opens doors for a work of selfawareness. The apple allows it. It brings things to the surface. It brings insights." I bit into the apple. It was very juicy. It tasted like honey rather than an apple. I was surprised. The nectar filled my mouth and
88
dripped over my chin. I ate the entire apple. The tree floated backwards becoming smaller until it disappeared into the horizon. The guides said, "Look to your left, Margalit, what do you see?" I looked and saw a flame of orange and red dancing toward me. As it stopped before me, I felt as if it were a magnet drawing difficult emotional baggage from within me: angers, fears, hurts, all traumas, and blocks of all kinds. I felt that I was purified, cleansed. The guides said, "The flame is purifying and cleansing you Margalit. It takes away everything that you don't need." After a while, the flame moved away until it disappeared. I was told to look to the right to the horizon. I could see a sand dune drawing closer. It looked like a desert dune, golden, clean, unmarked, a perfect smooth surface. The guides said, "Draw a Star of David on the sand and write your name within it." I did so and as I finished, the drawing sank into the sand as if it were quicksand, until it blended in and disappeared. Everything looked smooth again with no sign left. The guides said, "Now you are connected to earth for grounding, for assistance in your work. It is a union for protection, balance and stability." Again I was requested to look forward. From the horizon came a pool of teal-turquoise colored water. It appeared as if the walls of the pool were transparent, as if the water was standing and not spilling over. I reached out and touched the water. I found that the pool had no walls, the touch of water wasn't wet, but more like a gel. My touch sent circles of vibrations. The guides asked me to climb the walls of the pool and get inside. Under their directions, I submerged myself seven times. They explained, "This is the Water of Life that will give health, abundance, and life. You can connect to the pool clients who suffer from severe disease or illness, cancer, failure of the immune system, the nervous system, the respiratory system, severe infections, and high fever, for the purpose of grounding and receiving energies. They asked me to connect to the pool by a channel. The pool moved backwards and disappeared into the horizon. Something else arrived from a distance, something so vast, so wide, that it filled my entire field of vision from side to side. As it came closer, I realized it was a sea. It stopped close to me. The beach sand was clean; the water was slightly wavy in a strong blue color. A purple mist floated above the sea like a lightweight scarf. I went in and immersed myself in the sea. It felt dreamy, as if I were merging with it. When I got out, I felt no need to dry off for I was dry. The guides explained: "The sea cleanses and purifies you. It recharges you with the energies that remove internal barriers, allows internal flooding, a sensation of wholeness, self-acceptance, canceling internal conflicts and tying up loose ends." I looked up. Above my head I could see a huge spiral like a tornado funnel with its head reaching infinity. The spiral descended upon me, surrounded me, I was in the eye of the storm. Things flew out from inside me. It was so fast and intense that I couldn't keep track of it. The guides explained: "The spiral has the ability to create a bio-energetic storm that can alter orders and constant laws in the body, and in the body's systems. It can break frames and patterns that imprison and fixate the client in a condition of illness. It creates a change in the level of the cell and the DNA, and with that, prepares the base to accept healing." High above, a bird crossed the sky diagonally from left to right. I realized it was a dove and I could see another one flying. The movement of their wings was slow like in a slow-motion movie and it created a surreal atmosphere. I was watching the flight and thought: "Either I am losing my mind, or I am making it up. I am probably influenced by a movie. (Two days ago this exact dove scene appeared in a movie I had seen on TV.) The guides didn't respond to my thought. In a split second, I gently returned, falling into my physical body. My guides said: "Go to sleep now Margalit, rest."
89
All the elements to which I connected in Paradise, the apple tree, the flame, the water pool, the sea, the sand dune, and the spiral, serve me as Cosmic Tools with great healing abilities, they remind me that it wasn't a dream. Paradise is not a geographical place--it's a state of being, find it in yourself. Apply to your guides and ask them if you have reached that spiritual level, and ask them to take you to Paradise.
A Strong Treatment for All Disease (Done with the elements from paradise) Start with the regular treatment including cleaning the blood system with a purple light and cleanse the cells with a milky light. If the client is entitled to it, (according to the guides), invite the tree from Paradise, pick an apple and give it to the client. Tell him in a telepathic manner to eat it all. Watch. It opens doors for him to the consciousness and brings up repressed issues. Call a spiral from Heaven. Activate it around the client as a creator of deep change. Call upon five horses from Paradise. They will arrive galloping. Create a channel from the client to each horse. Declare: "I load upon you all that John doesn't need that makes him sick." Watch the flow of toxins and negative charges go from the client to the horses. At the end, disconnect the channels close to the client. The horses will gallop away. Call the pool from Paradise. Immerse the client in it seven times. Call the sand dune from Paradise. Draw upon it a Star of David and in it write the name of the client. Ask it to take from the client all that he doesn't need that has caused the illness, including repressed unknown factors. Watch and see how the name sinks into the sand. Call the flame from Paradise. Ask it to disinfect the client from all the disease-causing factors, viruses, bacteria, etc. There is no need to use 'intense cold' because you disinfect, not burn.
Working with the Light of the Creator

Breathe In the Light of the Creator Make contact with the Creator, talk to Him. Call Him for help when you need it. Sit down and close your eyes. Say silently or aloud: "The Creat or, I call upon You for help. I ask that You surround me with Your light. Imagine that a golden light, bright and brilliant, but not blinding is surrounding you, a warm, tender, loving light. Say: "The Creator, I want to breathe Your light into me. I ask that you fill me up from head to toe until there is no room in me for anything else." Breathe in three to five deep breaths into the bottom of your abdomen. Imagine how the light from the Creator fills you and expands in your entire body. When you breathe out, breathe out darkness: angers, fears, hatred, hurts, bitterness, and other residue of negative feelings. Make room within yourself to receive more of the light from the Creator. Open your eyes. You might feel dizzy. Pay attention to the balance, peace, and tranquility, which fills you up. Give thanks to the Creator. Know that you can call upon the Creator at all times; He is always there for you.
90
Purifying Bubble Imagine that you draw a transparent bubble around yourself. You're inside the bubble. Now draw a channel out from the bubble into infinity reaching up to the Creator. Call upon the Creator and ask: "The Creator, I ask that You pass Your light through the channel and into my bubble." Feel how the bubble fills up with the light from the Creator. You are surrounded by it. The Creator is treating you. Watch what happens: the bubble rises up slowly with you inside it, feel the floating sensation. You are in the hands of the Creator like a baby in his father's hands. Feel secure and protected. When the bubble arrives a few feet high it stops. Now feel movement. First motions are from side to side like a father cradling his baby; the motions are very soft, very gentle. Now feel movements back and forth, next a small turn to the right, then a small turn to the left, alternating. Then the bubble starts descending very slowly until you land back in your seat. Open your eyes. Feel how purified and clean you are, relaxed and satisfied. Give thanks to the Creator. Treatment by the Creator Do you feel angry? Scared? Frustrated? Hurt? Did someone insult you, hurt you, cause you pain? You can choose to keep the pain of being hurt inside you forever, or alternately, release this harsh feeling right now, at this instant. What do you choose? If you choose to cleanse yourself from the hurt-you choose balance, peace of mind; you choose the light. Call upon the Creator, tell Him: "The Creator, I need your help. I was hurt and I am in pain, I feel bad. Please take this pain away from me. I give it to You. I don't need it inside me. I don't want it inside me. Take it, and in its place flow Your light into me and heal me." Count to thirty in your heart, at the end of the count, check. The place of hurt has been replaced by peace and forgiveness, calmnes s, and healing. If there is still something left from the previous feeling, then you didn't let go. You did not give everything. The Creator will never forcefully take away from you that which is yours, that which you hold and don't give away. Ask Him again to take it. This time give Him everything, all the way. Count to thirty. In thirty seconds, if you allow him--the Creator can take away from you pain, anger, frustration, fears, and all that you don't need. In half a minute, if you only let go, He can take away from you a problem, an illness, and any hurt that you don't want. The thirty seconds are not for the Creator; they are for you. It is you who needs time to heal. For the Creator, one second is sufficient --the second in which you make your choice.
Techniques for Flowing Energy

In the chapter Divine Lights, I have presented to you two basic ways to work with energies: 1--Direct recharging into the client's body, and 2--by flowing through the palms of your hands. What distinguishes between the various techniques and validates the action is the thought, the will, the decision. What you declare in your heart that you want to do. Remember: the declaration is doing the work. Here are a few more techniques.
91
Recharging and Grounding with the Assistance of the Guide Call upon your guide and ask him to help you with the treatment. Put your palms forward and ask the guide to put his 'palms' on yours. You can feel something happening in your palms: warm waves, an active pulsation, a tickle, an energetic movement, etc. This encounter is extremely exciting, heart warming, surprising, and thrilling, each time anew. Now ask your guide to flow energy to you and recharge your palms. Count ten seconds, immediately place your hands above the client's head, and ground the energy into him for twenty seconds. Repeat the same order of procedure: recharging from the guide, ten seconds, grounding into the client, twenty seconds, and each time, perform the grounding on a different place on the client's body: shoulder, back of the neck, back, chest, stomach, etc. This technique works for general and local recharging. You can also use it to align the center line of the client, (see chapter, Center Line).
A Continuous Flow with the Assistance of the Guide Ask your guide to touch you and flow energy through you to the client. You're entitled to ask a higher guide or a Divine entity to assist you with treatment in order to make it stronger. Put your hands on top of or above the client's head and flow the energy into him for two minutes. Continue to the neck, the back of the neck, the shoulders, the heart chakra, the solar plexus, stomach, elbows, palms, knees, feet. Stay for two minutes in each place.
Bombarding Ask your guide or a Divine entity to touch you and flow energy through you. Receive guidance from him regarding the location of the blocks that the client has. Put your hands on or above the blocked area. Declare silently in your heart: "I bombard." Count three seconds and let go. During the bombardment, you are sending a very concentrated flow of energy that is meant to open the blocks. Repeat the procedure in any place that has a big block in it.
Automatic Increase of the Flow When you start an energetic flow to the client, declare silently: "I would like a two-fold automatic increase in my flow every minute." That will assure a growing increase of the treatment without you having to worry about it.
A Twist and Cross Flow When you start the flow, declare silently: "I do a twist and cross flow." Imagine that your hands are sending two energetic flows that go forward in twists as they cross each other all the way to the client. This technique greatly increases the treatment; it causes a reorganization of the entire light body, and the electro-magnetic field of the body.
92
The Flow in Circular Motions Put your hands above the client's head, flow the energy while you move your hands in circular motions toward the outside, (as if you were cleaning two plates at the same time in circular motions). By this you create electro-magnetic storms in the client's aura. Continue with the circular motions as you change the location on top of the client's body after every ten movements. Move to the upper back, lower back, shoulders, neck, chest, hands, elbows, palms, stomach, knees, ankles, feet. This treatment awakens and stimulates old, very fixed blocks, and opens flow channels in the client's body.
Flow from an Opposite Location You flow energy as before while moving both hands in circular motions, but this time, you place the hands in a different location above the client's body. Put your right hand above his head for the entire treatment. Your left hand will move and change places every ten circular motions. Start at the shoulders and proceed this way: right shoulder, left shoulder, right elbow, left elbow, right palm, left palm, neck, chest, stomach, right knee, left knee, right foot, left foot. This work is done through the brain, therefore when you are located above the left side, the client will feel the treatment on his right side, and vice versa. This technique balances the electro-magnetic field of the body, it also works for removing blocks, which pop up and fly out.
The Lotus Flower This technique is good as a treatment method for one person but is better suited for treating a group. It gives serenity and balance. Perform all the stages with intentional slowness. Place your palms together at the height of your solar plexus. Spread your fingers in both hands in parallel. Separate the hands from the top of the fingers out, while the base of the palms remain pressed together, (like the slow opening of a lotus). Declare silently or aloud: "I send from my lotus flower to all the people present: love, serenity, balance, stability, peace of mind, hope, support, receptivity, acceptance, tranquility." As you do this, feel the pulse between your palms, as if a warm energetic bubble emerges from there and flows to all present. Send up to twenty pulses. Close the flower slowly, bring your palms together and close your fingers. Turn the fingertips toward your heart, then turn them again forward and down. Open your hands like a book, separate your hands.
93
The Energetic Center Line

You can imagine the energetic center line as a thin, yet extremely strong line that stretches between the crown chakra and the base chakra. In an ideal situation of balance, the energetic center line divides the body into two equal symmetrical halves, right and left. Then the person feels balanced, calm, tranquil, and stable. Different energetic and emotional events mark the energetic center line, and then it may look inclined, crooked, curved, with zigzags, loops, and other deviations. Every curve or deviation is meaningful and has an explanation. Look ing on the client's center line can give you an emotional picture that would tell you how unbalanced he is, what are the causes and the problems in his life that have caused it. Then you can analyze exactly what has happened to him. However, you can skip the analyzing and move straight to the treatment. By aligning the energetic center line (to ourselves or to a different person), you immediately achieve an emotional balance. By holding onto the line, you can immediately achieve inner strength that helps overcome difficult emotional situations in your daily life.
Aligning Our Own Energetic Center Line Imagine a line that starts at the highest most centered place of the top of your head going down through the head, through the throat, and through the body, down to your base chakra. Accompany it throughout its length and see it in your imagination as very straight. If you notice any curves, zigzags, or other deviations in your center line--align them with your will power until it is stretched and straight. Feel how the line divides your body into two halves, right and left, completely identical. If you feel a deviation of the body in a certain area, correct it until you achieve perfect balance.
An Exercise for Emotional Balance Imagine yourself inside your body. You stand in front of your center line and hug it with your arms and legs as if it were a pole on which you are about to climb. Imagine that you are in the center of a city, a tornado is getting closer and you are clinging onto your center line. Around you the wind grows stronger. Papers are flying in the wind, cardboard boxes are flying, people are in a hurry to escape and find shelter, and you don't move. You're sure that nothing will detach you from your line. The wind grows even stronger around you, trees bend, bushes are torn from their roots, roofs are being ripped from houses, cars are turned over, and you are safely attached to your center line as if the storm has nothing to do with you. Slowly the wind calms down, the tornado passes, everything around you is quiet. You went through the event peacefully. You can also imagine other difficult situations, such as a flood, hard rain, earthquake, a volcanic eruption, etc. Practice this again and again. It will assert your balance and teach you to count on your center line. You can cling onto it in any difficult situation and it will get you through it with self-control, and without losing your temper.
Balancing the Center Line for a Client Stand behind the client. Put both hands on top, or above his head. Declare silently: "I flow energy into John's center line and force it to straighten up and come into balance." You can also briefly say: "I demand the center line to straighten up!"
94
See the line in your imagination. Feel when it is balanced. Feel how your own center line straightens up with it as if they connect into one long common line. Straightening the center line of the client by an energetic flow balances it but does not eliminate the inner curves and knots. For that you need a more profound manipulation.
Straightening the Center Line for a Client Look at the center line of the client. Invite an image of it. With your finger, follow the center line from top to bottom. When you encounter loops and other interruptions, 'push' and straighten them until they are released, as if you are drawing a straight line with your finger. The imaginary drawing will straighten all the deviations and create a complete straight line. Now carry on and strengthen the center line. Put a 'rod' made up of the Light of the Creator into the center line. That will strengthen and straighten it for a long time and give the client support. It is a kind of reinforced spinal column. It is important to understand that by inserting the strengthening 'rod' into the energetic center line, is like imposing your will upon the client. This is your own work, and not a real work done by him. If he will not release the factors that brought him into this condition to begin with: the fears, the angers, and his traumas, etc, the rod will only hold for a short while. The treatment that you give him only treats the symptoms, and not the root of the problem. Therefore, it is important to combine with it, internal work such as 'Rearranging Rooms', 'Going Through the Archives', Past Life treatment, and a correcting experience for past traumatic and painful events, etc. (See corresponding chapters in the index). You can help by 'Solving Problems', changing thought patterns, releasing negative thoughts, and thoughts that 'became independent', (see corresponding chapters in the index).
Tips for Various Treatments

Grounding with Mother Earth Use this in a condition of disconnection from the ground, lack of balance, lack of focus and concentration, absentmindedness, as well as before or after meditation, when you haven't 'got back to yourself' or got focused, or after a treatment in a deep meditative state when the client finds it difficult to 'come back to earth'. For all these conditions, you can ground quickly and easily with the help of Mother Earth. Apply to Mother Earth. Tell her: "Mother Earth, I connect myself to you through my feet for the purpose of grounding." Immediately you will feel 'roots' start to grow from your feet and move deep into the center of the earth. Usually within a few seconds you will feel a 'soft -landing', and later you will be lucid and balanced.
Intense Grounding If it is still hard for a client to focus after the treatment, you can ground him to Mother Earth through his feet as well as from the center of his being.
A Ball of Tranquility for Treating Insomnia Invite a ball of tranquility from the universe and place it in the center of the client's brain so that it will calm him down before he goes to sleep. The ball is programmed in a way that every time the client wants to go
95
to sleep, but thoughts and worries interfere--the ball will put out tendrils and will work for a general inner serenity.
Black Pockets Sometimes after all the cleansing and removal of blocks, demons, devilish entities, and spiritual possessions, there are still black pockets remaining. Nothing touched them or was able to suck them out. Invite the flame from Paradise, and ask it to go into the client's body, burn all the black pockets, and disinfect. Then ask the Cr eator to flow His light and heal the entire body.
Improving the Sight Ask the client to close his eyes. Lay the palm of your hand in the center of his forehead above the third eye and flow the Light of the Creator for one minute. As you do that, declare silently: "I want to improve John's sight." After one minute, put your hand down, wait for fifteen seconds, and tell the client to open his eyes. Repeat the procedure three times in the same healing session. You can also repeat the procedure three times a day, (can also be done in absent healing). This process restores the cornea's lost abilities, and their flexibility. Emotionally Strengthening Energy You can receive this energy from the angels or the extraterrestrials and flow it to the client in order to provide him with emotional strengthening and support. An emotional strengthening energy works in cases of extreme anxiety, emotional weakness, depression, sadness, fear, etc., as a general treatment for strengthening in difficult moments.
Stimulation to Relieve Fatigue and Exhaustion Stand behind the client. Place your hands in the form of a circle or a heart on his head, your two thumbs and index fingers touching each other. Start flowing energy from the tip of your fingers in the following order: thumb, index, middle, ring, pinkie, and backwards: pinkie, ring, middle, index, and thumb. Continue this process for three to five minutes. (As if you were playing musical notes). This action creates stimulation for waking up in cases of chronic fatigue, exhaustion, apathy, lack of alertness.
Releasing Negative Energy Stand behind the client. Place your hands on his shoulders. Draw an imaginary center line between the center of your right palm and the center of your left palm. Flow the energy from one hand to another as if you were throwing a ball from hand to hand. The line grows deeper along the body, it helps open stores of black and negative energy so that they can be released and removed in a process of block removal.
Closing Open Circles and Balancing The entire human system works in circles. When there is an imbalance or a lack, or when the circle is disconnected and open, you call upon ten guides to do the work. Each guide touches one finger. To
96
shorten the process, you can also have the guides touch the toes. A process of closing circles and balance is being done. The feeling is slightly uncomfortable and irritating but the process is important.
The Crown
You continue to advance and develop. You know the working material and have mastered it. You communicate at one level or another with your spiritual guide, (or guides). You have assimilated the principles of the healing work, and you use them on yourself, and on others. Your light body has gone through a meaningful energetic transformation in the past few months. It's time to go up one level. You are about to receive a 'Crown'! It is not an visible Crown; however once it is placed upon your head you will feel its presence with all its weight.
What Is the Crown? The Crown is an addition that is given to you when you are entitled to it. It is an extension of your awareness, a type of super-awareness. It is given to you from the Creator and it is made from His light. It is placed upon your head and connected energetically so it becomes an inseparable part of you. The crown is your direct connection to the Creator. You can perceive the Crown as another working tool, whose function is to help and facilitate you in the treatments, in the process of your spiritual development and in your spiritual work.
How Will You Know You Are about to Receive a Crown? At the moment you are reading these lines, you become aware of the idea of the Crown. Around you, the processes of preparing, aligning, and tuning of your light body begin to prepare the way for receiving the Crown. Talk to your guide. Ask him about the Crown and how much are you entitled to receive it. Find out when are you going to receive it. Receive indications from your guide regarding the Crowning ceremony. You can go through the ceremony with his guidance and experience a unique occurrence. Even if your channeling is for some reason, still blocked, there is still no hindrance in receiving the Crown. In the following days you may feel that someone is messing with your head. You might feel a pressure, or heaviness on your head, the forehead, behind the eyes, and in the temples. You might even have a headache. You need an adjustment period, and a tuning of your frequencies to the frequencies of the Crown. Accept everything with love.
The Crowning Ceremony A few years ago, I experienced the Crowning ceremony to receive my Crown. It was an exciting, emotional and enchanting experience; it felt like an event of endless love. With the help of my guides, I entered a meditative stat e. Within a short while I became aware of the presence of many light beings who gathered and stood in a large circle around me. The atmosphere was very festive, and a feeling of expectancy flooded me. I perceived hand waves and blessings from all over. I was very interested in my guests' details, such as their dress, their height, the intensity of their light and radiance. I was trying to count how many figures were there, etc. From some source I heard the sounds of violins, flutes, and drums. I listened to this celestial music that added to the festivity and the joy of the event. My guides ordered me to look forward. In front of me appeared two angels who were carrying a high pillow in colors of crimson in a velvety texture. The pillow looked very royal to me. On the pillow was a
97
crown that looked tall, big, golden and ornamented with different gems and crystals. I asked to look at the crown from all directions, and from above, and it was given to me. Immediately after that, the angels came towards me and placed the crown on my head. I could feel its weight in the most tangible manner, as well as adjustment and tuning. Once the crown was assembled on my head, I was sited on a chair. I was lifted up and turned around in increasing speed. I 'closed' my eyes so that I wouldn't get dizzy. I then received the insight that the purpose of this action was to throw away from within me blocks and other 'debris'. The spinning slowed gradually until it stopped. I was informed that the ceremony had ended. I thanked the angels and the Creator for the marvelous gift that they had given me and came out of the meditative state. All my students who have gone through a Crowning ceremony have had similar experiences with slight differences. The main difference has been in the appearance of the Crown. Your Crown is made specifically for you. It is designed for your special needs, for your personality, your unique way of work. The Crown may also change with time, according to your spiritual development. It may have more tiers, points, gems, etc.
What Will You Do with the Crown? First, communicate with it. Talk to it. Even if you had difficulty communicating with your spiritual guide, you will find out that communicating with your Crown is a simple matter. Think about it: The Crown is you. It is part of you, and therefore you perceive it as un-threatening. Channeling with your Crown is like a conversation with yourself. Apply to the Crown and ask: "My Crown, can I communicate with you?" Listen to its answer. Continue and ask it whatever is on your mind. For example: How can you help me? Why are you so heavy? Is your shape going to change? etc. From now on you can communicate through the Crown and by it with whomever you want since it also works as a frequency tuner and adjuster. Further on, you will find out that the Crown will help you in many ways and will advance you. It is a powerful tool. Learn to use its help and work with it as if it were a partner, a teacher, an apprentice.
What Does the Crown Do for You? 1. The Crown works on you all the time, tunes your light body, adjusts frequencies, opens communication channels, and improves channeling. It allows opening and enlarging of the third eye, the fourth eye, and the fifth eye, and improves clairvoyance. (You can sense its activity, especially when you are resting, at peace, and attentive.) The Crown provides you with an automatic protection. If you wish you can program it to create protections for you and renew them daily. (See chapter Programming the Crown.) It can do the same thing for other people --family members, clients, friends, etc. You can program it to cleanse and purify your aura as you learned before--which means from now on you are dismissed from this work. It can also do the same for your family or your clients, according to your request. The Crown will allow you to treat not only one person, but a very large group of people. The Crown will bring you insights regarding yourself and others. It will solve dreams, go into the subconscious, and bring from there answers, thought patterns, suggestions for solving problems, ways of treatment.
2.
3.
4. 5.
98
6.
The Crown will answer all your questions and will provide you with information on any matter of the treatment situation, both regarding yourself an d your client. Its answers are always straightforward and definitive, unlike the guides, who tend to mitigate their replies. For example to the question: "What does the client have?" The Crown will give you an answer like: "He has a terminal cancer and the chance of recovery is null." Where the guides will give you an answer such as: "He has a malignant disease, he is in a difficult condition but we can help, and there is a lot to be done to improve the situation." The Crown can treat you as if it were a psychologist: listen, analyze, give advice, guide you in the work of self-awareness, direct you in the quest of self-discovery. It can teach you methods of healing by means you have not yet learned. For example, healing with sounds, crystals, pendulums, and more. It has the knowledge. It can intensify the good qualities within you at your request, (for example: Courage, optimism, creativity, etc.,) likewise for a client. It can help you in learning a foreign language. It can play music for you upon your request, in the condition that you are familiar with, (that is it is in your 'record archives'). You can listen to it for purposes of relaxation, meditation, stimulation of the brain cells, stimulation of the chakras and the meridians for increased energetic flow. You can assign it to do any treatment that you know--it will do it for you.
7.
8.
9.
10. 11.
12.
Many new possibilities will develop with time.
Programming the Crown

Treat your Crown as if it were a super computer that you are about to program to work for you. The purpose of the programming is to alleviate your workload and pass it to the Crown. When you apply to it and 'type' your requests, be precise. It will perform everything that you ask of it.
Programming for Performing Cleansing and Purification of the Aura Apply to the Crown, aloud or silently, and tell it: "My Crown, I want to program you. Are you ready?" Listen to the reply: "Yes." Carry on and say: "From this day forward, every time that I request of you to perform a cleansing and purification of the aura for myself or someone else, I mean that you perform cleansing and purification of the aura the way I do it: using the seven forms--'the Ellipse', 'the One Who Cursed', 'Into the Black Hole', 'Triangle-Circle-Square', 'A Circle Within A Circle', 'the Spiral', and 'Three Combined Ellipses'. Did you understand what I said?" Listen to the reply: "Yes."
Programming for Performing Protections Tell the Crown: "My Crown, I want to continue programming you. Are you ready?" Listen to the reply: "Yes."
99
Go on: "From this day forward, every time that I ask you to make protections for myself or someone else, I mean that you perform 'the Triple Protection' the same way I do: 1. Invite a dark blue light and ask it to create a dark blue bubble. 2. Invite a dark red light, a dark blue light, and a dark green light, and ask them to mix and create a Star of David that will surround the blue bubble. 3. Invite brilliant radioactive lights and ask them to create a bubble that will surround the Star of David. Did you understand what I said?" Listen to the reply: "Yes."
Programming Preparation for a Treatment Tell the Crown: "My Crown, I want to continue programming you. Are you ready?" Listen to the reply: "Yes." Go on: "From now on, every time that I request you to do for me or for someone else a preparation for a treatment, I mean that you perform the following steps as I do: 1. Invite seven medium sized spirals. Ask them to locate in front of the chakras, open them and create an outflow. 2. Invite twenty apples to go into the body, locate energetic blocks, and break them. 3. Invite a misty cloud to come and surround the body from head to toe. 4. Invite a rainbow to localize above the person. 5. Invite a silver cloud and a golden cloud to locate above the person's head, and shower them with a rain of silver and gold. 6. Apply to the four elements of the universe: The Sun, the Black Hole, Mother Earth, and the Sea. Connect the body to them in order to ground all that is not needed, and recharge with good energies. 7. Apply to the Cosmic Stores that I know: Love, joy, stamina, hope, courage, and passion. Connect them to the body for recharging of good energies. My Crown, did you understand what I said?" Listen to the reply: "Yes."
Programming for Treatment with Divine Lights Tell the Crown: "My Crown, I want to continue programming you. Are you ready?" Listen to the reply: "Yes." Go on: "From now on, every time that I request you to do for me or for someone else a treatment with Divine lights, I mean that you perform the following steps as I do: 1. Call upon healing green lights, healing disinfecting yellow lights, anesthetizing, relaxing, and calming light, washing and purifying lights, and cheerful lights. Ask them to fill up the body from head to toe, to surround it and do the work. 2. Invite a black light to enter the body, locate negative and black energies, trap them, and remove them into the black hole. 3. Invite a brown light and ask it to surround the body, to locate energetic leaks, and seal them up. 4. Invite a milky light to fill up the body and cleanse every cell from everything that it doesn't need. 5. Invite a sparkling light to enter the nervous system, to cleanse, to attune, and to calm it. My Crown, did you understand what I said?" Listen to the reply: "Yes."
100
How Do You Treat Through the Crown? First you have to connect your client to the Crown. You do this by creating a channel between the two of them. Imagine that you draw a golden line from the Crown and connect it to the client to any place in his body that you choose. If you're treating several people at the same time, connect all of them to the Crown using golden lines. This connection is eternal. You only make it once and it is valid for the entire life and beyond it, by being an energetic connection on the soul level. With time, many golden lines will come out from your Crown linking to all the people whom you have treated. Remember: Make sure to connect the client to your Crown. Now that your Crown performs so many tasks for you, you are free to do other tasks.
A New Working Order for Treatment 1. 2. 3. 4. Connect the client to the Crown with a golden thread. Ask your Crown to do the following for the client: Cleaning and purification of the aura, triple protection, preparation for a treatment, and treating with Divine lights. Recharge the client with Pure Divine Light with your hands, using one of the suggested methods for flowing energy. Balance the client's center line.
Thought Reading
The technique for reading thoughts that you will learn here is for the purpose of treatment only and not for the purpose of show business. In this technique you will learn to 'enter your client's head' in order to help him in the healing process. Obviously this work is done only with the client's knowledge and consent. Warning: Under no circumstances should you use the ability to read thoughts for your own personal gain! Going into the client's mind is done at the subconscious level and allows you to go into depths where you can: 1. Receive answers that will help you understand the source of the problem, investigate its roots, check what the thought patterns were that gave birth to the seed of the illness, and find out valuable information that may advance and facilitate the treatment process. Receive guidelines from the client's subconscious regarding how to continue the treatment--what can be done? What direction should the treatment take? What will solve the problem? Etc. Activate the system to bring up blocks, (see chapter Blocks).
2. 3.
In addition, you will learn how to release the negative thoughts that harm the client and replace them with positive thought patterns. These manipulations hold a controlling power and have a powerful long-term influence on the client; therefore, they should be done under the close supervision and guidance of your spiritual guides, while taking adequate precautions.
Entering the Head of Sit in front of your client and close your eyes. Declare silently: "I open a small door in John's nape. I enter inside his head."
101
Imagine that you are inside his head, concentrate and listen. Feel as if you are in a room, or a wide hall, or in a space with an echo. Go on and say: "I invite all the thoughts that can tell me, or explain to me, why does John have a headache?" Listen to the sounds and the motions. You can feel an increased commotion as if the hall is becoming filled with beings. Treat the thoughts as if they are entities in their own right. Talk to them. Ask: "How many thoughts have arrived?" Listen to the reply: 'Three' or whatever other number. Treat the thoughts as if they are children in pre-school, and you are the teacher who keeps order and discipline. Command: "First thought, stand in the center. Tell me in a loud and clear voice, what is your idea?" The thoughts arrange themselves in order of the importance of their ideas. Naturally the first thought will give you the main and most important idea. Listen to its reply, write it down or remember it. The thoughts always talk about their person in second voice, therefore an answer can sound like this, "John has a headache because he is afraid." Talk to the thought; interview it. Thoughts may present their ideas briefly. You: "What is John afraid of?" Reply: "He is afraid to make an error." You: "Why is he afraid to make an error?" Reply: "Because he already made a mistake once and paid dearly for it." You: "Can you tell me more about it?" Sometimes the thought has nothing more to say and it keeps silent. It has fulfilled its role. You can get more information from other thoughts. You: "First thought, step aside. Second thought, come and stand in the center. Tell me in a loud clear voice, what is your idea?" Reply: "John has a headache because he doesn't want to remember." You: "What doesn't he want to remember?" Reply: "Something that happened a long time ago." You: "What happened a long time ago?" Reply: "He nearly drowned when he was a little boy and he'd rather not think about it." And so on. The above conversation is just an example to show you the working process. Of course for every person you will find thoughts that create his internal world and are unique to him. After you've talked to all the thoughts that have appeared, and you understand the root of the problem, you move into the next step.
Releasing Negative Thoughts All the thoughts that appear at your summons are the thoughts that cause a problem or disease. These are the thoughts that carry the negative message. You have to release them, make them leave; move them into the 'trash'.
102
Apply to them and say: "I apply to all the thoughts that are responsible for John's headache. Up until now, you have a certain job, but from now on, John doesn't need you any more. The job has ended. Spread your wings, leave his head and fly into the black hole." The leaving thoughts will appear to you in one of the following forms: birds, butterflies, or bubbles. You can connect to the events using your imagination. Sometimes you can feel the energetic movement as a small pulse at the tip of your nose. You can count how many thoughts are leaving. You can rush them to leave more quickly if their number is very large. After a while ask: "Did all the thoughts leave?" Sometimes it happens that a certain thought refuses to leave. Talk to it and find out why. It may tell you something like: "John needs me." This idea represents the client's unconscious internal resistance to release the thought pattern. Convinc e it to leave. Command it to leave. Sometimes when the client has an unconscious internal resistance to receive treatment and healing, reading his thoughts is necessary in order to understand his motives. An example: Me: "I open a small door in John's nape and enter his head. I call upon all the thoughts that can explain to me why John resists treatment? First thought, stand in the center. Tell me in a loud and clear voice, what is your idea?" Reply: "John resists because of fear." Me: "What fear?" Reply: "John's afraid that if he feels better he'll have to go back to work." Me: "Why is he afraid to go back to work?" Reply: "He has a lot of responsibility and problems that he cannot solve so he prefers to be sick. This way he can stay home legitimately." Other thoughts may give you more information such as: John needs rest. He needs to receive attention and treatment from his family, etc. Me: "I request all the thoughts that have arrived to leave John's head. Spread your wings and fly into the black hole. John doesn't need you any more, he doesn't want you." In the same manner you can release fears, anxieties, angers, internal conflicts, depression, bad moods, traumas, and more.
Installing a New Thought Pattern After all the old thoughts have left, you have to install new thought patterns in the client's mind. Declare: "In place of the old thoughts that have left, I install a new thought pattern in John's mind: I, John, release all my fears. I release the tension that gives me a headache. I am willing to bring up painful memories to my awareness and deal with them. I am capable of it. I don't resist the treatment. I choose to get better. I am willing to heal." And so on. New thought patterns should be positive at all times and usually opposite to the parallel negative, old patterns. In any case, receive guidance from your guides and act with caution and responsibility. When
103
you finish the process of installing new thought patterns, declare: "I close the little door in John's nape and go outside." (Pay attention: first close the door, then leave.) Pay attention: You have the power. The possibility that you are unable to do the job is non-existent. However, at the bottom line, what matters is the client's choice and will. If he insists, he will continue and think the exact, same negative thoughts and will recreate them. Therefore, it is most important that you talk to him; share with him the discoveries that you have made in the journey into his subconscious. Tell him what are the reasons for his problem, in order to give him a chance to deal with them, and make a conscious choice. The most important of all, is that he understands the connection between the cause and the result, and will learn to take responsibility for himself and his health. All this must be done gently, while respecting the client's defensive and repressive mechanisms. Sometimes you will come up with traumatic materials that the client is not ready to handle. Don't throw them in his face. Don't tell him, 'I found out that you had a heart problem because you hated your father and wanted to kill him.' Or: 'I have discovered that you're having difficulties with intimacy because you were raped as a child,' and so on. Your client might feel threatened, be scared, deny, and surround himself with a wall of resistance, which can cause damage to the treatment process. If the client strongly denies--don't argue with him; draw back tactfully. Tell him: "I am sorry I must have made a mistake." If and when he will be ready, he can come back and think about what you have told him and benefit from it. Be gentle, hint, give the client the chance to do his own work. Also, if you're not a qualified psychologist, suggest that he sees one. You have done your job. In certain cases, the success of the entire treatment depends on reading the thoughts of the client. As you can learn from the following example: Michelle, a nine-year-old girl arrived for a treatment, accompanied by her mother. She looked sad, scared, and withdrawn. She refused to cooperate and didn't answer any questions. Her mother said that Michelle had been acting strange for a long time, for about a year she had been anxious and nervous, was a loner, and was depressed. Every time when it was time to go to bed, she tried to stall it and wanted to stay with her parentswhich they interpreted as being spoiled. Above all, she would talk to no one and had told no one what bothered her. The desperate mother had already been thinking about the worst scenarios. I entered inside Michelle's head; I invited all the thoughts that could explain what was going on with her. Me: "How many thoughts have arrived?" Reply: "Three." Me: "First thought, stand in the center and tell me in a loud and clear voice, what is your idea?" Reply: "Michelle sees things." Me: "What things did she see?" Reply: "Things that frighten her" Me: "Such as what?" Silence Me: "First thought, step aside. Second thought, stand in the center and tell me in a loud and clear voice, what is your idea?" Reply: "There was somebody in Michelle's room at night."
104
Me: "Who was there?" Reply: "A black figure in the window." Me: "When did that happen?" Reply: "Two months ago." Me: "Who is that image?" Reply: Silence. Me: "Second thought, step aside. Third thought, stand in the center" and so on. I learned that Michelle was gifted with psychic vision. She saw entities and experienced nightly traumatic encounters. Furthermore, she felt that she could tell no one about it because no one would understand. Her anguish had increased day by day, and her daily functioning had been damaged. When I brought up my findings in front of Michelle and her mother, the girl started crying, but it was a cry of relief, and liberating comfort. A cry that someone finally understood and knew what she was going through. I asked the guides to clean her house and put guarding and protection on it. I gave instructions to the mother how to behave in the future. At their next visit, I hardly recognized Michelle. This time she was a happy laughing child, friendly and open, right at her arrival she said proudly: "Do you know what happened, Margalit? On Friday I was walking down the street with Daddy and I saw a man with red eyes sitting on the roof of the bus station" Such is a new age child.
A Distant Telepathic Conversation

This conversation should be done for therapeutic purposes only, and not for fun. When you create a telepathic communication with a person, the conversation is at the level of his subconscious. The person is not aware of the conversation unless he is a channeler, or has an extremely high self-awareness. Even then he might not always be aware of it since at that moment he might be busy or asleep. Since the contact is done at the subconscious level, the information that you will receive is truthful and sincere, in most cases. Sometimes, however, you may encounter a person who is so untruthful, that he lies even in the deepest levels of his mind. You may also encounter cases of unwillingness to cooper ate, or even resistance--if you apply to people who are dealing with black magic, and are being used as channels to the negative polarity. Sometimes it's also hard to converse with a person with a difficult personality, with a pompous ego, who is very aggressive, dominant, etc.
In What Cases Should You Perform a Telepathic Conversation? You can create a connection for a telepathic conversation in extreme cases. When a client desperately needs to know what another person is thinking about him, or plans to do regarding him, and the matter keeps him awake at night, damaging his health and peace of mind. Examples: A couple's relationship has reached a dead end. The husband was unfaithful, left the house, took the monetary assets, etc. The wife doesn't know how to act or what to do to protect herself and the children, especially since he doesn't cooperate. She asks to know details such as: what are his feelings towards her? What are his plans? Would he like to come back home or separate? Does he have any intentions of hurting her? Will he be difficult in a divorce case, etc.
105
Business partners. One partner suspects that the other one cheats or steals, but he has no proof. He wants to act to prevent bankruptcy or losing the business, but doesn't wish to hurt his partner's feelings, in case he was wrong. When a woman lends money to a man. He does not return the loan and keeps rejecting her. She's in a bad financial situation, clueless, and doesn't know what to do. She asks to know what his intentions are and so on.
Rules that You Must Respect and Obey 1. 2. 3. First, the conversation depends on the consent of the guides. You have to maintain contact with the guides throughout the entire telepathic conversation to receive further orders and guidance from them. At the beginning of the telepathic conversation, you should make clear to the person that: --he doesn't have to talk to you if he doesn't want to, --he doesn't have to answer a question that he doesn't like. If the person with whom you've made a telepathic connection asks for your identity: --you have to reply honestly, even if it means that you are exposing your client. You're only allowed to interview the person in a direct manner, meaning you ask and he answers. You are absolutely forbidden to implant a thought that is not his own, in his mind. Of course you cannot order him to do things that you want him to do unless he suggests it or plans it. If the guides permit--you may ask him to bring into consciousness a specific thought that he had. Tell him: "I request that you bring the idea that you just suggested into your consciousness. Find yourself consciously thinking about it now." You are allowed to be assertive; to focus on the person you are talking to, but you cannot express anger or any other harsh feelings towards him. You can't tell what he is doing during the conversation. If he's in the middle of driving a car, you may risk his life. The client that ordered the conversation, and who is present in the room, should not utter a word. You must be considerate of the person's feelings. At the end, thank him for the conversation. If he's upset at the cause of it--calm him down.
4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
9. 10.
If you still wish to have a telepathic conversation with someone while you are careful to observe all the rules, say silently or aloud: "I call John Doe. I call John Doe." Listen. Within two seconds, you can hear an answer. Usually people reply with, "Hello, who is this?" As if they are answering the phone. The frequency of their voice will sound just like in real life, with the same tones, the same inflections, and manner of speech that is unique to them. Take your time. Have a leisurely conversation. Don't get stressed, listen to the guides at all times. Think about what you are going to say. Caution: The person is not aware of the conversation, however, it may significantly affect him.
Protection Gloves
Are you prepared to receive another gift from the heavens? If so, contact your guide/s, and ask for gloves to protect your hands. You will need them for the procedures of deep cleansing that you are about to experience: magnetizing thoughts that 'became independent', removing blocks, removing spiritual possessions, and so on. In these types of work, you may unexpectedly encounter various negative elements--manifestations of black energies, evil spirits, dark beings, parasites, including extra-terrestrial parasites. The gloves provide protection by preventing all these things from adhering to your hands.
106
How Will You Receive the Gloves? Put your hands out in front of you. Wait. Placing the gloves on your hands will only take a few seconds. If you focus your attention to whatever is going on, you can feel some sensations in your hands. Something happening, touching Have an imag e of your gloves. Usually they have a light or white color and reach up to your elbows. Some of my students say that they have a pattern of lace or netting, etc. It's an individual matter. Like the Crown, the gloves also are made to fit your personality, the type of work you do, and they may change with time. Now you are protected and can enter into the client's body without fear. Nevertheless, don't forget to physically wash your hands at the end of each treatment.
Implants for Increasing the Energetic Flow

Implants in Your Palms To increase the intensity of the treatment and expand your working abilities, you may want to receive implants in your palms and in your body. These implants are actually minute changes that are done in your light body, and function as some kind of electronic chips that are activated by the frequency of your voice. The implants that would be placed in your palms will work as additional expanded flow channels through which you can transfer more energy to your client. By changing the direction, they can also be used as powerful magnets that will assist you in magnetizing and drawing out blocks, and other 'debris' from the client's body.
Implants in the Body You're also entitled to receive implants in your body, usually placed in the stomach area, which will allow you to transfer energies to the client from your body as well, in addition to sending from your palms. The implants in the body don't work by magnetizing but by outflow of energy, their number varies between five to ten, according to the need. The implants do not harm you, installing them is easy, and they have no side effects. They increase your strength as a healer and improve your work.
How Will You Receive the Implants? Talk to your guides and make sure that they are indeed installing the implants in you at that time. Reach your hands out and forward for about a minute. Focus on the sensations in them. You can feel 'touching', tickling, a pulsating sensation, an energetic flow, tingling at the fingertips, etc. Remain seated for one more minute and allow the guides to install the implants in your body as well. Later you can ask about how many implants you received, where are they located, etc.
How Will You Activate the Implants? As stated previously, the frequency of your voice activates the implants, no matter if you speak silently or aloud. The implants are adjusted to you; obey you. Only you can activate them.
107
For purposes of flowing or transferring energy, apply to your implants and command: "My implants, start working!" You will immediately feel how you flow energy from your palms and your body. The flow in your hands is felt more strongly and pronounced. For increasing the intensity of the flow, declare: "I increase the intensity of the flow ten-/hundred/thousand-/ten -thousand-fold." You can immediately feel the increase in the flow and then a toning down as your body makes the adjustment. Play for a while by increasing the flow. Feel the differences between the various intensities. The increase is registered and calibrated. If, in your initial work with the implants, you multiply the intensity of the flow by ten thousand times, the information is registered. The system presets so that at the next session, you will start at an intensity of ten thousand fold. Even though you think of it as starting at zero intensity. This means an increased amplification of your energetic transfer capacity at an unimaginable level.
In order to stop the flow--declare: "My implants, stop working." They stop immediately. For magnetizing--declare: "I transform my hands into drawing-in magnets." Your hands instantly become working tools that can magnetize and draw anything away from the client's body. For increasing the magnetizing, declare: "I increase the intensity of the flow ten-/hundred-/thousand-/tenthousand-fold." Pay attention: You can simultaneously perform an outflow of energy from your body and magnetizing in with your hands.
Thoughts That 'Became Independent'

Thoughts that 'became independent' are thoughts that have been created by the person himself, usually negative thoughts that hurt him. They are not planted by an external factor, nor by the devil, but in a moment of weakness that the person himself gave his permission and consent to pass control from him to the devil. Meaning that the person loses all control on his own thoughts and the devil takes over. There is a branch of the devil in the person's mind. These thoughts should be removed because they hurt the client by creating compulsive behaviors, different addictions, fixation on situations, skewed perceptions and approaches that are made to prevent any advancement and improvement. A regular negative thought can be neutralized and replaced by a positive one using different techniques. The technique of 'Enter the Head Of' can also be used to summon negative thoughts, remove them, and replace them with positive thought patterns. However, the healer cannot modify the thoughts that 'become independent'.
How to Discover Thoughts that 'Became Independent' Just as demons are exposed after a process of block removal, thoughts that 'became independent' are exposed after a process of removing negative thoughts from the client's head. Enter the client's head and say: "I invite all of John's negative thoughts, all the thoughts whose ideas are fears, angers, hurts, sadness, self-pity, grudges. All of John's thoughts that harm him, that cause him to be sick. I command all the thoughts that arrived to spread your wings and leave John's head. Fly into the black hole. John doesn't want you or need you anymore." Wait. You have invited a huge number of thoughts. Give them time to leave. Later ask: "Is there a thought that did not leave?"
108
Listen to the reply: "Yes." Thoughts that 'became independent' may deceive since they talk like separate entities. They might be stubborn, refuse to leave, and even answer in a rude manner. Don't be surprised if you receive an answer from such a thought. "I don't want to leave this place. You can't give me orders. I have an important task and you will never be able to get me out of here." etc. It may even call you by obscene names. If for a moment, it seems to you that it is not just a thought, that it is an entity, demon, or a spirit possession that went into the client, ask your guides. They will do an analysis and let you know. If it is just a thought that 'became independent'; talk to it. You can find out what its role is. It will give a broader perspective of the client and may give an explanation of the origin of some of his problems. For example: Me: "Thought, what is your idea?" Reply: "My idea is that John is a nobody, incompetent, he will never amount to anything." Me: "What is your role?" Reply: "My role is to make sure that he doesn't even dare, that he doesn't even dream to try and achieve anything, that he stays a nobody." Me: "I ask you to leave! John doesn't need you any more." Reply: "Yes, he does need me. You don't have a say in this, you stupid idiot." It could have been very amusing if it wasn't so sad and life destroying.
How Do You Remove Thoughts that 'Became Independent'? They are removed one by one by magnetizing. Place both hands above the client's head while you're inside his mind, telepathically. Imagine that your palms are now working as powerful drawing in magnets, activate your implants into magnetizing position. Declare silently: "I magnetize this thought that 'became independent'. I draw it out and throw it into the black hole." Imagine how the thought is being drawn and magnetized into your palms, left at your mercy, helpless. You are in control of it. Feel its energy in your palms. Send it into the black hole by shaking and waving your hands. Find out if there are more thoughts that 'became independent'. Sometimes they hide and don't reply but you can feel their presence. In any case, you can apply to the guides and they will tell you exactly how many such thoughts there are. Remove all of them one by one in the same manner. By the way, you can also remove your own thoughts that 'became independent'. This is a self-cleansing and purification work at its best. You make your own choices, you take a clear stand, and you take action.
109
A Dark Entity inside the Head

Now that you have freed large numbers of negative thoughts, and thoughts that 'became independent' from inside the head, you still haven't left your client's head, you might uncover an unpleasant discovery: a dark entity. Do not be afraid, know who stands behind you, understand that this dark entity is afraid of you and those who are with you. It knows that it has been discovered and it is afraid of that. You can hear it. If it answers you, you may note its unpleasant, hair-raising frequency. If it doesn't answer you, you can still note its presence. The image that you might perceive is that you are inside a dark cave, you feel the presence of someone or something. You feel that this someone is backing into the wall in a desperate attempt to hide and blend into the shadows. You can hear how heavily it breathes. Sometimes you might perceive it standing in front of you. Usually it is a dark image in a human shape, (head, shoulders, etc.) Sometimes it has its arms across its chest in a position that expresses a high selfconfidence and defiance against you. If you are inexperienced, your channeling is not clear enough, and especially if you are afraid--retreat. Move backwards. Pull back your hands. Ask the Creator to take care of the matter. Stand aside and watch what happens. What you might see is a wide tube of light that looks like a glass or clear plastic cylinder with a shining light inside it, hot but not blinding, going down and connecting to the client's head. Soon after that you will see the dark image being sucked up the tube and disappear. The entire process could have been accomplished in a brief second but God and the guides want you to learn and will perform it slowly in front of you so that you can witness. Some of the clients will report that they felt something being pulled from inside their head. There is a great diversity of dark beings, demons, and diabolic entities at different levels that you may encounter in your work. You do not have to deal with them. Such work requires skill, personal purity, the right to do such work, experience, a lot of self assurance, self-awareness, and above all, a defined total faith in your connection to the Creator. Only under these conditions are you worthy of doing this holy work of saving souls. If you still have these skills, but you are afraid--let go. These entities feed on fear and you might be hurt.
Sealing a Leak inside the Head

Finding a leak in the head and sealing it is done immediately after all the cleansing processes that you have already learned are completed: releasing of negative thoughts, installing a new positive thought pattern, magnetizing thoughts that became independent, removal of dark entities from the head. Enter the client's head and imagine that you are inside a hall or a cave. Look around; receive an image of the place you're in. See the floor, walls, and ceiling. Check where it is dark and where it is light--usually it becomes darker the more you look forward, along the walls and the corners. To light the place, imagine that you have a miner's lamp on your forehead. Everywhere you turn your head and look; the lamp sends a strong beam of light and illuminates the area. Clean the entire dark area with Cosmic Erasers. Sometimes the amount of 'dirt' is too much for the eraser to handle. If everything is too dark, or there are growths, or everything is too sticky, you can invite Radioactive Erasers according to the need.
110
Flowing of Dark Negative Energy After the area is cleared out, look for a hole or a crack from which 'black tar' or any other black liquids are flowing. This is the entrance through which dark energy enters from the outside under the influence of the negative polarity. This is also the place where negative thoughts flow in. We are talking about negative thoughts or an obsessive, addictive focus on self-manufac tured negative thoughts. This is a kind of faucet for black and negative energies, their origin. Every person has negative thoughts or negative thought patterns, however we are talking about extreme situations. Sealing the hole or the crack may improve the client's condition or even cure him completely-depending on the problem. Sealing the leak is an act of going to the root of the problem; you might call it a root -canal treatment. The leak might look like a puddle on the floor, a leak from the ceiling, a drip on the wall, a bubbling liquid, or any other image. Clean the 'black tar' or the other black liquids with your willpower. Imagine that you put in a tube that sucks everything out, connect channels to the black hole, use a broom, or any other tool that you wish. When everything is clean, you will see the hole or the crack.
Sealing the Hole or Crack Here are several ways for sealing the hole or crack: 1. 2. Insert a gold thread into it from your Crown, tear off a piece from the thread and stick it to the crack as if it were putty. If the hole is very big, insert a golden bubble into it that will seal it. Prick the bubble with a pricking Needle so that it will continue to slowly drip golden light for a long time. Make an agreement to extend the work for six months. You can seal the crack with a brown light. Apply healing disinfecting light as well that will heal the place. You can seal the crack with positive plasma. Pay attention, if the client insists--he can reopen the hole and you can't stop it.
3. 4.
Positive Plasma This is an energy that materializes into matter. When you invite positive plasma it will arrive like a lump of dough or clay or 'Silly Putty' and you can use it to perform various jobs: For sealing holes and leaks. For wrapping growths: cysts, metastases, polyps, meomas, etc.--this procedure ensures that they will not continue to grow until the next treatment. For sealing a channel, (an umbilical cord), between a client and another person, between whom ex ists a symbiotic, co-dependant connection. In a case that the client wishes to be free of such a connection, but finds it difficult because it is stronger than him, sealing the channel will weaken the longing for the connection. For treating bone fractures as a temporary 'glue' that helps in healing. For cushioning ulcers and internal wounds in the body, such as a stomach ulcer, colitis, etc. In order to use the positive plasma, rip a piece from the lump and the rest will disappear.
111
Positive Polarity and Negative Polarity by Archangel Raphael

Channeling August 2000 "In every man, there are two sparks, a Divine spark and a diabolic spark. It has been that way since the beginning of humanity. Adam and Eve in Paradise were the products of the Divine spark and had only it in them, but from the moment that they ate from the tree of knowledge, they received inside of them the diabolic spark. Eating the apple exposed them to knowing good and evil. It's a metaphor. Do you understand, Margalit?" Me: "I'm not sure." "The devil is an illusion, and like any illusion it can manifest as reality for the person who believes it exists." Me: "I understand. If I believe that something exists, then it exists, at least for me." "Exactly, Margalit. Humanity gives the devil the power of existence; therefore it exists for them. Let's go back to Adam and Eve. Ever since man has become aware of good and evil, he has two choices. Previously we said he only had the Divine spark, he was full of Light, the Light of the Creator. Now the seed of evil is in him. The darkness. Before that, he only had positive awareness, now he also has a negative one. These are the polarities, the positive polarity and the negative polarity. They exist inside of him, in his private world, and as a mirror image they exist in the world that surrounds him." Me: "So does the devil exist or not?" "He exists Margalit, but he will not exist for you, if you don't give him the power, if you don't manifest him in your way of thinking. The devil was created by the Creator, he is a son of God." Me: "I know that a light being is a being whose job is to help and spread the Light. So what is the devil? Is he a dark being?" "Margalit, the devil is made from the Light of the Creator. He is not a dark being, but he acts to block the way for the Light. He interferes with the Light. He manifests before humans as black for the purpose of identification--this is how he presents himself. In his role, he cannot present himself as white, or as an essence of light because by definition, his role is to block the Light and create darkness. Since he blocks the Light, it's as if he is opaque, not transparent, not passing the Light through himself, and therefore, he looks black to people. The same goes for all his emissaries." Me: "It looks to me that the devil received the worst role in the universe. It sounds like a punishment from Heaven. Does he suffer because of his role?" "No. He doesn't suffer because he has no reason to suffer. Men suffer because they need the Light. Without the Light, they are in pain; they feel bad, they are sick. The devil doesn't need the Light because he is made of Light. He is whole. He is complete." Me: "When a person is harming someone else, he has pangs of conscience. Does the devil suffer pangs of conscience because of all the evil that he causes in the world?" "Margalit, a conscience was given to man by the Creator as a tool that will mark his way; this tool shows him when he is not on the right path, when he is deviating from it. The devil has no conscience--so that he can fulfill his pre-destined role, therefore he has no pangs of conscience." Me: "I understand then, that the minions of darkness are all sons of God and are made from the Light of the Creator."
112
"Yes and no, Margalit. The devil is a son of God, but he has the creative power to make entities who will help him. These are derivatives of the devil and they are his creations. They are far from the influence of Light and are placed totally under the devil's control." Me: "Are bad people his servants?" "Some of them. These are people who have given themselves to evil, to the devil within them. They have chosen the negative polarity as a way of life. Some people are used as a vessel for the devil ever since they were born. The devil has incarnated dark beings in them in order to spread evil, destruction, and confusion among mankind. Just like God 'places' angels and light beings who incarnate as humans and arrive to help people, to show them the right path to the Light. These are spiritual teachers, healers." Me: "What happens when a man is a killer, a psychopath who has no conscience?" "This man has given himself entirely to the minions of darkness, and received the quality of the devil in his being. He doesn't suffer from his conscience just as the devil doesn't suffer from his." Me: "Raphael, what do you mean when you said the 'right path to the Light'?" "All men are drawn to the Light, they need it, it is necessary for them." Me: "So what is the problem?" "The problem is, Margalit, that the devil interferes. He makes things difficult, deceives, confuses, makes people deviate from the right path, and forget what their initial aim was, causing chaos." Me: "How does he do that?" "People give him the power. Remember the two sparks that are inside man? Those representing the two polarities? Well, in these the freedom of choice of man is made manifest. In every day, hour, and minute, a man should make a choice between the positive and the negative polarities within him, between the Divine spark and the diabolic spark, between good and evil. If he has chosen evil, at that instant the person allowed the devil to fill him from head to toe, wherein his divinity diminishes. If he has chosen good, he allows the Light of the Creator to fill him and the devil loses his grip on him." Me: "How does a man feel that?" "In essence, Light is love, joy, compassion, forgiveness, creativity, gratitude, tranquility, balance, acceptance, receptivity, giving, and more. Everything that makes a person feel good. Darkness feels as anger, guilt, hatred, envy, miserliness, criticism, passing judgment, fear, grudges, feeling hurt, misery, self-pity, and more. Everything that makes a person feel bad. "The Light means positive thinking, whereas darkness means negative thinking. "Positive thinking brings abundance, health, life. Negative thinking brings pain, illness, death." Me: "Thank you Raphael." "Thank you, Margalit."
113
Receiving Support from Groups of Angels

You are entitled to receive help from groups of angels whether you are a professional healer, or you treat only yourself, your family and friends. In this chapter I will give suggestions for work with several of these groups.
AHAVA Group The AHAVA group includes several angels, usually four, that function together in a telepathic connection with a common energetic code. You can receive assistance from the group for purposes of treatment, healing, counseling, study, and guidance. The AHAVA group is a term, and an essence. It's a super-family that is a store of angels that work in codes that are adjusted to people, and that can split into an infinite number of sub-groups. Each such sub-group is an AHAVA group by itself that serves one healer. In other words, every healer connects to his own AHAVA group, which is a derivative of the super group, forming part of it at all times. Call upon your guides and ask them if you can receive your own AHAVA group. You don't need a mediator to make contact with the group. You also don't need to ask or know their names. The application will be done in a general manner: "I apply to the AHAVA group," or, "I call to the AHAVA group." Etc. You may hear their answer arriving in the frequency of one common representative voice, or as a chorus of voices, depending on your needs.
How to Connect to the AHAVA Group Talk to them. Ask as many questions as you like. Find out how many angels are in your group. Ask if they will accompany you always. Get to know the ways in which they act. Ask them to touch you or reach out your palms to create a direct contact. Imagine that you join the group as part of a circle. Reach out your hands to the two angels on either side of you--you can feel how they connect to you. Use your imagination to feel how the circle sweeps you into a dance, around and around, or carries you high above. You will feel yourself in a meditative state within seconds. Relax, and be ready for whatever comes after that. Trust the AHAVA Group and open yourself to a magical, unexpected, and unique experience that is just for you.
How to Get Help from the AHAVA Group The group can treat you or other people according to your request. Since you are a part of the group, you must maintain an 'open line' throughout the entire treatment, keep updated at every stage, know what the group is doing and how it works, and cooperate according to the group's instructions. The group can arrive to your client's home for a house call as a continuation of the treatment. The group can give a 'love treatment' to you or other people according to your request. The group will give you information from the databases and answer your questions as fast as it can. The group can help you to meditate, guide you, and/or take you on 'travels'. The group can teach you new methods of treatment, or guide you regarding what you should do when you encounter a new case, or an unfamiliar problem. The group can serve as a mediator in channeling with very high light beings, whom you cannot connect with directly because their frequencies are too powerful.
114
HEIOT Group This is a group of angels whose work is to give information on any subject that you want to know regarding yourself or the person whom you are treating. You can apply to the HEIOT group questions like: What is the condition of his health? What are his problems? What bothers him? Why does he have his relationships the way he does? What is the cause of the problems? What can they tell you about the people around him? About his previous reincarnations? About blocks and stuck subjects in his life? What work should he do? What is his spiritual reparation? What does his future hold? You can ask the HEIOT group about the situation of the world, about evolutionary processes that are occurring in it, about international relationships, about the fate of earth. Actually they can answer any question.
NEHAMA Group This group consists of seven angels of very high level, and it is responsible for the peace of the soul. If you still cannot communicate with this group, use your AHAVA group as a mediator, as an inter-frequency transformer. NEHAMA group will help you in the following cases: They will let you know if your client suffers from harassment by the negative polarity, (see chapter Cosmic War). In such a case it will also take care of organizing the war, and freeing the person. It will let you know about the condition of the soul, (see chapter Wholeness Of the Soul). It will let you know if there is a need for soul redemption, (see chapter Soul Redemption).
Harassment and Taking Over by the Negative Polarity

The damage that the devil and his emissaries cause is great and can be expressed in different levels in a person, especially in the physical level, the emotional level, and the energetic-spiritual level. In some people who suffer from harassment and control by the negative polarity, the phenomena is partially expressed in a weak manner, whereas with others, it might be intensely expressed. It depends first and foremost on the person's personality, in his strength, in his mental structure on one hand, and in the intensity of the attack on the other hand. The length of time during which the person is under these attacks is also very significant. The longer the period, the weaker the person and the disease is exacerbated in response. One cannot ignore the repetitive pattern, showing that the harassment and control by the negative polarity may start exactly during a difficult time in a person's life, when he has gone through a trauma or some kind of abuse shifting him out of balance, leaving him exposed, vulnerable, weak, and emotionally disturbed. From my work with these clients, I have noticed another fact, the higher the soul is, the more the person will be exposed to a massive pressure from the negative polarity in an attempt to prevent him from reaching and fulfilling his higher calling. This harassment and controlling is difficult to identify because of the way the negative polarity settles in those places in the person that are weak and problematic to begin with, increasing the problems a thousand fold. For example: If a person has a natural tendency to moodiness, sadness, melancholy, the dark polarity will turn them into deep depression.
115
If a person has fears, the negative polarity will cause him deep anxieties, panic attacks, and phobias. if a person is physically weak, it will cause attacks of deep fatigue, fainting, tremors and more. Since the person's weak points are intensified, sometimes even after he is freed from the negative polarity, some of the symptoms may remain; however, they will be weakened, identifiable, and available for local treatment.
The Phenomenon The characteristic phenomena for people who are persecuted by negative polarity vary greatly: Sleeping problems--insomnia, frequent sudden awakenings during the night, (apparently without reason), nightmares and night terrors, hallucinations, encounters with various images and dark entities--demons, monsters, human-like creatures, 'the hag-rider' and more. Sometimes while he is falling asleep or during sleep, the person may experience sensations like entities who are pulling his arms and legs, levitation, (floating above the bed), and then a hard fall immediately after, or sinking 'into the mattress'. He may hear evil laughter, foul language, scratching on wood furniture, rolling and moving of objects. In very severe cases, the person is sure that tangible acts are done to him such as touching his body, stabs, cuts, and even rape. Fluctuation in the heart rate without any connection to whether he is active or resting. The person may suddenly feel an increase in his heart rate going sky-high, or suddenly drops tremendously. Fluctuation in blood pressure--extreme changes in either way without any apparent reason, suffocating shortness of breath, pressure in the chest, pressure around the heart, dizziness, loss of equilibrium, pains in different areas of the body (that may change places), weakness, feeling faint, loss of consciousness, tremors all over the body, increased sweating, or a flood of cold sweat, nervousness, general lack of energy, chronic fatigue, complete exhaustion, weakening of the immune system that brings about the development of various diseases. Sometimes the person may feel that he is locked in a glass cell or in a bubble--noises and voices from people around him sound to him as if they were far away. For women--irregularity and abnormalities in the menstrual period, sometimes bleeding that lasts for many months. Having fears, panic attacks, paranoia, feeling a presence in the room, seeing entities that are present in the room, hearing voices that are talking to him, (channeling with negative entities). Often the voices will tell him that he is bad, insignificant, a nobody, etc. They may also order him to hurt himself, commit suicide, and in extreme cases to commit murder. A general feeling of losing control of one's life, feeling stuck, losing a job, difficulties in daily activities. Various negative events may happen to the person and he, (sometimes his family as well) may be badly hurt. Not every person who is being persecuted by the negative polarity experiences the entire array of the phenomena, but even if he only suffers from a some of them or a number of them -- the suffering is too great to bear.
What Happens to Such a Person? A person who suffers from harassment or who is being controlled by the negative polarity tries to get help from any possible direction that is offered to him. First the general practitioner will send him for different tests according to the symptoms that he complains about. Often there will be no finding, or on the
116
contrary he will receive oodles of explanations or attempts to alleviate his condition, but no treatment will give him help or any cure. Months and years pass, his condition deteriorates and the phenomena get worse. He turns away from the work cycle, his social life, from life itself. Sometimes he stops leaving his house, sometimes he finds it difficult to get out of bed for days and weeks, and he becomes dependent on his family. With no cure he becomes depressed. He feels that the people around him don't believe him. He is labeled a hypochondriac, he's told that everything is psychosomatic, and he's sent to a psychologist or a psychiatrist. There he encounters another disappointment --very quickly he learns that there are things he shouldn't talk about because this specific institution doesn't consider his spiritual level. At best he receives medication. In some occasions he's being committed to a mental asylum and receives medications. In most difficult cases, no real cure is achieved and such a person --if he hasn't lost his mind so far will probably lose it soon.
How Can You Help? There is an unbearable ease in which you can help such a person. When such a person calls you, (or someone calls on his behalf), for help, you can feel right at the beginning of the telephone conversation that you are being energetically attacked. You might feel pressure, dizziness, and difficulties in breathing. The dark entities are turning against you to attack you. They can't harm you but they are trying to scare you so that you don't take this case. In such a case, call upon your guides and or the AHAVA group and ask them to take care of the situation. Breathe deep several times and wait calmly, after twenty or thirty seconds its all over. Within a short period of time you will become stronger, and such attacks will lose their effect on you. It's a matter of being immunized. You have the right to refuse to receive the client. If you reject him, no one will be angry with you, neither in heaven nor on earth. But if you decide to accept and treat him, both you and your family will receive strong and high protection from above, and you will probably gain a few credit points for your record. Assuming that the client has gone through all the tests and treatments that conventional medicine offered him, with no results All you should and can do as a spiritual healer is to call upon a Cosmic War for this suffering person. First, you can call upon the NEHAMA group directly or through your AHAVA group and make sure that indeed this is a case of harassment or being controlled by the negative polarity. Sec ond, you ask the NEHAMA group to organize a Cosmic War to release the client. And that is all! As the Cosmic War goes on its way, you can command your Crown to give the client all the treatments that it is programmed to give, while you are free to converse with the client. Encourage him to tell you all his ailments. Show him that he can talk with you on any subject, that you know and understand what he is talking about. Its most important on the immediate level, to alleviate his anxiety, give him the sensation that he has arrived at the right place, that he can trust you, and the treatment that you offer him. If hes still reluctant and afraid to open his heart, use the list of symptoms. Ask him which of the phenomena is bothering him, and to what extent. Explain to him what is standing behind this matter, it is important that he knows it. Explain to him what you are doing for him, what the heavens are doing for him. Tell him about the Cosmic War that will free him from the grasp of the negative polarity.
117
If the client is very young, or very anxious, tone down your explanation. Give him a mellower careful version of the situation, but dont omit it altogether. Its important for the continuing treatment in the near future.
What is a Cosmic War? The NEHAMA group recruits as many angels as necessary. Their number is set according to the amount of harassment and control. These light beings are going to war against the dark entities. The goal is to clean the space of the client from any presence of negative entities, and keep them away from him. Such a war can last two hours or two days depending on the gravity of the situation. The dark entities are not willing to give up their prey that easily, but on the other hand they stand no chance against the light beings. Its only a matter of time before they let go. Sometimes during the war you may lose your telepathic contact with your guides, or just hear them very faintly as though through a screen. This phenomenon will disappear with time as you become stronger. After the goal has been achieved, the NEHAMA group will appoint guarding angels who will stay with the client as long as necessary, sometimes even for years. Their job is to keep his space clean and prevent any negative entity from coming through to get close to him. In cases of a repetitive interest in the client on the behalf of the negative polarity, the guarding angels will inform their superior and they will banish the intruders
The Vacuum Phenomenon It may be that a certain client has suffered so long from the harassment and control of the negative polarity that his spirit is broken, he lost faith or became used to the idea that he will remain ill forever and he has no hope. All his system is set on a condition of disease, defense, shutting himself away, and a constant waiting for the next blow to strike. He is emerging from a very traumatic illness that has farfetched consequences, which leaves him with scars and wounds for the rest of his life. Even if his surroundings are clean from any ne gative presence, and you repeat and promise him that this is indeed the situation, he continues to act as a sick person. It is hard for him to accept that from now on he is free. He keeps waiting for the phenomena to come back at any moment. What is this similar to? To a man who is used to walk every day for years down the same street and whenever he passes the garden of a certain house a dog jumps and barks at him loudly. Even though the dog is locked behind a fence, it is threatening and terrifying. The person finds himself drawing back going away, and taking a detour. One day the dog is taken away. Even though the person knows that the dog is gone, he is still alert when he gets closer to that place, expecting the harassment and barking to happen again. This is a reflex. It will take him a long time to loosen up, accept the fact that the dog is gone and he can relax. Maybe a certain client has developed a dependant personality, or he is used to being taken care of, receiving endless attention from his fam ily and surroundings. He has much to lose if he recovers. In which case, he will invent some phenomena in order to fix the disease condition and extend it. One way or another the client needs time to adjust and heal. He needs time to realize that his energetic space is clean, that he is no longer under attacks or harassments. Your job at this time is to strengthen him and keep telling him over and over that everything has passed. Check again also with the AHAVA and NEHAMA groups that this is indeed the situation. Another job that you have as a spiritual healer is to teach the client positive thinking, positive behavior. Connect him to the Light, to the Creator. Show him how God is on his side. Explain to him that he cannot afford to have negative thought patterns. His negativity can magnetize dark entities to him again, and the
118
condition can repeat itself. Explain to him that the control and the decision are in his hands. His choice. From now on the client should take responsibility for himself and his life.
Collaboration with the Conventional Institution I believe in combining disciplines. In the all-embracing integration. In a collaboration between a conventional therapist and a spiritual healer. Its a necessity in our reality. Some mental diseases are actually spiritual diseases. Its about time that the rigid institutions will open themselves to learn about the possibilities of spiritual healing. In no way do I negate the fact that mental illnesses and various personality disorders do exist I claim that any mind/body disease has a spiritual explanation, has a spiritual facet that doesnt contradict but compliments the conventional counterpart. It is important at this stage to get psychological help, which will neutralize the diseased personality and will help the client to build a new framework and structure to strengthen his self-esteem and prepare him for the return to normal life. Now that the black cloud has been removed, all the weaknesses on which the negative polarity focused on, and intensified, can be revealed. Now you can treat them with no interruptions, and it is assured that the results will be completely different. Heres a case study given by the client herself: (Taken from a thank -you letter).
A journey from darkness to light, 31 December 2000. My name is Michelle Cohn. In 1990 there had been a turn in my health and daily functioning. One summer night, in a late hour, I went to take a shower. Suddenly I collapsed to the floor, and after a few minutes I woke up covered in sweat , my body was trembling, I felt weak and was unable to move. Since then I had no rest, neither day nor night. I suffered from tremors in my legs that went up to my stomach and got caught in my chest. I couldnt breathe, my hands wouldnt function, I felt dizzy, had difficulties in speech, and sometimes I fainted. I stopped functioning. My general practitioner had never heard of such a case before. I was sent to see a psychologist. He didnt know what medication to give me, and the entire condition became worse. I stopped working, I stopped painting, I stopped all activity. My son who is now six was born. I was afraid to get pregnant again. My family life collapsed. There was lots of stress and no way out. My mother tried to help. She went from a rabbi to a kabala healer and hypno-therapists, but nothing helped. My mother accumulated debts and my condition grew worse. I couldnt function; I couldnt take care of my child or the house. I couldnt use the elevator. I didnt go out; I shut myself in the house. Until one day it happened, that is the story that saved my life. An angel called Margalit saved me. One night I had a dream of a woman, (in reality she looked the same to me) surrounded by light. I sensed that she was the one who was going to help me. The next day I told my mother about it. After a long search I got Margalits phone number. I called her, and during the conversation I suddenly felt an immense relief, something strange was happening in my body. No tremors, no suffocation, and no losing my senses. While we were talking, Margalit found out what the problem was. We set up a meeting. It was incredible. She looked just like the woman I had dreamt about. Within minutes I felt a great release. Margalit started treating me. She sent angels to purify my house. There was a tremendous war. Margalit told me of the problem. She called them the dark ones; in the kabala they are called evil spirits. It is a very bad thing, but thanks to the angel Margalit, I returned to life, got back to laughing, went back to painting, functioned as a woman, took care of my family, got out of the house, came back to life. Now Im so happy that I am pregnant again. Light and happiness came back into my home thanks to Margalit. Thank you very much, with warm regards and light, the Cohn family.
119
Part Three: The Real Healing
Energetic Blocks
What is an Energetic Block?
If we assume that in a healthy body, a correct flow of energy occurs, we can conclude that a block in the energetic flow will cause a disease or a problem one way or another. The energetic flow occurs in flow channels called meridians. The whole meridian system includes a central structure, a secondary structure, and a minor structure of channels whose role is to transport a supply of energy to every area and every organ in the body. Similar to the blood system, which is also branched and complex, (arteries, veins, capillaries), and its job is to transfer blood supply to every area and every organ in the body. Just as a block in blood vessels can interfere with smooth passage of the blood, so a block in the meridian may interfere with the smooth passage of the energy flow. An organ or an area of the body that has a blocked energetic flow, falls into an energetic deficit and loses its natural ability to heal itself, and function in a balanced manner. If the block is not taken care of and removed in a timely manner, a problem might form in that area, becoming more severe, turning into a disease, pain and/or have some lack of function. Therefore it is very important to include the removal of blocks from the system as an integral part of the healing treatment.
How are Blocks Formed? An energetic block is a product of a negative experience that a person has hadwhether the experience occurred on the physical level, emotional, cognitive, or energetic. Every negative event creates negative energy, which is labeled and trapped in that persons light body. By examining the light body, the healer can discover what negative experiences the client has had; their severity and how they still affect him, in the present. Just like a meteorological map indicates climatic changes. These are some of the factors that cause blocks: an injury, a hit, a fall, a fracture, an accident, a surgery, physical abuse, mental injuries, fears and anxieties, angers, grudges, inner conflicts, emotional distress, stress and mental pressures, worry, misery, depression, self-pity, desperation, criticism, being judgmental, envy, hate, self-rejection, self-destruction, self-hurt.
What Do the Blocks Look Like? A block is a condensation of black and or negative energy into a dense energetic form. The size of the block, its shape and its location in the body are usually an individual matter, a consequence of the inner materials that create the internal world in every person. The more traumatic the event, the bigger and more massive the block. Different blocks are characterized by different shapes: a grey or black cloud, (looks like smog), bubbles that cluster in groups, large or small black stains, dark lumps, dark dots, as well as more formed structures that look like nails, spikes, hooks, springs, etc. (See chapter 'Junk'.)
120
Other kinds of blocks are demons, spiritual possession, implants placed by bad extraterrestrials, (see corresponding chapters). Traumas, meaning blocks caused by traumas, will usually localize in an associative accord with the cause that created them. For example, a woman who suffered from sexual abuse as a child may suffer from a block in her genitals. A person who broke a leg may suffer from pain long after the fracture has healed because the trauma is still there, and so on Sometimes a person punishes and hurts himself. Many times I find self-manufactured energetic knives, spikes, or nails stuck in different places in the body. Releasing them requires questioning and performing self-awareness work by the client. The person, who according to his own mind has done an unforgivable act, may punish himself according to the act that he did. I have already seen hands covered with black gloves reaching to the elbows, which are expressed as having needles and pins in the hands, a pricking feeling, pains, and difficulties in functioning. Hard emotional injuries often look like a coil made of fishing line or metal wire that surrounds the heart requiring gentle untangling. Frequently, Ive also found a hook stuck in the heart as well. Releasing it requires skill and attention. Angers may cluster in the stomach as a colony of bubbles with grey smoke inside them. Angers and stress may form a concrete board' that is placed on the chest, pressing down, causing difficulty in breathing and chest pains. Blocks and traumas have their own logic; sometimes they locate according to a deep inner unconscious decision of the client. Be prepared for all the possibilities and dont be surprised to find a block in the clients toe that represents the spanking on the backside that he received from his father forty years ago. Case studies: Nora, a forty-five year old woman, complained of a mysterious pain in the back of her right hand. In her words, there is no reason for this pain, she didnt recall receiving a blow or twisting her hand, still the pain went on for more than two years. An x-ray showed nothing. A mystery. After questioning the guides, I discovered that there was a block in the hand as a consequence of a childhood trauma. We started the process of removing the blocks and after a few minutes, Nora suddenly remembered and cried out: I cant believe it. I remember something I havent thought about for almost forty years. As a child, Nora learned to play the piano with a teacher that had used a very educational method. Every time that Nora made a mistake playing, the teacher would slam the piano cover on her hand. It was interesting that the pain came out after so many years just at the time Noras daughter started learning to play. Alls well that ends well. The repressed memory came out while removing the blocks from the hand and the pain disappeared. The next case is even stranger. Ive chosen to bring it here because it teaches a lot about blocks and traumas: Naomi, a woman of thirty-five, complained of extreme pains in her left shoulder. She claimed that she had tried everything both conventional and alternative treatments, and except for temporary relief, there was no solution. I treated the shoulder the best I could, I invoked for the treatment the group of extraterrestrials who helped me, but nothing seemed to happen. Still Naomi returned for a second treatment. Then in the midst of the treatment, she murmured something that caught my attention: I dont understand why my left shoulder hurts so badly, when its actually my right one that has been through so much, doesnt hurt at all. When I asked her what she meant, she stated that three years ago she had a car accident. She suffered from a fracture in her right shoulder that required complicated surgery and long rehabilitation. That shoulder healed well and didnt hurt at all. Go figure, even shoulders have a sisterhood. The left shoulder took upon itself the trauma of the right shoulder. Removing the trauma from the left shoulder released the pain and the mystery was solved.
121
Removing Blocks The blocks in the persons body want to be discovered and leave. 1. Some of them are dormant, static, or act on such repressed levels that the person is not aware of their presence, or the connection between them and different symptoms from which he suffers, (anxiety, lack of balance, having slight pains, weakening of the immune system). Some of the blocks are more active and will do anything to attract the persons attention in order to make him do a work of self-discovery and solve problems within himself, (stress, pain, pressure). Some of the blocks have already started making an exit for themselves, a way of escaping and discharging, (disease, seizures, total collapse).
2.
3.
Imagine the following situation: a jailhouse full of prisoners all of whom have life sentences. They live in this place but they always miss the outer world, freedom, fresh air, and the sun. This longing is active at all times, sometimes for many years, as an underground current that is bubbling and looking to be released. One day a rumor passes among the prisoners: in section B, in the eastern wall somebody managed to dig a hole to the outside. Imagine what will happen now: hundreds of prisoners will hurry to that direction, pushing and shoving, with the intent to leave jail. The load on the exit hole is big, and sometimes it breaks and grows larger because of the pressure. Sometimes a fat prisoner gets stuck in the opening and needs help to escape. Do you get the picture? As a healer you should perform several roles in the process: You are the one who breaks the exit open. You are the one who spr eads the rumor and lets the prisoners know about the chance for freedom. You are the one who supervises the order and discipline, organizing an orderly passage. You are the one who helps to release the fat prisoner to get through. You are the one who will inform and explain to the authorities about the prisoners flight to freedom. Pay attention: The occupation of the psychologist includes verbal treatment that allows the client to bring up repressed traumas so that he can consciously deal with them and break free. You as the spiritual healer start at the other endyou release the blocks found in the body, causing the release of the memory of the traumatic event that started it.
The Process of Removing Blocks Here is the order of the procedure of removing blocks. You can perform all of them or some of them according to your choice and the needs of the client. I Guide the client through breathing, relaxing, and letting go. Put him in a meditative state, (see chapter Meditative States). Enter the clients head, invite all the negative thoughts that are responsible for creating his energetic blocks, and release them into the black hole. Inform his system about starting a process to release the blocks: I call upon Johns body and announce the beginning of the process of releasing blocks and traumas. I order all the blocks and traumas of all kinds to come up to the surface and prepare to leave.
II
Since the application is done on the clients subconscious, it activates the process immediately. The entire system goes into a treatment situation of cooperation for its healing. The clients system will decide on its own, according to its own order and logic, which trauma or block should be released first. Unless you decide on the priority according to your choice: if you ask the clients subconscious to first let go of blocks that are related to a specific theme: angers, fears, pains, or a disease that he has, and so on.
122
Inform your client that the process has begun. Ask him to pay attention to the processes and the changes in his body. Especially if in some place in the body there is a new occurrence such as pressure, aches, nausea, prickling sensations, or anything similar. III When a block starts to float to the surface, it carries with it physical and emotional sensations which intensify. If the block is very big, the process can be difficult and sometimes very unpleasant for the client. You can help alleviate the clients distress by various means: Invite relaxing, calming, anesthetizing lights, ask them to go into the blocked area and do the work. Place your hands above the blocked area; use them as a magnet. Magnetize and draw out the block in a specific direction. Lead the block towards an exitthrough the body wall, or one of the nearby chakras, or let it 'be born' and carried up the throat and out through the mouth. In any case, consider the tendency and choice of the block itself; let it leave in any manner it chooses. Use Cosmic Tools--invite huge spirals to draw the block and pull it outside. Connect the block with threads into the black hole and request the black hole to pull it. Draw a golden line from your Crown into the block and ask your Crown to pull it out, and so on. Be creative. Guide the client to express releas ing sentences aloud or silently: "I release my trauma, I ask that you leave my body. I dont need you any more. I dont want you." etc. he can use any idea to express his choice in releasing the block. These declarations accelerate and advance the block on its way out by expressing a standpoint and the choice of the client. You can telepathically apply to the block and order it to get out and leave. When the pressure, the pain, or the suffocation of the client greatly increases, guide him to breathe into the block and imagine that he exhales it out. If you and the client choose to bring up to the consciousness the repressed memory of the traumatic event, this is the time to do so--when the block is ready to be released. Guide the client to close his eyes and free his head from thoughts. Count for him, 1, 2, 3 and the first thought that will come out is the one related to the block. It can be a memory, an image of someone, an idea, or even a fragment of thought that at first sight may look incidental and unrelated, but they are the clues that will lead to the understanding of the event. Releasing a trauma is like giving birth; it increases toward the peak moment and then comes the discharge and release. At some point, the client may start crying, tremble, feel weak, etc. You can calm him with relaxing light. Offer him some water, and balance him energetically. If there is an energetic wound left, recharge healing, disinfecting lights into it to heal it. Once one block leaves, the second block will start coming up. They always wait in an orderly fashion for their removal, one by one. If the client is tired, its best to postpone the continuation of the process to the next meeting. To stop more blocks from coming up, enter the clients head again and tell the body: "This ends the process of block removal for today. Please do not send more blocks to the surface." To avoid a hole in the aura and an energetic leak, finish by inviting a brown light, ask it to locate and seal energetic leaks.
1. 2.
3.
4.
5. 6. 7.
8.
9.
10. 11.
Pay attention: I am often being asked, what should be done with the blocks that have left the body? Is there a danger that they will stick to the healer or to another person nearby? The answer is clearthe client is the spiritual father of the block. He created it, gave it meaning and existence. Once it has been released, the block has no right to exist any more, nor does it have any more meaning, it will dissipate and disappear on its own.
Block Dispersal Block dispersal is different from the process of block removal in that you only cause their breakage and dispersal inside the body, instead of removing them altogether. You might decide to use this technique in cases where the client finds it hard to release the block, and/or there is a need for immediate relief.
123
Without self-work from the client, which means taking responsibility, developing awareness, and changing thought patterns, after a while a broken down block may regenerate. 1. 2. Ask for the help of a Divine entity or the highest guidance that you can receive. Request that they connect to you for flowing of Pure Divine Light. Place your hands on the client's head and flow the energy in a bombarding manner. (See chapter Techniques For Flowing EnergyBombarding). Declare silently: I flow a Pure Divine Light at an increased intensity so that it will break blocks. I command Johns blocks to melt down, and wash out. Some of the blocks may escape from the intense concentrated energy. Invite apples, (see chapter Cosmic Tool--Apples). Invite atomic apples, which are stronger than regular apples. Use pricking needles to burst blocks that look like bubbles. Use attacking lights in direct recharging into the block. Activate your wand to extend the meridians, (see chapter The Wand).
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
An 'Open' Process In some cases, after the end of the treatment session, the client is still highly blocked in spite of all the work that has been done so far. You have a gut feeling that this client will need many treatments in order to bring him to an acceptable level of cleanliness. You might consider continuing the treatment by releasing the blocks from a distance. Undoubtedly this way will save your client a lot of time and effort but will do no good in what concerns his awareness and taking responsibility for his condition. All you have to do is to avoid ending the process and leave it running. It means that at the end of the treatment, you tell the clients subconscious to go on and bring up all kinds of blocks throughout the week, then send the client on his way. In such a process, dozens and even hundreds of different blocks will be released in the week to come. The drawback is that your client may end up in situations that he cannot deal with by himself: a block that has become stuck neither going out nor staying in, (remember the fat prisoner stuck in the hole?) may cause pain and discomfort. Such accelerated process of cleansing can bring the client to a condition of exhaustion, nausea, vomiting, insomnia, moodiness, having strange dreams, and so on. It all depends on the types of blocks being removed. Share with the client, let him decide and choose if he wants to have an open process. If so, allow him to call you at any time through the week so that you may help from a distance and get him out of difficult situations where he became stuck, cheer him up, and strengthen him. Call upon your AHAVA group and request continuation of the treatment in the clients home. They will accompany him throughout the week, keep an eye open for the events, and take an active part in it, especially at night during sleep. In an extreme case, if the process is too difficult for the client, you can immediately stop it from a distance.
A Quick Process for Removing Blocks This process for removing blocks is quick and very effective. Within one session of treatment, you can release thousands of different blocks. However, take into consideration that this work also bypasses conscious work. Use the palms of your hands as powerful magnets. Know that you have the ability to magnetize with them. Draw out as many blocks as you want, they cannot resist the attraction or your will power, unless the client himself is resistant and won't let go. Enter the client's head and invite all the thoughts that are responsible for creating his energetic blocks, traumas, painful memories, hurts, angers, fears, etc. Release them into the black hole. Place in the
124
client's mind a counteracting positive thought pattern whose main idea is agreeing to release blocks, and give notice on a procedure of removing blocks with a fast process. Request that his subconscious send blocks of all kinds up to the surface. Now there is a need to open ways for the blocks to leave, (the hole in the prison wall). Place your hands above the client's head, magnetize and draw out with precise vigorous drawing motionsthree times. Imagine that his aura 'sticks' to your hands like gum, you are pulling and creating a hole in it. See in your imagination how the blocks are rapidly flowing and flying out through the exit that you have created. They might look to you as a grayish flow of smoke, with spots and shapes in it. Continue and make more holes in the aura in the same manner of three pulling motions with strong magnetizing in the next areas: nape, upper back, middle back, lower back, throat, shoulders, chest, heart, solar plexus, midriff, lower abdomen, the joints of the hands, knees, feet. From each such exit, blocks and other 'dirt' that the client wishes and is ready to get rid of will break through and flow out. The treatment is extremely powerful. Throughout it, the client might feel dizziness, but also relief and release. It's best not to stop the process midpoint. Once it's started, allow it to complete itself and reach a natural end. The inner system of the client will regulate itself. Close to the end, you can see a gradual weakening of the flow until it stops. It is recommended that you finish with recharging of Pure Divine Light and allow the Light to replace the dark places that the blocks had occupied.
Drawing Out 'Junk' 'Junk' is a representative of self-manufactured inner blocks. It may look to us as a variety of objects: metal plates, knitting needles, wires, coils, springs, nails, spikes, hooks, screws, etc., (hereby the name). The junk may be present in any possible place in the body, in large stores or single objects, and cause much pain and suffering. You can see them with 'x-ray' vision, or by 'surgery' that you perform in the painful area of the client. In any case, the area shoul d be cleaned of all the junk; they should be removed outside with various ways and means. Cleansing may bring about instant relief. For example: the client is complaining about pains in the shin. Perform a 'cut', at knee level. Imagine that you are peaking from above into the inside of the leg, and look inside to see what's in there. Let the images rise in your mind, see the different junk and start removing them.
How Will You Get Rid of the Junk? 1. 2. 3. 4. Magnetize with your hands and draw the junk out through the cut. Request that your 'Crown' send branches into the organs and remove the junk from there. Imagine that you miniaturize very large junk pieces; when they become small, magnetize them with your hands. Curled junk, springs and hooks, should be straightened and smoothed before you pull them out, otherwise an energetic injury might be caused.
If the area is filled with 'junk', and you're tired of removing them one by one, use Cosmic Tools.
125
Tubes Imagine that you create a tube a foot and a half long, with the diameter according to the need. Insert it into the client's body. Command the tube to draw out the 'junk'. It will do it. You can sit and watch as the 'junk' is expelled from the other side. To increase the influence of the work, imagine that you create a large number of the tubes, five hundred, or even a thousand. Insert them in any possible place in the body; command them all to draw out the 'junk'. You can also command them to increase the suction a thousand fold. It is an extremely powerful process. Magnets The magnets look like spirals or disks, and they are very powerful. You can invite a large number of magnets, five hundred to a thousand, and place them in front of aching areas, or generally around the body. They will magnetize junk to themselves, when they are loaded they leave. If after all these procedures there is still 'junk' stuck in the client's body it means that the client needs a direct treatment to the area and the problem. In this case, go back to magnetizing with your hands as in block removal. Guide your client to say releasing phrases. You might need to enter the client's head and release the thoughts that are responsible for creating the 'junk'. Then place a new thought pattern in his mind that means creating resistance and pushing out all that is found inside his body which shouldn't be there. In other cases, you can always 'insert' your hand inside the body and draw out the clutter stuck in there. Be creative, use your imagination, and your will power. Invent new tools.
About Twin, Sister, And Identical Souls

Twin Souls Twin souls are souls that were formed in the same creation group, at the same time. If, for example, in one creation, a thousand souls were formed, then they are all twins. Beyond that, they have nothing in common. Also, it doesn't mean that they will reincarnate together to the same place on earth at the same time. On the contrary, they disperse in various places, not only on earth, but in parallel universes and on different planets. Some can also be found in a phase in between reincarnations. Normally, there is a low probability that twin souls will meet throughout their lives. Channelers have an option to create a telepathic contact with a twin soul even if it exists in a different time dimension or a different planet. (Though this is more complex and done through an 'operator'). In general, twin souls are not supposed to meet like sister souls do. People mistakenly call someone my twin soul when they actually mean a sister soul.
Sister Souls Sister souls belong to the same group of souls. They reincarnate together to allow learning and mutual support, and also study together between reincarnations. A soul group may count between ten and twenty-five sister souls. They plan ahead of time before birth, to meet during the life incarnation in order to help each other to do 'work', spiritual reparation, closing karmatic issues, learning and experiences.
126
Identical (Complementary) Souls A high soul, one that reaches a high degree of evolvement, like light beings at high levels and angels, can split into a hundred, or a thousand parts, (depending on its level). That is, all the parts are a piece of the same soulthese are identical or complementary souls. In this manner, an angel can serve more people. For example, archangels such as Michael, Raphael, and Gabriel can be in a large number of places at the same time, communicate, guide, and treat different people. It is made possible because of the splitting process. It is not one angel that runs around from place to place but a groupthe Michael group, the Raphael group, the Gabriel group. A similar thing, though at a much lower scale happens when a soul of a high level guide, or the soul of an angel voluntarily reincarnates to live on earth. This happens frequently in our age, (indigo children, crystal children). Such a soul can split into several manifestations. Usually, most parts are concentrated in one person in order to give him the most strength and support to deal with life. Still, there might be splits that live in parallel or that are found in between reincarnations, and they can be called upon for help when needed. Not every person has identical/complementary souls. A split could start happening in high souls in their last reincarnation or towards the end of their reincarnation cycle. A spiritual healer might summon his own identical/complementary souls to assist him in his work. They will probably have knowledge and ability to heal. He can also summon the identical/complement ary souls that have ended their role in life, that is they have passed away and gone to heaven, to come and enter his body. By that, he intensifies his soul, assimilates complementary information, and increases his healing ability. In a person who still hasn't matured into his high calling, there is no need for such a union. A healer may choose not to perform the union with his identical/complementary souls but only to call them for help. In which case they will stay around him as extra guides.
Unwanted Influences between Complementary Souls When a split occurs in a high soul, each person is born separately. The longing for the other twin souls start to take effect, especially in times of hardship or need. The person may then 'grow' channels, send them towards his complementary souls, and connect to them. However, if one of them has a problem, whether physical, emotional, or other, there is an induction from one to the other, which is unwanted. These channels should be disconnected.
How to Disconnect these Channels 1. Check and locate channels that are going out from you towards your complementary souls. If you need help in this matter, apply to your guides, your 'Crown', or the NEHAMA group. They know and will give you exact information about the number of channels, their location in your body, etc. At this opportunity, checks if these are also your problematic areas. If you wish, you can create a telepathic connection with each one of your complementary souls and talk to them. Get to know them, who are they? Where do they live? What is their main occupation? And the most important - what problems do they have? Compare if there is a correlation to your problems. Disconnect the channels close to your body. If you don't know their location, ask the 'Crown' to disconnect them, or declare: "I disconnect the channels." This should do the work. Surround yourself with a 'shell'. Declare: "I invite a shell that will surround me and prevent a reconnection of the channels." The shell will prevent your complementary souls from connecting to you but will not prevent you from reconnecting to them.
2.
3. 4.
127
Case study: Shelly, a thirty-eight year old woman, complained about headaches. She claimed that she suffered from them for years, and always at the same spotat the right side of her head, from the temple to the top of the ear. When I looked at her aura, indeed I saw in that place a dark spot three inches wide. The treatment: I treated Shelly, I cleaned, flowed energies by different techniques, removed blocks and more. Her entire system reacted except for that place. The spot stayed as if it had a life of its own and had no connection to her. The guides came to help and suggested that I check Shelly's complementary souls. It was the first time that I had heard of such a phenomenon, I marveled at it and it made me curious. I checked and I saw a channel going out from her head in that area. I called: "I ask of Shelly's complementary souls to contact me and answer me." Within a few seconds, a contact was made. I heard a polite voice of a man. He was speaking English. After a short conversation, it turned out that he was British and lived in a London suburb. He presented himself as Peter, and to my questions said that he was a pharmacist. I told him about my client, who was his complementary soul who suffered from a nagging headache that didn't respond to any healing treatment. Peter confirmed that he suffered from migraines as well. Now comes the amazing part of the story. Out of curiosity, I asked him, in his opinion, what should I do? He guided me: disconnect the channel between us. I did as he advised. I disconnected the channel close to Shelly's head, and something surprising happenedthe black spot at the side of her head floated away on its own, disconnected from her head and flew up until it vanished from sight. At that same instant, without being aware of what was going on around her, Shelly said enthusiastically: "Something just happened now. I felt that something that was pressing on the side of my head all that time, disconnected from me." The pressure was removed, and her headache vanished within minutes.
The Wand
Congratulations, you are about to receive another gift from the heavens--a wand. This is a Cosmic tool that will help you in many areas and make the treating and healing work that you do much easier. In many aspects you might feel like a magician or an orchestra conductor--you wave the wand, things happen, and are done for you. You can see the wand in a supersensory vision, or feel it energetically. It is always found next to your dominant hand, as if floating in the air, available for you and following you everywhere. Once you need it, reach out your hand and 'grab it'--it will locate in your palm. The minute you no longer need it, it leaves your palm and stays floating by it until the next time. First, try to receive an image of the wand, if you think of a golden scepter about ten inches long with a pointed end that emits sparks of light that is exactly its design. If you imagine it as a silver baton, fifteen inches long with a ball at its end, that will be your wand. Just like the Crown and the gloves, every healer receives a wand in a slightly different design, fitting his needs, and his personality. The wand recharges automatically from the Universe with all the necessary energies before the beginning of the treatment and during it. It is always ready for work. Since it is tuned to your thought frequency, it is telepathically connected to you, therefore it is updated in a second or two with the relevant information on the treatment you are about to perform. You can also communicate with it in any situation; give it orders; ask for updates, etc.
128
The Wand as a Diagnosing Tool 1. Stand next to the client and pass the wand back and forth along his body, as you point to him and stay close to him at all times, (like a metal detector). Move very slowly and notice the feeling that the wand transfers to your palm. Every time you point to a body part that has a problem, a damage, an illness, or a block, the wand will signal you in an energetic frequency that feels like a buzz in your palm, a vibration, or a gentle yet very clear electric current. When you feel it stop, ask him if he has a problem in that area, aches, difficulties? If the direction is too general, (stomach, chest, throat, leg), and you wish to be more specific, ask your wand in a telepathic manner: "My wand, where exactly is the problem?"
The wand will give precise answers: "In the left ovary," or "In the left wall of the stomach," or "In the esophagus," or "Two inches above the knee". Take into consideration that the wand can diagnose very old injuries or illnesses, which the client might have forgotten about, (pneumonia that he had thirty years ago, a fracture in the leg from ten years ago, and so on). On the other hand, this sensitivity allows the wand to discover future problems even before they happen, and therefore the client is not aware of them yet. Therefore, be cautious with the information you give the client. 2. You don't have to hold the wand in your hand at all times. Let it float in the air and ask it to perform a diagnosis for you on the client then inform you on its findings. Maintain a telepathic contact with it from the moment it starts until the time it finishes. In the same way you can send your wand to a distant client.
3.
Using the Wand to Extend Meridians You should first try the next procedure on yourself. 1. The wand can act as a thin flexible wire, which upon your request, will penet rate through one of the chakras into the meridian system, go quickly around inside the flow channels, and extend them--this will allow a more vigorous energetic flow. You can feel its motion inside of you and follow it. This process may end in two to three minutes depending on the condition of your blocks.
If during its travels, the wand encounters a serious block, it may turn around and leave, since its job is not to handle it. Therefore, it's advisable to ask it to inform you every time it finds a block. Ask where it is stuck, and send apples, (or atomic apples) to break down the block. Once the block has been broken down, the wand will keep on going through the body. Ask it to let you know when it encounters another block and when it finishes its work. If, due to a block, the wand becomes stuck in a meridian, and you forget to treat it, it will wait there for a couple of minutes, and then, for lack of treatment the wand will leave the body. This procedure is very important in the healing process since the intensity of the flow increases after extending the meridians and allows escalating the entire work. Try and invite a treatment for yourself with the Divine Lights and see how much more effective the treatment is, compared to when your meridians were narrow and blocked. In conclusion, in order to activate the wand, for the purpose of extending the meridians, tell it: "My wand, I request that you transform to become a flexible wire, go into my meridian system, move inside my flow
129
channels and extend them. Inform me every time you encounter a block. Also let me know when the work is done." 2. You can improve the process. Tell your wand to order apples, by itself, for breaking down blocks when it encounters them. In this way you free yourself from this task. Tell it: "My wand, I request that you transform to become a flexible wire, go into John's meridian system, move inside his flow channels and extend them. Every time you encounter a block, invite five atomic apples to break it down. Also, let me know when the work is done."
Other Functions of the Wand 1. Opening major blocks. If you know the location of the block, hold the wand and touch the place. In this short time, the wand recharges with universal energies. On a count of three, the wand will send the energies in such speed and intensity that they will bombard the block. Treatment for relieving painssee section 1. above. Patching a hole in an aura. Opening a client's third eye by touching the area of the third eye with the tip of the wand. Balancing the energetic center line. Fast procedure for past life regression. By placing the wand on the third eye, it transforms itself into a bridge between the client and his previous memories. You watch through the wand as thought through binoculars. Foreseeing the future. Using the same technique as in section 6. above. Healing with letters--for those who heal by embedding holy names and combinations of letters. The wand will embed them into the client. Protection--use the wand as a magic pencil to draw a bubble of dark blue light around the client, or ask the wand to draw the bubble around the client by itself. In the same manner, the wand can draw any geometric form that you request--square, circle, ellipse, pyramid, Star Of David, etc. A cosmic window - the wand can draw us a window or a cosmic door leading to parallel worlds, the higher worlds or to an extraterrestrial station according to our choice. A purification bubble, (see chapter Working with the Light of the Creator). The wand will create a bubble for you and will connect it with channels according to your choice--to Cosmic stores, or any other energetic store. The energies will flow in and fill up the bubble. This treatment has a long-term effect and its influence on the client is extremely powerful. In addition, the bubble allows a protected safe space, gives a feeling of purification, fill up with Light, and rejuvenation. Opening prosperity channels--the wand can create and open new channels for a better flow by working with rays of Light. Place the tip of the wand on the client's head and ask it to open new channels to the Circle of Abundance. Every three second-long touch opens seven new channels. You can also use the wand to open for the client channels to the circles of love, work, publicity, money, success, etc. In the same three -second touch it will open seven channels for each circle.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
130
14.
Diagnosing curses and black energies. The wand can identify if the client has been cursed by touching the client's head with the tip of the wand. It will also say who placed the curse and when, and cancel it. Energetic surgeries and deep treatments--you send the wand deep into the ailing area and ask it to operate. A shining light--when you enter dark places, such as the Head, the Cellar, Reorganizing Rooms (see corresponding chapters), the wand will serve as a lamp shining light around you. The wand can scare away dark entities by sending a beam of light from its tip.
15.
16.
17.
'Umbilical Cord' G rounding

Previously, you have learned how to connect the client to the Four Elements of the Universe by using grounding channels. Sometimes this type of grounding is not sufficient. Sooner or later, you will meet the lonely, introverted client. Or a person who on one hand carries a heavy emotional load, and suffers from inner pressure at the point of collapsing, and on the other hand he's emotionally blocked. He has an urgent need to unload and be cleansed, but for that purpose he needs you, the healer. He needs the cooperation of another person, someone with whom he can share his problems, to make human contact. He will be willing to give to you that which he refused to give to the Universe. Case study: Deborah, a young woman of twenty-eight, arrived to me in a desperate condition. She had sinusitis. Her nasal passages were stuffed and filled with pus for over six months. She called it, 'a concrete block'. As a consequence, she had headaches and difficulty with breathing, (breathing through her nose was impossible), and as a consequence interrupted sleep. She had an appointment in the hospital within two days. The treatment would be invasive, and she was terrified. Desperate, she came to me at the last minute. The treatment: I spent a lot of time with Deborah. I treated her for an hour and a half, in all the ways that I knew with no results. Nothing changed, not even a minimal relief. Consulting with my guides, I received the suggestion of grounding her through me. I connected to her through channels and activated the grounding process. Miraculously, after a few minutes, Deborah reported that something was happening. She felt twinges in her nose and forehead. After a few more minutes she started sneezing and asked for tissues. The sinus fluid started draining in large quantities. The healing process had begun. Deborah went home with a pile of tissues and a heart full of joy.
The Treatment Procedure 1. 2. 3. Connect the client to you with an 'umbilical cord'. Create a grounding channel from his navel to yours. Connect the channel between you and Mother Earth, apply to her and ask her to take from you all that the client will transfer to you, so that you aren't stuck with that which isn't yours. Call to the client telepathically and tell him: "I apply to John's body: send to me through the umbilical cord, all that you do not need, all your negative charges, all that burdens you, that hurts you, that makes you suffer." Sometimes a very slow flow will start. In such a case, continue and tell the client telepathically: "Don't worry and don't be afraid to transfer more to me, I will not be hurt. There is someone who
4.
131
5. 6.
will take your load from me." You will immediately feel an increase in the flow from the client to you, and in parallel from you to Mother Earth. The grounding process may last ten minutes to an hour depending on the client's condition, but it doesn't restrict you in any manner. Meanwhile you can perform other treatments. When the flow weakens, disconnect the umbilical cord close to your body. Leave the channel between you and Mother Earth active so that she will continue to draw from you any remaining residue.
You can also do an 'umbilical cord' grounding treatment to a distant client, but it is better to do it with the client present in order to receive feedback on his feelings. Warning: Use this treatment as a last resort, if nothing else has worked. There's always a chance that you might be hurt by a client who wishes to harm you. When you volunteer yourself to serve as a grounding channel for the client, you place yourself in a vulnerable situation. What might hurt you are not the energies that will flow through you but the decision, conscious or not, to use the channel to harm you. If you don't know the client and you suspect that he possesses powers, and works for the negative polarity, he can transfer black energy to you in the means of poison, snakes, scorpions, or anything that can badly hurt you. Therefore, check several times with the guides, who is the client before you? Even if you receive an authorization that all is well, don't forget to disconnect the 'umbilical cord' immediately at the end of the grounding. In any case, if you're afraid of such a treatment, don't do it. Use the procedure for a known and loved client, (father, mother, brother, child, friend), who has a difficult long-term disease, or who is recovering after an accident or a surgery. You can connect to them with the 'umbilical cord' for an extended grounding, days, weeks, months, until they heal. It will not interfere or disturb you in any way; it won't prevent you from treating other people, but will accelerate their recovery and facilitate it immensely. It works!
Connecting the 'Umbilical Cord' to Receive Love A client who suffered from lack of love from one or both parents, which forms the base for illness and various problems, (physical or emotional), is entitled to receive a treatment by connecting an 'umbilical cord' between him and the parent, in order to receive love energy from them. The connection can be done even if a parent has passed away, since it is an energetic connection on the soul level. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Telepathically apply to the parent's soul and let it know about the treatment that you are about to perform. If the parent passed away, summon his soul. Connect an 'umbilical cord' between the client and the parent. Connect the parent with an energy channel to the Cosmic store of love. Ask the store to supply love energy. Ask the parent to flow love to his child. You can order a continuation of the work for up to six months.
Pay attention: Flowing love from a parent to his child is a Divine order. It's a necessary condition for creating life, health, and happiness. Your application to the parent, (whether he is still alive or not), is done on his soul level, and not to him, or to his body, or to his subconscious, because then he might refuse out of selfish motives. You apply and inform him of the connection for flowing love just for the matter of order, for courtesy, not in order to receive his consent. Just the way a court would order a parent to pay child support, simply because that is the law. Case study:
132
Charlie, a man of forty-seven complained of a serious bleeding from his anus that had been going on for two months. Conventional exams at the doctor discovered that he had hemorrhoids, but nothing more severe. He received a local treatment for the hemorrhoids but the bleeding didn't stop. The treatment: Consulting with the guides showed me that Charlie suffered from a great lack of parental love. Both his parents died many years ago, but even in their lifetimes they were disconnected and emotionally distant, this lack was the cause and the source of Charlie's problems. I summoned the souls of both parents; they arrived immediately. I explained the problem to them and asked for their cooperation. They accepted willingly. Among all present, I performed a ceremony of forgiveness and pardons for unjust actions that had been done in the past, as well as canceling old debts. I asked both parents to hug their son and they did so. Then I performed the 'umbilical cord' treatment with an agreement to prolong the work for six months. After a while, Charlie called me on the phone and informed me that the day after the treatment the bleeding stopped completely, and had never returned since.
A Multi-Channel Grounding
If the influence of the 'umbilical cord' treatment is so significant, imagine the results of the treatment in a multi-channel connection.
The Treatment Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Connect the client to you by many channels, up to five hundred, and in extreme cases even more. Connect yourself to Mother Earth with double the number of channels--a thousand or more. Apply to her and ask for her help to take away from you all that the client is transferring to you. Invite seven angels--Michael, Raphael, Gabriel, Nathaniel, Ariel, Uriel, Daniel, (or other angels whom you know). Connect the client to the angels with one channel per angel. Connect the client to the Creator with one channel. Ask the Creator and the angels to help flow love energy to the client. It will help him to release more negative baggage. Telepathically apply to the client and tell him: "Send to me, thriugh the channels, all the negative baggage that burdens you, all that bothers you, that hurts you, that makes you feel bad, angers, hurts, fears, harsh memories, traumas, self-pity, self-destruction, sadness, loneliness, and everything that you do not need. Don't worry and don't be afraid to transfer them to me. I will not be harmed. There is someone who takes from me whatever you send." Control the intensity of the flow. Since the channels are transparent, you can receive an image of all the 'dirt' and energetic debris that flows through them. Pay attention, if all the channels are flowing, or if there are any blocks. If you discover a block in a channel, go into the client's head and unplug it from there. If the flow is good, increase the drawing out from the client a hundred-fold. After a few minutes, increase it again by ten -fold. In the end, when the flow becomes weaker, disconnect all the channels that connect you to the client. Leave the channels that connect him to the Creator and the angels, and the channels between you and Mother Earth, (for continued grounding from you).
7.
8. 9.
Grounding through a Guide If you are afraid to perform grounding through yourself, consider the following possibility: apply to your guide and ask for his consent to perform grounding through him. With his agreement, connect the client by grounding channels to your guide, and connect the guide to Mother Earth.
133
Grounding through the Angels To perform a more profound intense grounding, call upon the seven angels and ask for their consent to perform grounding through them. Th en connect the client with grounding channels to each of the angels, and connect the angels with grounding channels to Mother Earth.
134
'Black Holes' in a Person's Body

You can see a 'Black Hole' in a client's body when you shift to x-ray vision. It looks like a very dark shadow, round or elliptic, turning around itself like a little tornado. It may be located anywhere in the body, and appear in any size--from half an inch up to a foot wide. In addition to the frontal opening, the 'Black Hole' also has an opening in the back. In a more focused vision you can sometimes see a red/orange/yellow light around the edges. You may find several 'Black Holes' in one person. They should be treated with Love Energy. The 'Black Hole' represents lack of love, lack of attention, lack of warmth, lack of positive reinforcement, and lack of emotional support.
Treatment Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Connect to the Cosmic store of love. Ask it to flow love energy to the client through you. Flow the Love energy through your palms into the 'Black Hole'. Watch how the 'Black Hole' becomes filled with light from the base to the edges. Once the hole is filled with light, the black color disappears; it radiates, and is overflowing with sparks, light bubbles, hearts of light, like a laser show. Use brown light to seal both ends, front and back. You can draw a channel from the Cosmic store of love to the 'Black Hole' to keep the energy flowing. Make an agreement to extend the work for six months.
In the next healing session, check the condition of the 'Black Hole' in the client's body. You may find out that it has disappeared or has decreased significantly. Repeat the procedure.
Love Treatment for the Heart

The physical heart of a person is also the heart of his being. It's a very sensitive place, exposed to emotional injuries as well as a place for accumulation of much negative energy: anger, fear, bitterness, grudges, vulnerability, stress, misery, etc. All these surround the heart, layer upon layer forming a stiff shell that encloses the heart until it becomes stress, anguish, heartache, pressure around the heart, or stabbing pains. The situation is more severe when you're dealing with a suppressed, introverted person who accumulates such dark energies in himself and doesn't find a way to express them and let them go, or a person who suffered deep emotional hurt, and as a result he closed his heart to the outside world. The shell should be treated. It is a block like any other and sooner or later it will materialize in the physical body as a disease or heart condition. The Love treatment for the heart breaks down this heavy suffocating shell. In addition it calms the heart in cases of accelerated heartbeat, or on the contrary, invigorates in cases of weakened pulse. It regulates high blood pressure/low blood pressure. The treatment may immediately release pains and pressures in the client's chest, fix a fluttering or murmur of the heart, help the heart relax and calm down, and become readjusted after a massive cleaning of the blood system with purple light. If you work with extraterrestrials, you can combine a Love treatment for the heart before or after the heart catheterization that the extraterrestrials will perform.
135
Treatment Procedure Sit in front of your client, close your eyes. Imagine that you bring the client's body close to within arm's reach. Reach out both hands and imagine that you place them on the client's chest, straight on the heart. Connect to the Cosmic store of love and flow love energy from it through your hands to the client's heart. You can equally connect to all the Cosmic stores you know and flow from them all the good energies to the heart. Flow love energy to the client's heart for no more than three minutes. Telepathically apply to the heart, tell it: "John's heart, let go of the loads that you do not need, the negative energies that burden you, and all that makes you sick." Watch and see black shadows which represent all the black energies leaving the heart and the client's body, flying a way and fading. Be aware and attentive to the heart itself and its reactions. If it becomes excited, talk to it and ask it to calm down. If it beats too fast, ask it to slow down. You can feel how the treatment is 'touching' the client's heart, how different emotions arise, he is filled with peace and relief. You can repeat the treatment every day or give it as a distant treatment.
Heart Massage
This is a very gentle work that is done out of a wish to give love and help. It achieves the same goals as a Love Treatment For the Heart and is being done in the same cases. However, this is a more meaningful manipulation. The heart massage is very efficient in cases of emotional and mental injury, because it heals energetic wounds.
Treatment Procedure Sit in front of your client, close your eyes. Imagine that you bring the client's body close to within arm's reach; put your palms close together at a distance of two inches, one atop the other. Slowly reach out both hands. Imagine that you make contact with the client's body and then penetrate in. Imagine that you gently clasp his heart between your palms as if you were holding a baby bird. One hand supporting under the heart and the other covers it, as if you make a shelter for it. Don't move and don't make any abrupt motions. Feel the heart beat between your palms. Flow love energy from the Cosmic store of love straight to the heart. Now make a few small cautious massaging motions with your palms, six or seven. This is sufficient. Slowly and carefully, withdraw your hands from the body. Using your palms, smooth out the aura in that area and close it shut. Case study: Here's a story of a case that demonstrates a cooperative work on the heart between me and the group of extraterrestrials with whom I work. The work was done under emergency conditions, at the peak of a heart arrest and at a distance. It was done via a telephone call, the client wasn't aware that I combined healing with coordinating and exchanging information with the extraterrestrials. This is the story told by the client: "Dear Margalit, I would like to give my appreciation and deep gratitude for the help and treatment that I received from you and the group of extraterrestrials and angels that you work with.
136
"This is how it went. In early spring I felt slight interruptions in my heart rate. They repeated themselves once or twice a day for several seconds. I gave no importance to it and did not go to see a doctor. After a while the interruptions grew stronger and lasted for longer times until one day, in the evening, they reached a degree of strength that I had not experienced until then. I felt that I was losing control and was close to collapse. My wife, bless her, called you with an SOS and you with your calming voice explained to me on the phone what I should do while the extraterrestrials were treating me. I was dazed, and therefore I cannot remember exactly what happened but I do remember that you said that the extraterrestrials were giving me a heart catheterization and they will go on taking care of me through the night. I was not surprised by the extraterrestrials, it was not my first meeting with them, and I believe in their medical knowledge and their ability to treat people. I was only surprised by the words 'heart catheterization '. After a fifteen to twenty minute treatment, I felt much better and in the morning I awoke refreshed after a good night's sleep, like I havent had in a long time. After several weeks, I had an appointment to continue the treatment. I complained about insomnia and constant tiredness. You performed a process of retrieving of soul parts and removed alien parasites. The extraterrestrial doctors placed a pacemaker in me, and an alert button for emergency situations. Today I feel fine. The various interferences and insomnia are gone. For that I would like to thank you from the bottom of my heart for the help and treatment that I received from you, the extraterrestrials, and the angels. Best regards, Buddy N. November, 2002."
137
Drawing Out Excess Karma

In some cases, a person takes upon himself other people's karma. It can happen especially in times of stress and worry for members of the family and loved ones, or in symbiotic relations between two people when it might look like a blending of their auras. Being over-involved, and taking up someone else's problems, result in an accumulation of excess karma in a person's aura. This manifests as restlessness, being stuck in a rut, having physical illnesses, and various emotional problems.
First try the treatment on yourself. Invite two 'boxes for drawing out excess karma'. Ask them to go on either side of your head and draw out the excess karma. First the boxes will draw from the outer layers of the aura, then from deeper within the body. At the same time, the boxes slowly descend down the sides of the body to the feet. They go up again, all the way to your head. The progress is powerful and clearly felt. All the material that is gathered within them is being tested and judged by high spiritual guides who will decide on it. When the treatment involves two people, and requires separating their combined auras, invite two boxes for each of them that will work in parallel. You must also make changes in your thought patterns and behavior, or else you will continue to take karma from other people, and in the future you will have to repeat the procedure.
Drawing Out Lethargy

When the system deals with challenges and hardships, reaches a condition of overload, becomes occupied in mental activity above its ability, and accumulates stressful ideas, the body declares a time-out and takes a break. This sense of tiredness can be alleviated. Pay attention: We're not talking about a physical tiredness caused by a long jogging run, but an accumulated mental fatigue that brings a person to a condition of collapse. Invite two 'boxes for drawing out lethargy', ask them to locate on either side of the head and draw out your fatigue. The process is being done exactly like the work being done to draw out excess karma. When you finish you will feel renewed and invigorated on many levels.
Problem Solving for a Client

You can use a method of problem solving for the client in the following cases: The client has an enormous load of problems in his life and he cannot handle all of them at once. Your intervention will help him gain more time and sometimes, may even solve the problem. The client is incapable of a work of self-awareness. The client has fallen asleep during the treatment, or is found in a deep meditative state and you do not wish to disturb him. You wish to check out what the client's problems are, whether he is aware of them or not.
The Treatment Procedure Connect to the client and telepathically ask him to send you messages from his subconscious level regarding the problems in his life. Be calm, and let the messages and the images appear. You will receive a vision or an image, a symbol or a phrase that represents his problems. Act to reach a solution, and to improve the situation.
138
Example one: a message--a bent person, helpless, imprisoned behind a fence who cannot get free. Solution: break down the wall for him, allow him to go free, give him strength, straighten up his posture. Example two: a message--a head is on fire. Solution: extinguish the fire, spray water on it. Heal the burned areas. Draw the smoke away. You can combine receiving messages with solving the problems in a sequence. Example: a message--a man is standing, in the distance there is a house. The man cannot reach the house. Solution: make a path from the person to the house. Lead him to the door. Next message --the man cannot open the door. Solution: Open the door for him; let him in. Next message: The man cannot go up to the second floor because there are no stairs. Solution: Make a staircase for him; help him go up. If after you solve a few problems for the client, you keep receiving messages with problems, ask him telepathically, or the guides, what is the major problem. Receive an answer: lately, the client feels that his home is no longer his. He feels like a stranger and alienated in his own home. (Or another explanation.) Telepathically suggest a solution for him, talk to him about the problems that came up in your internal dialogue. Give him an opportunity to deal with his feelings with awareness up front. Your intervention as a healer who solves the client's problems, makes it easy on him, frees him from stuck places, gives him new directions and ideas. Even if you don't tell him what you were doing for him, (that you have touched his thoughts, suggested solutions, etc.,) he might suddenly find out that his attitude towards the problems has changed. Suddenly he sees them differently; he has new ways and ideas for solutions, and improving his life. Sometimes you might receive a message of an event in the client's life, or the circumstances of his life at the moment. Not necessarily a problem that you can solve for him. Example: You asked a female client a question: what burdens her life? Message --a house with a garden. A child appears in the image, disappears from the image, and returns, alternating. Share what you've seen with the client. Maybe she has lost a child, had a miscarriage, or is in a condition of divorce where the child is torn between the two parents. Perhaps she has come to you for a treatment in a completely different matter, but her subconscious is sending you a real message as if telling you: pay attention, this is the source of the problem; this needs treatment. In a similar technique, you can check the fears and worries that the client has of the future. Look through the client's eyes. Imagine that you go into the client's head, stand behind his eyes and look out through them. Look forward. Wait for something to happen--a vision, an image. Check what is wrong with the image you see. What requires fixing and improvement? Example one: a message--a man is climbing a hill, he loses his balance and rolls down, he tries again and falls again.
139
Solution: flatten the hill, turn it into flat land or install an elevator for the person, which will take him to the hilltop. Example two: a person is standing on a chair in the middle of a barren field. Around him are snakes. Solution: destroy the snakes in any way you choose. For example: imagine that you shoot a mysterious beam from the tip of your finger that melts them and makes them disappear. Help the man get off the chair and show him the way. Problem solving for the client bypasses the conscious level and goes directly into deeper levels. It changes skewed perceptions in a fast immediate process and still leaves the client the freedom of choice: whether to accept the solution you have suggested or ignore it and remain stuck with the old problem.
A Fixed Problem
Look at the client in an x-ray vision; ask to see fixed problems. Receive an image of geometrical and other shapes in various areas in the body: triangles, squares, cubes, bubbles, etc. They might be small or large, and always transparent, as if the walls are made of glass with dark smog inside them. They represent fixed problems. A fixed problem always arises from a negative thought pattern: lack of self-love, lack of self-acceptance, a self-destructive tendency, compulsions, pockets of stubbornness: resistance to releasing anger, fear, grudges, and more. Perhaps the fixation of the problem was done at an early age, or a long time ago, like a decision that was made in the past and was long forgotten. Maybe the reasons and the circumstances in the client's life have changed over time, and therefore there is a good chance that some of the fixed problems that you will deal with will be removed for good. You as a healer can help the client to be free of the fixed problem. To a great extent he invites you to intervene and break it apart, he is crying for your help.
The Treatment Procedure You can be creative and invent ways to deal with the fixed problem: erase the shape with Cosmic erasers, shrink them and throw them out, insert a channel from the Crown that will wash or draw the smog out from within the shape, and hope that in a lack of content, the shape will lose the meaning of its existence and will break down. Or you can take a more aggressive method as described below.
Bombarding with a 'Laser Beam' 1. 2. 3. 4. Point your index and middle fingers like a gun toward the fixed problem. Shoot a 'laser beam' and blow it up. Insert a tube that will draw out all the shards and clean up the area. If in the next session, the same fixed problem reappears, then there is a need for a more profound exam, and to change thought patterns.
140
Deep Meditative State

In a deep meditative state, the body goes into a deep relaxation but the mental awareness remains awake as if the body has gone asleep but the head is alert. Treatment procedures such as 'applying to the subconscious', 'going down to the archives', 'past life regression', 'retrieving soul parts', 'retrieving energies', 'reorganizing rooms', and other procedures, (see corresponding chapters), give better results when the client is in a deep meditative state. In this situation, the client loses his resistance and allows himself to flow with the treatment. His criticism and judgment decreases substantially, and he is more likely to be open to processes, experiments, and other events that he would not have allowed in a normal mode. Most important of all is: Under this condition there is a more liberal use of the imagination as a working tool with tremendous powers that create the change and the healing. In this work the client takes an active role in the process: he listens, answers, shares what he experiences, sees and feels, listens to guidelines, and is found in direct contact with you at all times. In other types of work you might choose to put your client in a meditative state, turn his attention inside, to a place of peace and quiet in the center of his being and let him remain in this state while you treat him and do your work.
Putting a Client in a Meditative State It's best that the client is lying down. Make sure that the room temperature is comfortable, not too warm and not too cold. Make sure to have a cover nearby, (a sheet or light blanket,) because in a meditative state, the body temperature drops. Dim the lights. For the first three steps only, you can play a low volume of suitable background music. You can sit next to the client or behind him, depending on the treatment. The client should close his eyes. Stage 1. Guide the client with your voice. Tell him to silently repeat every sentence that you say: "I call you, the Creator. I request your help and treatment. Please, Creator, surround me with your Light from head to toe. I want to breathe in your light and be filled with it." Guide the client to breathe the Light of the Creator into his lower abdomen and breathe out darkness. Repeat that five times, (see chapter, Working With The Light of the Creator). Stage 2. Guide the client to relax the entire body starting from the top of the head and down the body, while saying the names of the body parts, down to the feet. Remind him to relax each part, make sure that there is no tight, tensed, or stressed area. Stage 3. Invite relaxing and calming lights to fill his body. Connect him to the Cosmic stores to receive energies. Stage 4. Tell the client that you will count backwards from ten to one; you want him to slowly sink into a place of peace and quiet within himself. As you count, add guidelines and positive suggestions. Here's an example that doesn't obligate you. You may give other suggestions that apply to the situation, the personality of the client, and the specific needs of the treatment: Ten--I want you to feel how your body becomes heavier and heavier and sinks into the couch. Nine--It's a pleasant heaviness that combines lightness and a feeling of floating.
141
Eight-- I want you to feel a pleasant warmth spreading into different parts of your body. Seven--I want you to feel safe and secure, surrounded by light and love. SixMinute by minute you become more aware of angels and God surrounding and treating you. Five --Allow yourself to let go of control for a few moments, nothing bad will happen. Four--Imagine that you are lying in your bed, covered with your blanket. You feel comfortable. Three--Imagine that you enter into your head. Inside it is a smaller head, which you enter, go on and enter a head-within a head-within a headuntil you reach a central spot in the middle of your head. Two --Imagine that you bring this central point forward to the middle of your forehead, in between your eyes; there you open a small window. One--imagine that you are looking out through the window and see a long hallway, starting from your forehead stretching forward, at its end there is an opening with light shining through. Imagine that you climb out through the window and go down the hallway. From this point you can continue to go on to the next process:
'Reorganizing Rooms'
This is an excellent technique for solving a vast variety of problems. Physical illness, pains, emotional problems, inner conflicts, traumas, harsh memories, fears and anxieties, hindrances, difficulties in functioning, problematic relationships, and negative emotional loads. The options are nearly unlimited. All it takes from the client is imagination and will. The rooms represent problems. The client goes into a room in order to look at a problem and take care of it, however, instead of confronting it directly, he deals with its representations as he perceives them in his unconscious. That is, 'room reorganization' bypasses confrontation with the source of the problem, which might be too painful or too frightening for a client who isn't mature enough, still the process allows treatment and inner change. Sometimes even in this technique, when the subject is very traumatic, the client's protection mechanisms will cause problems.
How to Perform a 'Room Reorganizing' Put the client in a deep meditative state. At the end of the countdown, guide him: "Imagine that a long hallway stretches forward from your forehead, and you advance through it. The hallway is wide and has a high ceiling. As you go forward, you notice doors on both sides. One door to the right and one door to the left, and so on. On each door there is a sign. Look for a door that says: 'My pain,' or any other problem that you're treating. Stand before the door, reach out and open it. Imagine that you go into the room and close the door behind you. "Look around and tell me what you see. Describe everything that is in the room--what is its size? What shape is it? The level of the light? The floor, ceiling, walls? Are there any objects in the room, furniture, rugs, pictures? Is there anyone or anything in the room that you can tell me about? What is the atmosphere like? How do you feel in this room?
142
Pay attention: The questions have a purpose, to guide the client, to advance him, to encourage him to do the work, to create awareness, to strengthen, to help him become unstuck. Make sure that you use general style questions that will permit elaborating and developing the theme. Avoid leading suggestions, or giving ideas that are yours. Use a pure attitude as much as you can. For example ask in this way: "Look at the floor around you, how does it look?" Not this way: "Look at the floor arou nd you, is it dusty, broken, and have a deep pit in it?" The client may describe the room in any manner whatsoever. Be prepared for anything. For example: "The room is small and dark, there a few pieces of old furniture, a worn rug, a table, a bookcas e with books, everything is dusty. Under the table is a bicycle; in the window there is a rusted wire fence." Or another example: "The room is round, big, very cold. There is no ceiling. Above I can see dark sky and the moon. Everything is wet and moldy. It smells like mold. The water reaches knee-high." Everything has a meaning. If the room represents the client's pain, then everything in it is a representation of the causes of the pain. There is no obligation to find out the meaning of everything, even though it is possible. Now comes the stage of reorganizing the room. Reorganizing the room is done according to one main principle--you have to redecorate, renew, and change the room in order to make it the most pleasant, inviting, comfortable, warm place that the client can imagine. Explain to the client: "You have to rearrange and organize the room with your will power and imagination. You will find out that you work like a magician, everything is being done immediately, and according to your will with no effort on your behalf." First the client has to decide which of the things found in the room he wants to keep, and which he wants to move out. Whatever he decides to get rid of he can throw out the window. What he decides to keep, he can renovate, paint, and polish. It's important to emphasize that he doesn't need to consider anyone's opinion. It is his room and his alone. Therefore he can arrange it according to his tastes and will, using his imagination. If there is dirt, dust, cobwebs, puddles, etc, he has to clean them. Walls, floor and ceiling have to be renovated, painted, change the tiles, etc. If the room is dark, he should open windows and invite the sun to shine in. If he doesn't like the location of the objects in the room, he has to move them to another place that he prefers. Now the client can bring in new pieces of furniture such as a couch, piano, coffee table, and place them wherever he chooses. He can also bring in carpets, curtains, pillows, pictures, tablecloths. Suggest some ornaments to him, mobiles, crystals, candles, a small water fountain, an aquarium. Plants: flowers, pots, window boxes. Sounds: wind chimes, hanging shells, some background music. Scents: he can spray perfume, order the flowers to produce scent, use scent ed candles, essence oil, incense and more, according to his choice. Guide the client: "Before you leave the room, turn your back to the door and look at it. Is there anything else that you wish to change? To add? Or is it perfect for you? Do you feel that this is the most pleasant room that you've ever had? If so, raise your palms, and flow a golden light from them. Paint the entire room and its contents gold. Open the door and go into the hallway. Close the door and look at the sign on it. What does it say now? Read it and don't try to remember what it said before. Maybe it's called 'My room of peace,' or maybe 'My room'. Before, the sign said 'My pain'."
143
A name that has changed symbolizes a work done, an accomplished change. Guide the client: "Go bac k to the hallway backwards until you feel a wall at your back. Go back into your head. In a count of one through five, center yourself and return to this reality. When you feel comfortable, open your eyes. Now examine the area that was painful before, is the pain gone?"
Problematic Issues in 'Room Reorganizing' Pay attention: a subject like 'my fear' or 'my trauma' are problematic and have a catch to them. The client might feel great fear, which will prevent him from going into the room at all. He's terrified of what he'll find in the room. You have to strengthen him, remind him that you support him. Tell him: "The control is in your hands. The power is in your hands. There is no situation that you cannot overcome. You are the screenwriter of this movi e. You are the boss." If he has dared and gone into the room, he may tell you that the room is very dark and he sees nothing. Guide him: "Above your head is a string, pull it and the room will be lit up." He may tell you that the room is empty, there is nothing in it, (again an unconscious attempt to avoid confrontation with the source of his fears). Or, on the contrary, he may discover that the room is piled up with various items and junk reaching the ceiling. Or maybe it is full of scary animals--snakes, spiders, scorpions, etc. Maybe he will meet a frightening black image. The room might have a basement or an attic that requires attention and closer investigation. Or maybe the place is in ruins--walls falling down, tilted floors, leaks and stagnant puddles all over, etc. There is no end to the images; everything is open and the possibilities are endless. Your job as a healer is to support the client, stand behind him throughout the entire process, and gently encourage him to confront the issues. The client has to deal with every aspect, whether negative, frightening, dangerous, repulsive, or threatening found in the room. He can throw it out, destroy it, or blow it up with the magical laser beams coming from his fingertips. Everything is acceptable, anything is correct; one can do anything in the private rooms. If the anxiety is too great, paralyzing, the client sees nothing, he feels nothing, he can't even imagine a room --let him be. He's not ready for confrontation. A room reorganization process can be repeated as many times as you require, according to the need with no limits. The client that has already studied the work, and understands its principles, can do it by himself, without your guidance, as a kind of homework. He can go into a different room each time and organize it: 'My conflict room,' 'My confusion room,' 'My sexual problems room,' 'My stress room,' 'My knee ache room,' 'My herniated disc room,' My argument with my wife room,' My room of envy,' and so onthere are endless rooms and possibilities.
'Room Reorganizing' for a Client In some cases, when the client is having difficulties in working with imagery, or he is too stressed, too introverted, doesn't cooperate, etc., you can reorganize the room for him. Imagine that you are the one who walks down the all; you open the door and go into the room. You rearrange it and leave. If you are skilled and quick, the entire process can last about three minutes. After a while, when you have experience and are secure in room reorganization, you can transfer the work to your 'Crown'. You can program it so that every time you request it will go into the client's rooms and reorganize them. Of course the 'Crown' finishes the job at a very high speed; therefore you can order it to organize several rooms at the same time.
144
You may even ask the 'Crown' to screen and go into all the rooms that are connected to the client's problems in any way.
Applying to the Subconscious

Applying to the subconscious is done in order to receive from it, answers to questions, solutions to problems, and clarification that will help the client to solve problematic situations in all areas from physical illness and disease, to mental and emotional difficulties. Applying to the subconscious allows finding an answer to every question because it is the greatest most complete store that includes all the information about us: both from the present life as well as older issues from previous incarnations. By applying to the subconscious, we also do a work of releasing a negative or distorted thought pattern, which is the source of the problem, replacing it with a new positive correcting thought pattern. This is the real healing, the central idea of healing, healing at its best that has no replacement. Applying to your subconscious is actually a process of channeling. You can channel with your subconscious just like you can channel with your body parts, with your soul, with your spiritual guides, with God, and with the entire universe. Therefore, not every client is suited for such a treatment. A suitable client is one who has the ability to quiet down his ego to allow listening to deep thoughts and insights and allow them to go up to the conscious level. He also should be open to receive ideas, (no matter how odd they may seem), and mentally prepared to invest the work. Above all, he should have the three foundations of working towards self-awareness: Complete honesty, searching for the truth, courage. A person who fulfills all these conditions, is capable of working by applying to his subconscious. It will also serve as a breakthrough for him to channel with his spiritual guides, (if he hasn't already started).
The Treatment Procedure Put the client in a meditative state as described in the previous chapter. Make a slight change in the countdown part, guide the client to stay in a central point in his head and don't guide him to 'walk down the hallway'. Now ask the client to repeat silently or aloud, the following phrases: "I apply to my subconscious. I ask you to send me ideas, thoughts, memories, and any other material that can explain or answer my question: 'Why do I have knee pain?' I promise to accept every material that you send to me, I will not reject or repress it. I choose to take care of the problem and handle it in a conscious manner." Now, tell the client to empty his head of all thoughts, and count to three. At the end of the count, the client should say the first thing that comes to mind, (see chapter, Block Removal, Releasing Traumas,): thought, memory, name, situation, or anything else. Ask him not to remove whatever comes up. It's material that comes from the subconscious that is directly connected to his question. It's a hint to a more profound investigation of the problem. From now on, continue according to the material that the client brings up, step by step.
145
Case study: Mary, a forty-five year old woman, had suffered in the past year from increasing pains in her knees. She also claimed that her knees sometimes locked or bent and wouldn't carry her weight. Different treatments brought only temporary relief, but no complete healing. Mary agreed that the root of the matter should be investigated. Me: "Empty your head of all thoughts. I will count to three and when I finish, tell me the first thing that comes to mind." Mary: "I don't knowI see a mountain, but it's probably unrelated." Me: "It's okay, say: 'My subconscious, explain to me what the mountain has to do with it?' One, two, three. What comes up now?" Mary: "It's very strange, I see myself climbing up a mountain, climbing up and sliding down all the time." Me: "You are receiving a message in the image. It's your own choice and preference. What feeling do you receive from this situation?" Mary: "Great difficulty, something I cannot do. It's frightening, frustrating." Me: "Say: 'My subconscious, what is the thing I cannot do?' One, two, three. What comes up now?" Mary: "I can't finish anything successfully." Me: "Say: 'My subconscious, what can't I accomplish successfully?' " Mary: "A relationship, having a partner--I still don't understand how it's connected to my knees?" (Mary got divorced about a year ago.) Me: "You're doing a good job, carry on. Ask, how is it connected to my knees?" Mary: "You need to stand on your own two feet. This is what I receive. This is also what my parents used to tell me all the time. My mother used to tell me, 'You will never accomplish anything unless you stand on your own two feet.' " Me: "What does it mean, standing on your own two feet?" Mary: "Independence, not being dependant on my parents, on a husband, no one." Me: "So do you feel that you're standing on your own two feet?" Mary: "Actually, ever since the divorce, I feel the exact opposite, like I don't have any feet to stand on. All that I've done in the last year is to learn how to be independent, it terrifies me." Me: "What scares you about being independent?" Mary: "I don't know, actually I have started to quite like my independence." Me: "Ask your subconscious: 'What scares me about being independent?' " Mary: "You are afraid that you will fall, and there will be no one to catch youI think I understand. It fits exactly; I have a lot of fears about this matter." From now on things became clearer to Mary. She understood the connection between her knee problems and her fears. At this point, there is a need to change thought patterns. Me: "Mary, say in your heart: I apply to my subconscious: I request to neutralize these fears that I have. Now I understand the connection to my knee ache. I choose to be free of my fears. I choose to change the way I think. I release all the fears that are related to my new independence. I don't need them any more. I don't want them anymore. I call upon you God, and ask that you take away all my fears. I give them to you, please take them away and fill me with your Light. Heal me from the fears." Now you need to imprint a positive thought pattern.
146
"I apply to my subconscious and request to imprint a new thought pattern in you. From now on, I am free from my fears; I enjoy my independence. My independence brings me only good experiences. I am capable of standing on my own two feet and dealing with any challenge that life may bring me. I trust myself completely. I trust the universe. I trust God. My subconscious, have you received and imprinted this new thought pattern?" Wait for an answer --"Yes." You can program the subconscious. It will perform with precision every request and order that is given it. "My subconscious, I request that you repeat these new thought patterns fifty times a day for the next month whether I am aware of it or not, whether I'm awake or not." This programming works and will be performed according to your orders. On occasion during the next month, if you find yourself thinking about these new thought patterns, it probably came up from the subconscious level which is doing the work that you gave it. You can use the same process to do a repairing experience in traumatic cases.
The End of the Process Similar to block removal, you can end the work with the subconscious in two ways: 1. Closing the process--"I apply to my subconscious and request it to end the process and not send me any more material and ideas." 2. Leaving the process open--"I apply to my subconscious and request that you send me more material and ideas regarding my problem over the next few days. I'm ready to continue to receive, consider, and deal with everything that you send me." Leaving the process open allows you to continue the work. You mus t clarify to the client that the next few days may be full of different emotional events depending on the treatment theme and the issues that come up. For example, if the theme is fears and anxieties, it is most likely that the client will be flooded with materials that are related to them, memories, past experiences, or repressed traumas. He may also feel anxious, restless, and instable. If the theme is moodiness or depression, the client may feel depressed, be in a bad mood, feel melancholic, etc. He may report more detailed dreams or odd dreams. He may feel more tired than usual, and even get up exhausted in the morning. It is no wonder considering the amount of emotional work, and 'extra time' that he has been investing in the night. He may suddenly find himself thinking about things that he hasn't thought of for many years, recalling events that he had forgotten long ago, thinking about them over and over. The process is in full swing. His subconscious acts according to the order that it had been given, working day and night without pause. You should prepare the client in advance for all these possibilities; explain to him that all these materials are on their way out. It is a blessed process of cleansing and releasing negative loads and deposits that he doesn't need, and he should accept everything with love. At the end of the process he will feel balanced and peaceful. If the client agrees, you can request that your AHAVA group continue to work with him over the next few nights. The group will make house calls according to the need to check that the process is going well and treat the client.
147
By applying to the subconscious you can find out about a large number of problems in one session, if the client is not too tired. It's advisable that the entire process be written or be recorded. Even if the client thinks that he will remember everything, when he comes out of the meditative state, he may forget much of what he's learned. Listening to the entire treatment again will refresh his memory and help him be connected to the process from a different point of view. Pay attention: If the treatment theme is pain, or any physical problem, at the end of the process turn the client's attention to the afflicted area. It's important to compare the condition before and after treatment. Ask the client to report to you what he feels. In most cases, the pain is completely gone. If there is just an improvement, and the area is still sensitive, then there is more work to be done. More than anything else, this comparison teaches the client of the connection between the awareness work that he has done and the healing.
'Going into the Archives'

This technique combines applying to the subconscious, with an option of past life regression, and doing a 'repairing experience'. In special cases it allows a glance into the future. Here is where the client has to have channeling ability, or be able to work with imagery. Whereas applying to the subconscious may serve as a fast process that gives immediate answers in times of distress, 'going to the archives' is an adventure, sometimes it's an unforgettable 'multimedia show' filled with details and events. The client should be receptive to the process and cooperate. Being critical and judgmental never helped any healing process.
The Treatment Procedure Put the client in a deep meditative state. Slightly change the countdown stage--guide the client: "Imagine that you're inside your head. Focus on one central point. Imagine that this point becomes bigger until you find yourself standing in the center of a round hole inside your head. Around you, you can see the floor, the walls, and the ceiling. Go backwards toward the back of your head and look for a staircase going down. Is there light there or is it dark? If it's dark, reach out with your hand and pull the string that hangs above you. Pulling it will turn on the light. Now go down the stairs. At the end of the stairs you will find a big door, look at it. Is it a wooden door? Is it one of metal, or something else? Reach out your hand and push the door open. You're standing in the entrance to your archives. Is there light or is it dark? If it's dark, turn on the light. You're standing in a huge hall. Around you on the walls there are shelves, cabinets, and drawers filled with file folders, books, videotapes, audiotapes, CDs, all filled with information about you. In the middle of the hall there is an arm chair, sit comfortably in it. It's a fancy executive armchair. You are the boss in this archive; you own the place. Around you are the most advanced electronic equipment: on the wall in front of you is a movie screen, on the other side a television set. You can also see a VCR, a slide projector, a computer, a phone, a fax machine, a hi-fi system, and any other communication device that you want. From the armchair where you are sitting, you can activate the archives by voice command and give orders without leaving your seat. Everything that you ask or require will be answered in any way that you
148
choose. You may hear a vocal answer, see a vision, or you may find what you need in a book. Be prepared for every possibility. Everything is possible. Apply to the archive and say: "My archive, give me ideas, thoughts, memories, and any material that can explain or answer the question: 'Why do I suffer from back pain? I promise to accept everything that you send to me; I will not reject or repress it. I chose to take care of the problem and deal with it consciously.' Wait for something to happen. Maybe the phone will ring and you will receive an enlightening conversation, maybe a book will fly from one of the shelves straight into your hands where you will read all you need to know about yourself. You may find yourself playing the lead role in a movie that is projected on the screen in front of you, which will give you insights on important things about yourself. Stranger things have happened. Everything is possible. You can ask the archives any question you like. Ask for explanations, elaborations, directions for how to advance along the road. It may even give you solutions for different conditions and healing, will advise you, and tell you exactly what you should do. The archive also allows you to go on travels, to re-live the past --from this life and from past lives, can lead you to memories of times between reincarnations, to other planets, to the future, to perform past life reparations, the possibilities are endless. Work with the archives as much as you need. When you finish, rise from the armchair, leave the archive room and close the door. (You can leave the light on.) Climb back up the stairs and go back to the central hall inside your head. Slowly return to the here and now at your pace. Case study: Alex, a seventeen-year -old boy, suffered from a backache that deeply impaired his daily function. The cause of the pain was unclear, tests and x-rays showed nothing. He found it hard to lie down, stand, or sit in school for any length of time. There was no comfortable position for him. He had already been through various conventional and alternative treatments but the suffering was great, the back pain became the center of his life. I put Alex in a meditative state. I guided him down to the archives. He was working very well with imagery and started talking immediately: Alex: "Margalit, I see a movie. It's like an old black and white movie with a lot of scratches. I see the logo of the roaring lion. Now I see a soldier in uniform running in a forest. He's looking backwards, he's escaping something." Me: "Who is this soldier, do you know him?" Alex: (In a sure voice), "It's me, someone is chasing me. I hear voices, screams, gunshots." Since Alex was a boy about to join the army I assumed that the archive brought information up for him from another lifetime. The experience was very authentic because the client was a boy who had never done past life regression before, and also because I did not prepare him for this possibility. Still he was an open-minded client and his reaction was very natural. At this stage his voice shook, he sounded afraid. Me: "What is going on now? Share with me." Alex: "I stumble onto a root in the ground and fall down. I feel like someone is going to catch me. There is someone really close by. I'm scared to death." Me: "Can you see this person?" Alex: "No, just a moment, I try to get up but something happens. I feel pain in my back. I think I'm wounded." (Alex is crying.) "Yes, I see a lot of blood. I cannot get up. I feel like I'm paralyzed. I'm lying in a pool of blood. I know I've been shot. I know I'm going to die. It's too hard, I want to stop."
149
Me: "Okay, it's okay. Everything is all right, it's an experience that you've had in the remote past. Now you're in a safe and secure place. Order the movie to stop. Breathe deeply and relax. What is going on now?" Alex: "The movie is gone. The screen is empty. But I now I had been lying there a long time. I was hoping that someone would arrive and help me but nobody came." Me: "Apply to your archive and ask: 'My archive, does the event that I've just experienced explain my back pain?' " Alex: "Yes, I hear a voice talking to me as if through speakers. 'The trauma that you went through is related to your back pain.' " Me: "Ask the archive: 'What do you suggest that I do in order to heal?' " Alex: "Release the trauma, understand that you're in a different lifetime now, in a different place, you no longer need this trauma." From now on the treatment continues in the direction that had been suggested by the archive but doesn't end here. Later more levels and aspects were discovered that required a broader solution. I brought here the part of the treatment that had to do with working with the archive. From a multitude of possible examples of treatment, I've chosen to bring this particular story because it clearly demonstrates how the archive allows development into unexpected directions. In this case--going back to a previous lifetime. You just have to allow the developments to happen and flow with them to wherever they take you. Trust the archive completely, there is none wiser when it comes to treating you, trust the entire process.
Past Life Regression

The technique that I bring here for past life regression, is based on the 'Room Reorganizing' work. It is easy, quick, and recommended. Past life regression is usually done in order to bring up ancient memories from past lives that hold the roots for problems that appear in this life. These could be traumatic events, difficult experiences, or painful memories that when brought to awareness, allows reexamination, understanding, acceptance, and closing of circles. And in this way, healing a large variety of problems, ailments, diseases, and different issues. Consult the guides about your client before you go with him into the process of past life regression and during the process itself. Maintain a constant contact with them and receive guidance in every step of the process.
The Treatment Procedure Determine the subject of the treatment with the client. What is the problem? What do you want to know? Guide the client into a meditative state. Guide the client: "Imagine that from the center of your forehead starts a very long hallway that ends far ahead. You can see the far end because of the light that enters from the opening. Imagine that you walk down the hallway, walk or float according to your choice. As you advance, the hallway gets wider and it's easy and comfortable for you to walk in it. You notice that there are doors on both sides of the hallway, one door on the right and one door on the left, and so on. You also notice that there is a sign on every door with something written on it.
150
"Look for a door with a sign that says: 'Ancient memories from past lives.' When you find such a door stand in front of it. Imagine that you reach out your hand and open the door. At this moment a large burst of light carries you inside. You are drawn into a time tunnel. You quickly fly and float, you feel secure and protected, angels and guides accompany you. Colors and shapes pass you at great speed. "You have reached the other side of the time tunnel. All is calm. You're standing on your feet. Take a few seconds to adjust. Look around you. Where are you? What do you see? What do you hear? What do you feel?" From this point on you should continue with the client according to what he brings up and remembers. You can guide him to different actions such as: You accelerate a specific picture by declaring: "I request to accelerate the story by a few days/years/or up to the next point that is relevant to solving my problem". Just like you control a video by pressing on the remote control. You can bring back the story by declaring: "I request to bring back the story to the moment before happened.' You can freeze a specific picture by declaring: "I freeze the picture."
Repairing Experience After the client remembers a difficult experience that he had, you can guide him through a work of repairing experience. The idea is to create a different ending, a better one to the same story, to be free from the negative influence of that trauma. It is also important to forgive the people who hurt him in that reincarnation. At the end of the work say: "Part from the picture, ask to go back to the hallway. You are being drawn back up the time tunnel, you find yourself back in the hallway. From this point you can keep searching for another door and look for another past life, or go back in the hallway, go into the head, and come back to this point." Case study: Betty, a fifty-year old woman was claustrophobic. She panicked when she was in a closed space, and hence she avoided flying. Me: "You arrive at the end of the time tunnel, you stand on your feet. Look around. Tell me where you are. What do you see?" Betty: "I'm in the middle of a battlefield. It is just awful," (her voice rises, she gets excited and anxious.) "There are bodies everywhere. Dead soldiers, wounded, there is smoke, there are wounded soldiers that are crying for help. In front there is a wire fence with bodies of soldiers hanging from it. It's terrible, it's terrible." Me: "What are you doing in this place?" Betty: "I'm a soldier. I am eighteen." Me: "Do you know what this place is? What year is it?" Betty: "I don't know, the uniforms look like they are of a French army. Boots, rank insignias, rifles with bayonets." Me: "Do you want to go on walking in the battlefield? Or do you want to advance?" Betty: "I want to advance." Me: "Say in your heart: 'I request to advance the picture.' " Betty: "Now I see a rectangle of lightOh no, oh my god," (she yells and cries.) "I'm lying in a hole, in a
151
grave. They are covering me with dirt. I yell to them --'I am alive! Don't bury me!' But they can't hear. They are indifferent. I am suffocating with dirt. I can't breathe." Me: "It's okay Betty. Stop the picture; freeze it. It's an ancient memory. You're not there anymore. You're in a safe and secure place. Breathe deeply and relax. Do you feel that you want to carry on?" Betty: "Yes. Now I'm flying above everything. I look down." Me: "Freeze the picture. Now return the picture back to the moment before they cover you with dirt. Freeze the picture again. Now call God. Ask for help an d treatment. Ask that He heal you from the pain and from the difficult experience that you had." Betty: "Yes, I feel relieved. I feel that I am filled with peace and quiet. I feel a great relief." Me: "If you had a chance to change something in the story what would you do?" Betty: "I would like to be a magician, change everything." Me: "You can be a magician. Ask God to help you." Betty: "It's wonderful. I see a small golden wand coming down from the sky like in a fairy tale. The wand touches me, I rise to my feet. I hold the wand in my hand. I move from soldier to soldier, touch each one of them, they wake up to life and recover. Now they are organizing to go back home." Me: "Bless all of them. Thank God. Ask to go back to the hallway. You are being drawn back; go backwards in the hallway until you feel a wall at your back. Return into your head. When I count to five, you will focus and balance. When you feel ready, return to the present moment." At the same weekend, Betty ordered plane tickets and flew to a holiday abroad with no fear and no anxiety.
The Power Animals

The power animal, also called the strength animal, is an energetic animal. Every person has one or more power animals that may appear in a dream, or when they are summoned in the inner screen. The power animal reflects your inner world, therefore is not constant and changes according to the different times in your life, your personality, and your changing needs. Different power animals will help you in different ways. They have different abilities and may radiate energies, powers, and give support, each one in its own way. They accompany you and work on your behalf day and night, balance you, direct you on your way, treat you, flow supporting energies to you and improve your life in any possible way, even if you're not aware of it. You may consider them as light entities that surround you and are found in a constant state of giving, love, and good will towards you. Naturally, you can also receive assistance from them when you are aware of them and connected to them.
Making Contact with the Power Animals Sit down and close your eyes. Breathe in a few deep breaths, relax the body, look in your inner screen, and say in your heart: "I call upon my power animal, (or animals) to come." Use your imagination as a working tool.
152
Look straightforward to the horizon. Wait to see who arrives. Be open to all the possibilities and trust the process. If one animal comes it will stand in front of you, if more animals arrive they will stand next to the first one and create a line across from you. Make a telepathic connection and talk to your animal. Ask if it has an important message to give you. How can it help you? What can it teach you? What insights can it give you? Give it all that you don't need--it is ready to take away from you tiredness, worry, pain, sorrow, and all that makes you feel bad. This is the animal's job. It is meant for this. When this pure soul fulfills its vocation, it goes up one level. You can connect to it through a channel and pass all your negative charges through it, or you can load them on it, or transfer them in a hug, by direct contact with the animal. The power animal can protect you, and absorb attacking energies that were meant to harm you. It atones for you. You can take a journey with it, sit on its back, hug it and ride off. It can teach you the secrets of healing. It will advise you and show you the direction when you are lost or confused. When giving a treatment to another person, you can use the power animals in the following ways: The power animal can deliver energies that you are sending to a person who is far away, and who is found under a block of black energies. The animal passes through the black screen of energies. In cases of very difficult diseases or illnesses, use the power animals of the patient to increase his healing. Invite two of his power animals; order them to fight each other. The winner is assimilated into the patient's body. Soul redemption.
153
Soul Redemption
The meaning of 'soul redemption' is releasing the soul from a partial or complete control by the dark powers. We are talking about demons, emissaries of the devil, whose job is to seize peoples' souls. They clutch onto the souls and prevent the person from health, happiness, and an enlightened way of life--in other words, they overshadow his world. In worst cases, they may even steal parts of the soul, or shift the person into selling his soul to the devil. Such seizures by the dark powers may be expressed in a wide variety of problems, starting from physical illnesses to mental illnesses, to damaging interpersonal relations, stopping the livelihood, depression, suicidal thoughts, and more interference and problems of all kinds.
How Does a Person Arrive at this Situation? When a person is very vulnerable due to illness, an accident, a fall, a dangerous surgery, a decreased emotional/spiritual situation, sorrow and pain, a hole is created in his protection wall, in his aura. His resistance and will power against the dark forces weakens and then they latch upon him.
The Difference between 'Capturing the Soul' and 'Harassment by the Negative Polarity' 'Harassment by the negative polarity' (see relevant chapter) is meant to interfere with a person fulfilling his higher destiny. If while doing this, the dark powers also succeed in breaking his spirit, that's another gain. A declaration of a cosmic war on these dark powers causes their banishment from the personal space of the person and ends the problem. On the other hand, when 'capturing the soul' by the dark powers, the soul itself is the target. It's a direct attack on the soul for the purpose of stealing it and transferring it into the service of the devil and to his complete control. For a man whose soul was captured--no treatment in the world can help him. It is as if he's in a closed bubble that doesn't allow any healing to go through. A conventional treatment, (medication, surgery) may temporarily solve the problem but soon after a new disease takes its place, (and in a more lethal manner). The two plagues, 'capturing the soul' and 'harassment by the negative polarity' are evil plagues that the miserable person should be relieved of as soon as possible. It is easy!
What is 'Soul Redemption'? Call upon the NEHAMA group who is responsible for the peace of the soul and request information. Ask if there is a need to do 'soul redemption' for your client. It is important to clarify this point, especially for a new client who arrives to you for the first time. The idea that stands behind 'soul redemption' is that you need to redeem those parts of the soul that had been stolen and transferred to the devil's hands, to the dark worlds. In order to redeem them, we send the soul of an animal, which is the power animal of the client. This is one of its jobs, to redeem the person's soul. All this is done in order to keep the balance between the worlds. Once the deed is done, automatically the stolen parts of the person's soul are released, return to him and merge into one complete soul. Pay attention: It is important to do 'soul redemption' only for those who need it or else we lose a soul to the dark worlds. It is not a sin but it is a mistake. If the mistake is done with a pure heart, you will be forgiven, but as stated above, first clarify the matter with the NEHAMA group.
154
How Do You Perform 'Soul Redemption'? 1. 2. Stand face to face with your client. Invite the client' power animal. Watch the horizon, see the animal arrive and stand above the s client's head, (like a hologram). Even if the vision is not clear to you, and you're not sure which animal arrived, it doesn't matter. If two or more power animals arrive, it means that they are needed and the situation is grave. In any case, it is best to clarify it with the NEHAMA group. Maybe the situation requires only partial redemption and you can use only one power animal. 3. Connect the client to his animal with seven channels. If there are several animals, connect the client to each one of them with seven channels. Declare in your heart: "I connect John with seven channels to his lion." Command the animal, (or animals): "Fly to the black worlds." Watch as it flies away; usually it will fly to the left side. Disconnect all the channels. Declare: "I disconnect all channels between John and his lion, (and the other animals)." Imagine the disconnection as if cut with scissors. Ask the guides if the process has been completed and if everything is okay. You can watch and see some kind of a black shadow, like a magician's black cloak being released above the client and rise up until it disappears. Now that the client has been released, healing can be accepted.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8.
9.
Very important: from now on, before every treatment, you will have to apply to your NEHAMA group and verify three things with them: A. B. C. Does the client suffer from 'harassment of the negative polarity' and is a cosmic war required? What is the condition of the soul--are there any parts missing? Is there a need for 'retrieval of soul parts'? Is there a need to perform 'soul redemption'? If so, 'soul redemption' becomes first priority and should be done before any other treatment.
155
Soul Splitting by Archangel Raphael

(Channeling January 2001) The soul may encounter the problem of splitting. Difficult strikes may cause it to crash and sparks will blow off it. From one energetic mass the soul becomes an injured, torn, and missing body. How does this happen? It can happen to a person who was hurt by another person who deals with black magic and spells of all sorts. This is a person who is devoted to serving the black polarity, in other words, working for the devil. Such a person has the powers to harm and his harm can be expressed in different forms: 1. 2. He can hurt the physical wholeness of a person; cause him diseases, hurts and sensitivities. He is capable of hurting the light body with an energetic strike that will shift the hurt person from balance, cause him interferences that will later become a base for developing physical and mental illnesses, shake the person in a way that the conventional medicine cannot treat. He can steal soul parts. He will do this after he hurts the soul, causes its crashing and scattering of sparks from it. He is also able to control on the victim and directly steal soul parts from him.
3.
In any case this is a very bad situation for the victim, because he remains exposed and vulnerable to all types of other attacks that may arrive from other places and he does not have the power and strength to resist. His stores of courage, hope, strength, and stamina run low and he tries to draw in those energies from other places, for example from other people--what might be expressed as dependency, or he himself is binding to the negative polarity in hope of gaining strength from it. He may indeed receive them, but then he might hurt other victims. The person who causes the damage can only hurt his victim once, even though it can be for a long period. If the victim recovers, he's immune from that harmful person for good. Recovering signifies to have enough spiritual powers to stand against the harmful person, or to retrieve to himself his own lost soul parts. Negative and traumatic events that the person has been through and severe emotional blows that he has received can also hurt and cause a soul splitting. Another way is self-hurt. The man himself can hurt his own soul if he is in an internal quarrel with himself and with himself and his soul. He may also give away his soul parts unknowingly, whether it is out of love or out of a strong need to bind the other person to him. From now on, never say: 'I love this child so much, I will give him my soul.' Never say: 'I've given this person my soul so now he owes me, he is mine.' It is forbidden! Whether consciously or not, the person is responsible for keeping his soul whole.
Symptoms of Soul Splitting In order to know the way to healing, first you have to identify the case. Here is a general description of a person who had been a victim of having parts of his soul spread or stolen. There are different levels of damage, so I'll give a description of an extreme case: Due to spreading parts of the soul, the victim suffers from lack of energies, a daily drain of energies. He tends to lie down a lot, sleep a lot, eat a lot, hoping that the food will give him back some of the lost energy, thus appear phenomena of weight gain, and compulsive eating, cases of bulimia, (when the damaging person is the mother) and cases of chronic fatigue. The energy drainage puts the victim in distress. He feels that something is wrong but cannot tell what. He feels that there is no logical reason for his chronic fatigue and weakness, feeling helpless and guilty for being unable to function as normally as before. Energy drainage can cause fainting, depression, mood
156
change without an apparent reason, irritation, frustration, and in extreme cases, suicidal tendencies. This situation can go on for many years. Doctors, professionals, and other people refer the problem to wrong causes and the victim feels too weak to deal with those errant diagnoses as well. He feels humiliated, his life is stuck, there is no flow of natural occurrence as it should have happened according to the Divine plan, the difficulties pile up when the solution is actually simple and easy.
Retrieving Lost Soul Parts Call upon the NEHAMA group that is responsible for the wellbeing of the soul; ask what the condition of the client's soul is. They will tell you if there is a need for a process for retrieving soul parts. If you wish the NEHAMA group can tell you exactly how many parts are missing. If a complete soul means a hundred percent, then you can specify what percentage is missing. If a whole soul is a jigsaw of a hundred parts, then you can count exactly how many parts are missing from it. Many people live and function in a more or less 'normal' way up to a deficiency of about ten percent of the soul missing, beyond that you start to feel the damage. Unfortunately, I've treated people that had about fifty percent or more of their soul missing. A girl that lacked seventy-nine parts of her soul was the most extreme case that I have met. She wasn't functioning for a long time, hardly left her bed or her house, was very depressed, and thought about suicide all the time. Retrieving parts of her soul put her back on her feet at an unbelievable speed. All those lost sparks of the soul are scattered across the universe, hanging and waiting for the reunion day when they are called back, and they can return and join to create one complete soul. Imagine the following scenario: see many children, shy, lost, who had plagues and problems fall on their homes, dispersing them. Since then, they are scattered all over wandering with no address, and without existence. Some are alone; some are in small or large groups because each one had been torn from his home in a different terrible event, at a different time. They listen all the time for their parents to call them, and invite them to come back home but the poor parents are sick, helpless, and are not at all aware that their children are missing. One day the call arrives, loud and clear above all the noises of the city. The sleeping children awaken at once, attuned to the call. They have been waiting for it a long time. They start on their way towards home. A second call hurries them along, strengthening the choice of the parents to receive them back. They arrive at the door, and hesitate. A third call summons them to hurry inside. Now comes the happy exciting moment of reunion. The house is full of light, laughter, and love. This is not a fantasy! This is exactly how the retrieval of soul parts happens.
The Treatment Procedure Prepare the client for retrieving his soul parts. Explain to him about the damage and treatment. Tell him what he might feel or see, (of course, it is recommended that you first try the treatment on yourself.) Sit next to the client. Put him in a meditative state. Guide him to repeat, silently or aloud, each sentence that you say. First call: "I John Doe, send a call to the universe, and call to all parts of my soul, wherever they are, to come back and return into my soul being, and join into one complete soul." The call goes out, as if from a loudspeaker to the entire universe. The frequency of the person, which is unique to him, like a fingerprint, awakens his soul sparks which respond and come back to him.
157
Deep breathe and a second call: "I John Doe, put an announcement on the Cosmic bulletin board and call to all the parts of my soul that have been lost in time and space, or that have been stolen, or have been given away, to return and come back to me, and join into one complete soul." You can perceive an extraordinary occurrence: sparks of light that look like shining stars arrive and gather, standing in a line, creating a consecutive line in the shape of a sparkling arc, at an angle of fortyfive degrees above the client. Some arrive one at a time, some arrive in pairs or groups--it indicates the way in which they were dispersed to begin with, and the intensity of the damage. Another interesting point is, that sometimes I can see certain sparks looking shaggy as if they were maltreated, or suffering. If you have time and you would really like to know, you can talk to them and hear details about what happened to them, under what event they had been separated from the whole, etc. Direct your client to see the splendid sight. Some of the clients can see the sparks and some can feel them. Deep breath, and a third call: "I John Doe, call upon all my soul parts that have returned and invite you to join into one complete soul. I need you, and I want you." This call is meant to show that the client is responsible for his condition and declares that he wishes to be well. Once the words are said, a spectacular flight of soul sparks goes towards the client. They detach one by one from the arc, in an orderly manner from right to left, and go through his solar plexus into the body. Even though they fly quickly--their entry is soft. Like raindrops that are falling quickly from the sky onto a lake and gently fade into the water sending circles around and around. Wait until all the sparks have gone in. Let the client connect to himself. In the next few moments he will go through a process of recovery and acceptance that is irreplaceable. Different emotions may flood him: joy and real inner happiness, a feeling of coming home, a flooding of peace and quiet mingled with sadness. At first the client may feel some kind of energetic running around in the center of his being, as if his entire light body is being rearranged and every part is looking and finding its position. Then he will feel warm waves that spread all over his body. It is a unique experience that shouldn't be missed.
Ceremony of Forgiveness and Pardon, and Connecting to the Soul The next section is as meaningful and important as what has happened so far. The client has allowed himself to arrive to a situation of losing parts of his soul because of an internal dispute between him and his soul. It is important that he understand that for the future. Unconsciously, a person knows that was his soul that had made choices and had made decisions before birth. It is the one that decided how he was going to run his life, who his parents were going to be, what he would look like, and so on. If he doesn't accept and receive himself and his life, then he's angry. He turns his anger towards his soul level until a break is formed. This condition exposes and weakens him, and brings him to a vulnerability that ends in splitting the soul. Guide the client to hug himself with both arms; he's coming full circle. Receiving and self-acceptance is a heart-touching and emotional ceremony in which most clients start crying in relief and liberation. Blessing: "I John Doe call upon all the parts of my soul that have returned, and bless you on your return. I bless my soul. I apply to my soul and ask to connect to you. I don't want to be angry with you any longer. I want to make peace with you. I ask for your forgiveness. I ask for your forgiveness (say it twice,) for allowing you to be hurt like that. I did not know. I ask you, my soul, to fill me up with your presence and flood me with your love." Within two seconds an amazing flow of love energy passes through the entire body like an orgasm. The connection has been completed.
158
What is Expected after the Treatment? First, the mental/emotional condition of the person will improve at once. He's happier, balanced, at peace with himself. In the next stage there is also an improvement in his cognitive condition, his concentration, his focus, his memory. From day to day he recovers and becomes stronger; there is no more energy loss. The wholeness of his soul provides him wholeness in all the other levels of his existence and radiates stability, strength, and the ability to overcome problems and challenges that life provides him. His immune system improves. He gains control on different compulsive behaviors. He opens up to life, gets out, is ready for new things to arrive. In the long range, the wholeness of the soul will give him a stable base for a continued accelerated spiritual development. New abilities have developed in him; his abstract thinking becomes stronger. In summary, a process of growth begins. Though it may not be felt from one day to another, but on a time perspective. What does it similar too? When you wake up your child in the morning you are not aware that he has grown an eighth of an inch during the night--but you would certainly notice this growth when you are preparing his winter clothes from last year, seeing that the shirtsleeves reach his elbows, and the pants to his knees.
159
Energy Retrieval-by the Guides Orin, Ariel, Father of Peace, Father of Compassion, Father of Safety
(Channeling February 2001) ME: "My guides, you have said that the person loses energies? What are those energies? How do you lose them?" Guides: "Margalit, the person spreads energies every time he does something, or thinks, or is trying to learn. Trying to learn is a different condition than learning. When a person is really learning--the energy is used precisely on the learning process, but in a situation of trying to learn, the energy isn't used for that instant for various reasons, such as lack of focus, lack of concentration, tiredness, etc." ME: "I understand that the energy spreads in the universe when the person spends it on a certain cause and doesnt achieve it, a sort of waste of energy." Guides: "Yes and no. Each such event should be examined on its own. Let's return to the matter of 'trying to perform something'. For example, a person wants to perform a daily act such as organizing the room, starting the washing machine, playing sports. These actions do not need more energy than they normally require, but the person dedicates more energy to them. "It is about his attitude, his way of thinking, his way of acting, the way he is performing tasks. Every task, even one which looks to you as if it requires a lot of energy, can be performed with less energy. The person looks more like they are attacking the task instead of doing it with ease. If it's a task that he doesn't like to do but it forms part of his daily routine, it will require much more energy from him and he will feel agitated later. A man can climb a mountain, enjoy it, traveling, looking at nature around him, and he will not become so tired as by turning on the washing machine or washing the dishes, if those actions are hateful to him." ME: "Okay, I get the idea, how does this express in thinking? Why, when a man thinks he spends energy?" Guides: "It is not about a single thought that crosses the person's mind, or remembering something he has to do, but thought that a man thinks when he's trying, for example, to organize things in his mind. To understand an inexplicable phenomenon, (like you are doing now) which he is trying hard to understand. Energy is wasted when a person tries to perform sel f-awareness, but he is restricted and stuck and doesn't advance. Or, when a person sums up in his mind a certain incident that happened to him, (usually a negative one) like the accident he had this morning. HE goes over the details in his mind again and again, and so on, there are countless examples. The higher the self-awareness of the person, the more tools he has to understand his thoughts and to organize them in the right order, the less energy he spends thinking. For you, Margalit, it's hard to understand the idea, this concept. Your brain is working now at an increased flow, at high activity, processing the information that we have given you in the last minutes, to find reason in them, an order, a method; to assimilate them in your knowledge system. Only then will you calm down. "Meanwhile, you waste a lot of energy. Pay attention Margalit, we didn't say that you only consume a lot of energy but also waste it. That is you spend energies to perform the thinking, the processing, the understanding, etc., in high quantity and much more than needed." ME: "I don't understand. In order to hear what you say, understand, think about it, and accept the things, I have to look into them, to think them over in order to adjust them to my system of ideas, so how is this considered a waste?" Guides: "You have answered yourself! If you had passed from listening to us to an automatic acceptance of matters, then you would have only consumed the amount of energy required without waste. The rest of
160
the action that you do in the meantime is a waste. You think about things, try to 'doubt' them in order to find whether the theory or the information you received is true. You do not accept them automatically. "Your students on the other hand, may listen and accept the things with less waste of energy since they trust you and the information that you bring them. They receive processed information, digested and edited, which you have already taken care to ask about, verified, criticized it, etc. "For studying the same subject--with you the energy is consumed and wasted, with your students, the energy is consumed only, and not wasted." ME: "Okay. I understand the matter of wasting and dispersing energy. Where does the wasted energy go? Is it as if it were burned while the wasting action is being done? Doesnt it disappear?" Guides: "No. Energies are never being lost in a Cosmic sense. They can change places, change form, change frequencies, etc. In principle, energy that belongs to you remains yours, even if it gets lost throughout the universe. It has your mark, and it's your right to have it return to you. The energy itself will be happy to return to you." ME: "Orin, this reminds me a little of the matter of retrieving lost soul parts. Is it similar?" Orin: "It is both similar and different. The idea of being lost or stolen or been given by a person, is similar in both cases, but we are talking about a different type of energy. A soul is intact energy, one unit that has no replacement, nor can it be reproduced. The person cannot recreate it. "On the other hand, in energy there is self-reproduction. Not because the person manufactures it, because such manufacturing does not exist. In any case, it arrives from the universe, goes through the person, and receives its personal mark. In this sense, you people see this energy as manufactured by the person himself. You say: 'This person is full of energy. Where does he get it from?' These sentences express surprise by the people around him--how can this person produce so much energy?" ME: "But doesn't a person produce energy himself? We tell our children: 'Eat and you'll have strength.' " Guides: "Correct, you eat food but you don't produce the energy, you only translate it. Actually you receive the energy of your food and consume it after an adaptation that you do. Without food you would not have energy. Now let's go back to the first mater we talked about, wasting energy." ME: "Energies that we've wasted are getting lost all over the universe. Aren't they being used in any other way? Or by someone else, in a different way?" Guides: "No, definitely not! The energies that you have wasted are waiting for you. They will return to you after you die. When you go back to being only a soul, and energy without a body, you will be united with your 'lost' energies. Your energies return and join together as the soul ascends to the higher worlds, to create one complete wholeness. You can say that the moment of death is a cosmic call to all that belongs to you to come back and join into one wholeness, including the lost soul parts." ME: "But you would like to teach us to retrieve our lost energies in this life. Is that a special privilege?" Guides: "Depending on your perception. To whom the knowledge and the wisdom has been given, naturally for him it's a great privilege, but you Margalit, and now your students, have already received a lot of privileges and different gifts. The knowledge on retrieving lost energies is no longer as central and significant." ME: "Can we get along without it?" Guides: "Absolutely, yes. You have new and other energy resources all the time"
161
ME: "Then what is it for?" Guides: "It is important for you regarding your wholeness. Retrieving your lost energies back will give you wholeness, a base, tranquility, strength, and fortitude. As for the idea, what belongs to you is yours and should be with you." ME: "Something like Cosmic justice?" Guides: "Exactly. Cosmic justice. Returning things to order, mending wrongs." ME: "Okay, I am ready. What do we do now?" Guides: "The ceremony for retrieving lost energies is exactly the same ceremony for retrieving lost soul parts. The same process exactly." ME: "Can my students learn to retrieve for themselves, lost soul parts if they learn how to retrieve their lost energies?" Guides: "Absolutely, they can learn how to do it for themselves, and then with their clients. At first they will need your guidance and treatment. They will first have to learn the process, understand it and remember the text. Maybe perform the process with the instructions from their guides." ME: "Those students and clients with whom I've already done the process of retrieving soul parts, their souls are whole now. Won't they have any other opportunity to do it on themselves?" Guides: "It is not quiet like that. Soul parts can always be dispersed around the universe if they have reasons and motives for it. Just the way it happened the first time. Energies will probably continue to be wasted. Pay attention, Margalit, this time you receive the knowledge and the tools to deal with such cases, and can mend the wrong." ME: "Yes, this is wonderful and I thank you for it. Can you assure that such phenomena will not happen to us again?" Guides: "No. It is not like cleaning your energetic surroundings as a one-time thing and put protection for a long time. It's a different process that you as people participate in, in one level or another of awareness. Now go into the process and call your lost and stolen energies back to you." ME: "Excuse me, just one moment. If my energy was stolen by another person, doesn't this mean that he has already wasted it or made it his?" Guides: "Your energy is yours! Like we said, it has your signature and it belongs to you. This person can use it for his own needs, but you are at all times entitled to reclaim it for yourself. It is not being wasted in the sense that you people understand. It was used for a certain task and then changed position and state, nothing more. It still exists and awaits to return to you." ME: "If the energy knows that it is lost or stolen and waits to return to me--why doesn't it simply return? The same goes for stolen soul parts. Why don't they just return?" Guides: "It's a matter of choice. Your freedom of choice as a person, remember? Maybe you don't want this energy or your soul parts at all? Maybe you choose to continue to live the way you are?" ME: "Are there any people who would prefer this option? Isn't that being silly on their part?" Guides: "This also depends on your point of view, Margalit. Is it being foolish to commit suicide? Is it foolish to develop a lethal disease? Is it being foolish to choose to participate in an event that will bring about your death?"
162
ME: "Of course!" Guides: "Margalit, a man that has lost hope and decides to commit suicide will think at the same time that he is being foolish to stay alive, that it is foolish to stay in the world the way it now looks. When there is an option to go to heaven, go back home, to the light and love, to the peace and tranquility. As we said, it's all a matter of perspective and point of view. Are you ready now?"
Stealing Energy Stealing energy is a very common, annoying occurrence. Dependant people whose emotional world is lacking, unstable, people who constantly need to receive help, attention, love, support, and reinforcement from other people are likely to be energy thieves. You can identify an energy thief in different ways: this person will be a compulsive talker; he will touch you, get close to you, (will invade your personal space,) etc. Usually such a person, when you see him walking down the street, you will cross the street to avoid meeting him. In your heart you call him, 'this pest'. You intuitively feel that 'you have no energy for him'. With time you notice that after every meeting with him you feel exhausted and drained. You can see how energy is being drawn out of the Crown chakra of one person, (or from a different chakra--depending what kind of support the thief needs,) and flows to the second person. The theft is being reinforced by closeness but can easily also be done from a distance, even from both sides of Earth.
The Treatment Procedure Identify channels that connect the energy thief and the victim, (your client,) and disconnect them. Connect the thief to another source. With no other source, connect him to the angels or to the Creator so that he can receive the energies that he needs from them. If the thief insists on reconnecting to your client, close the thief within a dark blue light blue light bubble, (see chapter Protection Bubble). Ask the bubble to prevent the thief from sending channels toward your client. Make an agreement to extend the work for six months. Draw a channel from the bubble to the black hole and ask the black hole to ground the negative energies from the sealing bubble, (to prevent harm). Make an agreement with the black hole to extend the work for six months. For more security surround your client with a shell, (like a second skin).
Retrieving Lost Energies You can perform retrieving lost energies as a treatment by itself or add it to a continuation of the process of retrieving soul parts. Prepare the client for the retrieval of his energies, explain to him what it is all about, what he may feel or see, (it is recommended that you first try and treat yourself). Sit by the client, there is no need to put him in a meditative state. Guide him to repeat, silently or aloud, each phrase that you say: First call: "I John Doe, send a call to the univ erse, and call to all my energies, wherever they are, to come back and return into me, and fill me up." The call goes out and spreads throughout the universe. The lost energies of the person respond to the frequency of their owner. Deep breathe and a second call: "I John Doe, put an announcement on the Cosmic bulletin board and call to all my energies that have been lost in time and space, or that have been stolen, or have been given away, to return and come back to me, and fill me up."
163
Usually two calls are sufficient. The energies arrive at the speed of light from all directions. They come back and go into the client's body through all the chakras according to the way they were spent in the first place, (by thinking, by sex, by emotions, etc.). These are colorful energies, but due to their speed they look like white veils with an occasional pink or light blue hue. The client can feel the flow that occurs inside him. First it is weak but it increases and gets stronger until it reaches a peak. The feeling is sensational. Do not skip this treatment.
What is Expected after the Treatment? Peace, tranquility, balance, energetic renewal that brings prosperity in all ways, strength to have new experiences, the power to resist the hardships of life, the joy of creation, sexual stamina, a youthful spirit. What else does a person need?
164
Part Four: High Spiritual Healing

Demons
Demons are manifestations of black energies that locate in the body. There are demons that arrive as emissaries of the negative polarity and enter into the body, and there are demons that are formed in the body, self-manufactured by the person himself. Either way, things are connected to each other: demons cannot enter into the person if he doesn't allow it, or give them entry. He m ay magnetize and draw demons to him, by negative thinking, with negative emotions, with fears, with anger, with depression, and so on, the way like attracts like. These are dark creatures that feed on those types of energies. All demons work in the body as blocks that interfere with the correct flow of energy in the body. They can be found anywhere, even in the head. Their aim is to interfere, to prevent healing, to jeopardize, and cause diseases and a large range of problems at all levels--physical, emotional, cognitive, and spiritual.
What Do Demons Look Like? Dark entities, emissaries of the devil, exist in all shapes and sizes. I will focus here on the 'small' demons that can be found in almost any person. These demons look like little black 'trolls', some with dark sticky messy hair. They may appear as individuals but can also multiple to entire families, from grandparents to tiny babies. The young ones have squeaky voices; the big mature demons have lower pitched voices. When exposed they try to escape by running around the body. Sometimes they cause excruciating pain to the client as they run. When they are trapped and removed, they squirm, resist, and scream, but they don't stand a chance.
How to Discover Demons The demons hide behind a person's energetic blocks, just as reptiles and insects hide under rocks in the fields. A massive cleaning and removal of blocks from the client expose them. I've already mentioned before, a dark entity that may reside inside a person's head and had been exposed after a cleaning process of removing negative thoughts, and thoughts that became independent. You can also find out before a treatment if a client has any demons, how many, and where: You can ask your Crown. You can ask your guides. You can telepathically ask the body of client --it will tell you exactly. You can ask the NEHAMA group.
How to Remove Demons Apply to the Creator and ask for his help. Ask for instructions from your guides. Find out where the demons are in the client's body and focus on that area. 1. Place your hands above the area and magnetize the demons so that they will not escape or run around the body. In one magnetizing process, you can catch an entire family of demons. Freeze the demons that you magnetized with 'intense cold'. Listen: the Creator is giving words of warning. This is a last call for the demons, like giving a last chance for those who wish to leave by their own volition. It may sound like that: "I command you
2. 3.
165
to leave the body of this person who is found under my full protection." (The version you hear might be different.) 4. Now magnetize and draw them out slowly so that you will not lose any demons from this heavy cluster. Pull and lift your arms to the height of twelve to eighteen inches above the client's body. You can see them squirm and hear them scream. Wait until the angels take the demons away from you. You can also decide to ask your Crown to send a golden thread to tie up the demons and toss them into the black worlds. Wait for an affirmation that your hands are clean, then repeat the process in a different area of the body until you are finished removing all the demons. Make sure that there aren't any demons left hiding in deep levels of the body.
5.
6.
7.
Sometimes while exposing the demons, some kind of a white cloud, sticky like dough erupts. It is meant to deceive and to make the removal process more difficult. You can invite capsules and pack this energy in them and send them to the black worlds. You can also clean the area by other means. Be creative; invent tools for your work.
Diabolic Entities
This is not a job for you--but for the heavens. Sometimes during the process of removing demons, the guides will warn you and ask you to pull your hands from the client and move backwards. The explanation: the existence of a diabolic entity. These are dark entities from a higher level. Diabolic entities can be discovered almost immediately at the beginning of the process and sometimes only after the extensive cleansing, rem oving blocks and demons. In my work, I have met two types of diabolic entities, the masculine figure, and the feminine figure--Lilith. They are both big--the full size of a person. Lilith is identified easily. When you look in the client's face, you can see the face changes to the face of a beautiful woman with long hair hanging on the sides, appearing and disappearing several times. Lilith is dangerous because she can leave behind embryos and seeds; therefore they need to be removed as well. She never returns to the same person because he is already immunized.
Removing a Diabolic Entity If the client is an understanding person, you can share with him and tell him what is going on, but this is not necessary. Watch and see what happens now. From above a big wide beam of light, like a tube descends. The light is white, warm and radiant. The beam may connect to the head, or the back of the head, or the upper back. Soon after, the diabolic entity is being pulled out at great speed, and is drawn up the beam of light. Some of the clients feel suction or something exiting. Certain diabolic entities emerge from red and black flames. Some threaten or curse and their voice is low and creepy. Don't get excited and don't be frightened, the Creator is with you. You are in no danger of being hurt, and neither is your family. In any case, don't start any argument or conversations with them. On the contrary, Lilith lives quietly, and after her live seven embryos in a typical embryonic position.
166
Usually there is no problem with the diabolic entities since their power does not match the power of the Creator and they are helpless under his light.
Spiritual Possessions
The name spiritual possession implicates an act of adhesion. The spirit of a dead person adheres to the body of a living person, causing him damage. There are two types of spiritual possession--an active possession and a quiet possession. In both cases these are illegal activities according to the laws of the universe and there is a need to interfere and to correct the wrong. Many spirits live as souls that are attached to the earth due to various reasons, those spirits did not liberate from their earthy bonds, and they are stuck in between the dimensions. Sometimes they adhere to a living body as part of the illusion that they have a life and a body, and they thrive on the person's life energy.
An Active Spiritual Possession (Also Called Control by an Evil Spirit) This situation is rarer than the quiet spiritual possession. It can occur only in cas es where the person is at a very low condition in every possible way: physical, mental, energetic, and spiritual. If he has elements of self-hatred that bring about self-harm, and self-destruction. An addiction to drugs or alcohol. A physical or spiritual illness that leaves him exhausted, lifeless, and helpless. A tendency for negative thinking, fears and anxieties to an extreme. Depression, low moods, and deep desperation. In other words, a mental state of giving up life. In this condition the person is like someone who abandons his home, leaves it without guards, leaves all the doors and windows wide open, and spreads notices all over the city: 'I have left the house, anyone who wishes to come is welcome to stay. I don't care about anything.' The acti ve spiritual possession doesn't settle with clinging to the live body, but it also tries to take control of it. The person who is in such a low condition doesn't pay attention and is not aware of the occurrence, and hence, he doesn't protect himself, doesn't fight, and doesn't express any kind of objection until the control actions of the possession have gone too far. First the spiritual possession will try to dictate to the person thoughts and wishes that aren't his. Then it will control his way of life and cause changes in life habits and behaviors, will direct him to choices and actions which are not natural to him, use his body parts, his vocal cords and so on. The higher the degree of manipulation of the person, by the spiritual possession, the worse his condition is. Removal of an active spiritual possession requires from the spiritual healer elevated skills, internal purity, self-awareness, and an extremely high emotional stability. Above all, the healer is asked to have total and complete faith in the Creator. If some fear exists in him, or the slightest doubt stains his faith, he might be hurt. Like in removal of diabolic entities, this is also a work with the heavens, with the Creator. Evil stands no chance against the Creator. After removing the active spiritual possession, the client must do a profound overall change in his life perception and heal his personality, because a sick personality may magnetize a spiritual possession to him once again. He must do a work of self-awareness, become stronger, learn to stick only to positive thinking and neutralize all forms of negative thinking. He must understand that a balanced, healthy, and strong emotional condition is vital for him.
167
Negative thinking is a luxury that a person cannot permit himself. There is also a need to purify his light body, (an energetic cleansing and purification,) his energetic space, (a cosmic war,) his home and belongings, (purifying with diviner lights.) The condition of his soul should be checked as well, and if necessary, perform a retrieval of soul parts, soul redemption, retrieval of lost energies, and provide him with all the possible treatments for a long period of time. Case study: Sarah, a young woman of twenty-seven, arrived to me from the far north, accompanied by her family: her father, her mother and her brother after a long day of travel. This involved releasing Sarah for one day from a mental asylum where she had been staying for over ten years. They described the problem: Sarah had been diagnosed as a schizophrenic. Very strange things had happened to her. Every now and then, completely unexpected, another personality appeared in her. Very unpleasant vocal and violent, she expressed a destructive and threatening behavior, and had been difficult to control. As well, Sarah had been depressed, desperate and wished to die. She didn't function, had no social life, could neither work nor study. Her family members, who enjoyed outings and trips, couldn't take her anywhere. After much hesitation they added, at night , when she slept, she would talk in a masculine voice. The treatment: Removing the spiritual possession went smoothly with no problems. I urged her family to continue to bring Sarah back for a session of treatments. I stressed and explained the importanc e of constant maintenance in a case like this. They bid goodbye in a good and optimistic mood and went on their way. I only heard from the family two years later when the father called. When I asked why hadn't they returned to continue the treatment he replied that the geographic distance made it difficult for them, and said that after the treatment, Sarah got better, had been released from the hospital and functioned well, until that day Two nights ago, the same old masculine voice was heard coming from her. I invited them to another treatment.
A Quiet Spiritual Possession This is a spiritual possession that is more difficult to discover since it is quiet and inactive, ye t, it is much more common than what people think. As opposed to the active spiritual possession, which is considered an evil spirit, the quiet spiritual possession is a spirit that is not necessarily evil. On the contrary, in all the cases of quiet spiritual possession that I have treated, it involved a miserable lost soul who had been trapped on the earthly plane, and attached to a living body out of an illusion of continuing its life, rather than harboring bad intentions. While the active spiritual possession enters deep levels of a person, the quiet spiritual possession usually stays close to the outer shell of the aura. Freeing and removing this spirit is an act of compassion and love. It is a holy action. Since the spiritual possession nurtures from the energy of his host, as well as blocks the natural energetic flow, long term damage can occur. The client may complain about odd feelings that have no explanation: heaviness, pulling, chills on only one side of the body, whereas in other body parts he feels warm and comfortable, shivers, and numb limbs. People who are overly sensitive may feel that something 'won't wash off', something clings to them, and in other cases, they experience a disturbing feeling that they are not alone. In the long run --a disease may develop, pains, partial functioning of the body or a specific organ in the body. In order to find out if the client has a quiet spiritual possession, apply to your guides or to your Crown, or ask the client's body. You may also receive an image of a face or a strange figure clinging to the client.
168
How to Release a Quiet Spiritual Possession Magnetize the spiritual possession to your hands so that it does not escape and telepathically talk to him. Try to have a conversation with him. Don't scare him, and don't frighten him in any way. Be gentle and considerate--it could be a very frightened soul and when it is discovered, it panics and its voice usually sounds trembling and begging. You can ask the possession for details: who are you, what is your name, when did you die, and so on. It's not obligatory. Try to explain to him that this body is not his and he cannot stay there. He may try to argue with you, claiming that this is 'his home'. Tell him that he has to leave and go to the heavens, to God. Guide him to look around, look for light. Tell him that he needs to go to the light. It may be that the spiritual possession was the soul of a person, who was killed or died suddenly without preparation. It may be that he is afraid to be punished for past actions. There are many reasons why he did not go up. Calm him, tell him that angels will accompany him, that they will take him up where he will be received with much love, that there is no punishment, and he should not be afraid. Slowly pull him out by magnetizing, angels will support him and carry him on both sides. Together they will go up and leave, bless him, tell him 'Good luck, and all the best'. Case study: Abraham, a man of forty, arrived with an odd complaint, he was completely healthy, had no disease and no problems, other than the fact that he was always cold on the right hand side of his upper back. Even during the summer. He felt shivers, itching, and lately had a back ache that changed position all the time. The treatment: I looked and saw that from the area of Abraham's right shoulder, a face was looking at me. I made telepathic contact. ME: "Who are you?" Possession: "I am me" (The voice is that of an adult.) ME: "What is your name?" Possession: "Ephraim." (The voice trembled and sounded frightened.) ME: "Ephraim, don't be afraid, you know you have to leave this body, it is not yours." Possession: "No, this is my home Where would I go?" ME: "You have to go up to the heavens." Possession: "I'm afraid." ME: "What are you afraid of?" Possession: "A punishment." ME: "Ephraim, you don't need to be afraid, there are no punishments in heaven. Look around, do you see a light?" Possession: "Yes. What's there?" ME: "God is there. That's where you must go, to God."
169
Possession: "How do you know? Are you an angel?" ME: "No, I am not an angel, but I talk to angels." Possession: "What will they do to me? ME: "They will receive you with love, embraces, you will meet your parents, your friends, you're going to be okay. Are you willing to leave?" Possession: "I can't do it." ME: "I'l l help you, and the angels will too. The angels will accompany you all the way up, they will guard you." I slowly drew him out by magnetizing. Angels take him from my hands and they go up and disappear. ME: "Goodbye Ephraim, good luck."
Possession by a Living Person Sometimes you can find a quiet possession that adheres to the body of a person, and is part of the aura of a living person, not a dead one. It can happen in symbiotic relationships, dependant relationships, and mutual addiction, or great mutual influence. Familiar expression that we use in daily life such as: 'he clings to me', or 'he's breathing down my back', etc. receive a new meaning. A person who hooks on to someone else out of a strong will to be part of his life, influence him, and manipulate him, may unconsciously disconnect part of his aura and attach it to the other person. In this way he constantly influences his victim. In my perception I see a possession by a living person as something that is between an active spiritual possession and a quiet spiritual possession. He doesn't try to take over the body, but he definitely manipulates the victim and influences his way of thinking. This part of the aura functions as a possession in every way, acts as a block and causes problems. There fore, it should be separated from the victim and the angels will take it back to the living owner. Case study: A client of mine brought in her eighteen year old son, Omar. He was about to join the army. Since she was a single mother and he was an only child he had the right to serve close to home. The son didn't stop talking about volunteering to the Special Forces. The mother cried day and night, worrying for his safety. He was blocked to her tears and pleas. While I explained to the mother that it was not my job to convince him, and my work did not include such things, I perceived a life-size image of a person clinging to Omar's back. I contacted the image telepathically and asked who he was. I received an answer: Asa. I asked the mother and son, who was Asa? The mother went pale. Since Omar was quiet and lowered his eyes, she said: "It's a friend of Omar. Ever since they are together, I don't recognize my son. He does only what Asa tells him to do, even breathes when Asa tells him to. The idea of joining the Special Forces is also Asa's idea." I separated the possession from Omar and sent it to where it belonged. How does the story end? I don't know, but there is a lot to learn from it.
170
An Unborn Baby I encountered this unusual phenomenon while treating a female client. From her womb, I heard the voice of a crying baby. I called him and asked who he was. The answer was: "I am the baby that wasn't born." I released him and angels took him up. I gently asked my client if she had a lost pregnancy in the past. She was emotional, and painfully confirmed that indeed she had once lost a baby. She had wanted him very much, and mourned over him for a long time. Still she was tormented with feelings of guilt to this day. A possible explanation: Possibly the woman herself did not liberate the soul of the fetus because she did not accept the loss. She wanted the baby so much she couldn't let go.
The 'Beam of God'

If you are a healer at a high spiritual level and the universe summons to you clients that need to be released from diabolic entities and different demons, and you do it routinely: with a sureness, with skill, and with a complete connection to the powers of light, then you are entitled for helping means in this holy work that you do. Ask the guides, and if you are ready, you will receive a device that is located behind the eyes and the forehead. This device is connected to the Crown chakra and works in the following manner: with the activation, the light of the Creator is being drawn in through the Crown and then it is sent through the third eye in an intensity that is focused as a beam--this is the 'Beam of God'. You shoot the 'Beam of God' in order to hit, shock, and scare off demons, evil spirits, diabolic entities, and demolition angels of all kinds and levels. Now you no longer need to magnetize the demons with your hands --shoot the 'Beam of God' to your client and they will run away like rats from a sinking ship.
How to Activate the 'Beam of God' 1. Stand in front of the client, declare: "I fire my 'Beam of God' towards the client." The declaration activates the shooting. 'Draw' a Star of David with the Beam in the front of the client's body, then turn him and draw a second Star of David on his back. The Stars of David will appear painted in gold. Watch the diabolic entities running out of the client in all directions --even from his head and limbs.
2.
3.
You can use your 'Beam of God' to help the angels with their war against different dark entities. If you are aware of, watching, or participating in such a war, activate the 'Beam of God' against 'the black ones'
Shooting Historical Bodies with the 'Beam of God' You can fire the 'Beam of God' towards the patient and draw a Star of David on his front and back as you declare: "I shoot all of John's historical bodies." The Beam will scare away entities and part of the insects and reptiles from all the historical bodies of the client (see chapter The Great Grounding).
171
Energetic Image of the Disease

Diseases and problems reflect in the light body of a person like a blueprint printed on a transparency. When you look in the light body of a person, looking for diseases and problems, you are like a doctor who is looking at an x-ray against the light box. Between you and the client's body a telepathic dialogue is being formed: you ask it a question and he sends you an answer, the information that you had requested, though not with words and sentences but with images, symbols, drawings, and pictures. Every disease or problem is born out of a decision. It can be an internal decision, extremely deep, by the person himself that comes out of reasons such as, self-destruction, self-punishment, or a need to gain some kind of psychological benefit from it. However, such a blueprint could be embedded in the light body, not only by the person himself but by the negative polarity and its emissaries or by another person who deals with drawing black energies from the negative polarity--the person who curses, the one who wishes you to be sick, adhering to your light body the blueprint that he made for you. At the moment of the decision, a general blueprint starts to form, (what disease will it be, how expanded will it be, where will it reach, etc.) This entire blueprint is imprinted on the 'transparency', which is the light body. This is the image that precedes the eruption of the disease itself like a plan that fulfills itself later. All that is left for the physical body to do is adjust itself to the blueprint, Start growing tumors, cancer, or any other disease. This way you can see in the light body of the client, not only his present illnesses but also his future ones, since they already appear in the blueprint, they are imprinted on the transparency. In the image language that takes place between the client and the healer, the diseases may appear in representations such as cans, glasses, zigzags, different junks, (see chapter Different Junk). They may also appear exactly as they are, transparent or opaque images of tumors, cysts, or other deformities. If you see animals that look like a spider or crab, the symbolism is clear. You may notice a representation of the disease in the client's light body, many years before it erupts and manifests in the physical body. Or, if the disease has already started and has been discovered, you can see that the blueprint is larger than the disease. Examples: If you see a fire bursting from a person's head, but he claims that he has no problem with his head, not even slight headaches, it means that soon something will happen or be discovered, (a strong migraine, a growth, a stroke). Unfortunately fire symbolizes a harsh event or disease. If a woman has cysts in her uterus and in her light body you'll see the image of the cysts as larger than what would be shown in an x-ray, it means that the physical body has not yet finished adjusting itself to the plan and her cysts will continue to grow in the future. A client who has a tumor, and in his light body you see the image of the cancer with an unhappy addition--it has filaments and fibers that are being sent to distant areas in the body. The meaning is metastasis that will spread in the future and so on.
What Should You Do? In order to heal or prevent a disease--you have to cancel the blueprint. Without a blueprint from the light body--there is no reason for the disease to exist and the physical body starts to heal!
172
Act to cancel the blueprint in any way. Be creative. You can erase it with Cosmic eras ers or radioactive erasers. You can perform a surgery, burn, insert a hand and rip off, you can drain, explode, roll, and any way is good as long as the blue print is erased. A treatment that refers only to the physical body will give only a temporary cure. As long as the disease exists in the blueprint, it will renew, and it may return for a second run at an increased intensity, as if the body rebels: 'You wanted to trick me? I'll show you who's the boss here!' Therefore it happens that a cancer patient undergoes conventional surgery for amputating the sick part and he is assured that he is now, 'clean', after a while again he will develop the same disease, in the same place or next to it, and this time, the eruption will be more violent. A conventional treatment is excellent with the condition that you will complete it by erasing and canceling the blueprint. After you have erased the energetic image of the disease in the light body--you can treat the physical body.
The surgery is being performed on the light body, but it projects on the client's physical body. Surgery is performed in the following cases: When you are looking for the cause of the problem deep within, you want to expose it, solve the problem, and neutralize it. When you want to accelerate processes of cleaning and processes of healing. In short, perform surgery when you wish to make a deep profound change.
How to Perform a Surgery When you are about to perform a surgery, imagine that the client's body is in front of you, make an incision in it by a hand motion, or with your thoughts. The incision can be vertical, (from top to bottom), horizontal, (from side to side), or in a + shape, (that is crossing horizontal and vertical). After you have made the incision, open it by pulling the edges away from each other, or by folding them over. Right after making the incision, various images of insects and reptiles may burst from it, (see chapter 'The Great Grounding'), and different turbid fluids may flow out. Treat everything that comes out by draining, cleaning, sucking, etc. Only then can you look in depth. Pay attention to everything that you see. Everything has a meaning. Deal with the disease's representations one by one, as done in 'Room rearranging' or 'solving problems for the client'. Suggest positive solutions for the sick body; give him a hand in cleaning, in draining out toxins, and in removing the causes of the disease from the body.
Looking inside the Belly Imagine that you put your head inside the belly of the client and look around. Do not fear - nothing will happen to you. Use all your senses. Suggest solutions for deformed and diseased conditions that you see: Is it dark inside? Flow in the Light of the Creator; shine light inside. Is it moldy inside? Draw out the humidity; dry it with a blow dryer. Are there infections? Invite the flame from paradise to purify and disinfect.
173
Do you smell a stench? Use an air freshener; put in a scent of flowers, flow in fresh air for aeration. Do you see blocks? Create a machine of air-pressure that will flow compressed air to release the blocks. Do you notice any debris and dirt that are stuck to the walls? Connect a shaking machine to the belly that will shake all the debris and dirt so that it will fall, and then you can draw them out. Do you discover open infected wounds? Flow water from the pool of heaven. Invite the flame to burn and disinfect the wounds. Invite an intense cold to cool after the flame. Insert Divine lights: anesthetic, healing, disinfecting, calming, and so on. Be creative! Create your working tools. Invent solutions. Be the creator.
I Am God!
How would you react if I had asked you to declare: 'I am God'. Would you be shocked? Object? Be appalled? Get upset? Rebel? Or maybe accept? Understand? Receive it naturally or feel complete with such a declaration? All these reactions and others came up in one of the classes when I suggested to a group of ten students to look into their level of acceptance for such a declaration. There was a discussion; different arguments were suggested, pro and con. They all thought about it in depth. Then the guides informed me that someone wished to deliver his word to all those present. That was the 'One and Only'- -a Divine Entity of a very high level. One of the people present, Yaffa Jacob, wrote down what I channeled, and here are the words:
A Message from the 'One and Only' (October 2001)

"You must understand that the doubt and fear arise from the negative polarity that is in you. To declare, 'I am God', is for me a declaration of a young boy who has grown up and who tells his father, 'I am father!' Then I feel like a father who has completed his mission, a father that has brought his child to adulthood and greatness and had the privilege to hear his son say: 'I am an adult now too, a mature father.' It is not a declaration of arrogance but knowing yourself and your value. The complete knowledge is that each one of you is connected to me and to the Creator. "As long as you're not capable of declaring it even to yourself, then you still doubt the connection between us. Each one that finds it difficult to say the words 'I am God' is still making the separation, I am 'here' and you are 'there'. That is raising a barrier, a border between him and me. "Margalit, if you're able to say 'I am God', we can see exactly where such words are coming from. We know it is not a saying of hubris, or defying Divine forces, but a declaration that comes from feeling complete--you are connected to me. Between you and I there is a tunnel of light that connects us with no boundaries, and it makes us one. If someone is appalled at the idea of such a declaration, he still has a long way to go in order to be free from internal feelings, release the doubt, receive and accept that he is connected to me. "Each one of you should ask himself: 'Am I really connected to the 'One and Only'?' If the answer is positive, ask yourself: 'Is the connection between us open, flowing, real and without restrictions?' if the answer is positive go on, 'Do I believe that this connection will bring me to being part of God, and bring God to being part of me?
174
"If it is difficult for you to understand, imagine two vessels of water. If you wish so, and you accept it-- the small part will represent you, and the large part will represent me. Let's combine the vessels: "The waters are mixed together until they are inseparable and they are one! This is the real union! "Now the small vessel can easily say: 'I am the large vessel.' "If someone fears that there is some declaration of arrogance in this, then he should check with himself, what is the ego doing to him--pride and hubris, humility and over-modesty are two sides of the same coin, the exact same problem. Education and prejudice have taught you to be afraid of recognizing your selfvalue. Even if you feel that you have great talents and you want to express them --you choose to be modest, to shut up, to hide. The more modest you are, the more you are afraid. "What is it similar to? If a person wants to keep balance, and there is a force that draws him towards the left--would he over pull to the right? Either way he is not balanced. "For you to be able to say: 'I am good, I am successful, I am great, I am beautiful' and so on, flatters me, is pleasant to me, it's good for me to hear. Knowing your self-value is not a sin. It's not bragging, it is aligning with me. "Wouldn't you have found it hard to hear your child saying or declaring about himself: 'I am no good, I am not talented, I am small'? Wouldn't you enjoy more hearing from your child a declaration that comes from the real revelation of the truth: 'Father, Mother, I know that I am good and wonderful.' Would you have thought to preach to him, or punish him for such declarations? "I invite all of you to declare each one to himself and in his heart: 'I am God.' If you still find it hard, you can use the declaration: 'I am connected to God.' "Everything will come with time. When it does you will feel and understand the truth in it. "Th ank you very much." Signed: the 'One and Only'.
175
The Ancient Monster

The ancient monster represents evil that is found deep inside in the heart of the human essence, and may travel with him for many reincarnations. Most people have it, other than those who have already been through a treatment that released it from them. It is discovered only after the client has gone through all the other cleansing processes: purifying the aura, block removal, removal of demons and diabolic entities, removal of Lilith and her embryos, removal of black pockets that 'became independent', and so on. Not every healer can locate and see the ancient monster or participate in the removal treatment. You need to be entitled to it, which means having fortitude, which is a res ult of inner cleanliness, and purity of the healer. Removing the ancient monster can be rightfully considered the height and top of the inner cleansing. After this action, the person feels that he has been liberated from something that had burdened him all along. He may feel a great relief, freedom, peace and balance.
What Does the Ancient Monster Look Like? The ancient monster looks like a beast, like a dragon that spits fire, squirms, makes noises, howls and roars. It may look like a combination of a dinosaur and a giant lizard, with hooves that end in sharp claws. It has a long, heavy tail that looks like a crocodile's tail. Sometimes a person may have more than one monster. They may add up through the incarnation.
Treatment Procedure This is of course a work for the heavens. You call upon the help of the Creator and the angels and stay to watch the removal process. Similar to removing diabolic entities, you may see a round, wide beam of light descending on the client from above. Later, you can notice the opening of his head and the drawing out. The Creator draws the ancient monster out through the head, the nape, or the upper back. It takes longer to pull it out than when removing Lilith. Sometimes you can see the monster struggling, resisting being drawn out, holding on with its claws, and spits fire around. The meaning of that is that the host himself, the client, is not releasing. If there are several ancient monsters in a person, the drawing out process continues until they are all removed. Between one drawing and another, there is a brief intermission for three to four seconds. The first monster is usually the biggest and the most ancient. The ones that follow get smaller and smaller.
The Cocoon
After removing the monsters, there might be a cocoon left in the stomach. Since this is an essence that hasn't hatched yet, it is not been drawn out and removed from the head like the monsters, but is removed through the stomach. When you operate on the stomach of the client, make a horizontal or a + cut, spread and enlarge the opening. The cocoon will float and come up by itself as if it's being pushed from the inside like a baby in a C section. It looks like a giant peanut or like a black placenta with something alive inside it. The guides take it away.
176
Black Pockets that 'Became Independent'

These are stores of black or negative energy that remain inside the client's body even after all the drawing out and grounding processes, because they are more stubborn, more evasive, and for one reason or another they are fixed. You can discover them by in-depth vision, or by receiving information from the guides or from the Crown. In order to remove these black pockets an invasive procedure is required! 1. 2. 3. 4. Gently insert your entire palm into the client's body, (like in a heart massage). Magnetize all the black pockets. Soon you will feel as they are drawn out and stick to your palm. Carefully pull out your hand and let the guides clean it. Close the aura at the entry point and patch it well.
Brain Massage
Brain massage should be performed only under the supervision and precise guidance of the guides, usually in cases of brain damage, mental retardation, degenerative brain diseases; etc.: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Carefully and gently insert your hands into the client's head, (like in a heart massage). Imagine that you cup his brain between your palms. Flow love energy to the brain. Massage it lightly several times with the utmost gentleness. Slowly and carefully draw out your hands from his head. Wait. Within a few seconds, physical reactions begin in the body: pressure in the chest, pressure in the heart, nausea, dizziness, etc.--there may be a wide range of reactions. The physical response will arrive in about one minute. Massaging the brain directly stimulates all the body parts and organs --and this is what you feel.
The Great Grounding--Reptiles and Insects

The great grounding stage arrives after the client has gone through all the cleansings and purifications: you have purified his aur a, drawn out blocks of all kinds, connected him to you (or to the angels), for grounding of heavy emotional loads, you have removed junk and other accumulations of negative energies, you have banished demons and other diabolic entities of all types from him, got rid of various spiritual possessions from him, removed ancient monsters and a cocoon, magnetized black pockets that 'became independent' Then other, more ancient 'dirt' is ready and arises from the depths, from the present body as well as from the client's historical bodies. These are contents that were repressed and buried under a load of newer energetic events. They are representations of negative thoughts, negative actions, and negative stores. Many times, these blocks become fixed due to curses. Therefore, you can release them in conjunction with the work of canceling ancient curses, (see chapter 'Canceling an Ancient Curse'). One way or another, the procedure can be done only with the maturity and readiness of the client to cleanse and release all this debris. There is a matter of the person agreeing to be a host to those energies.
177
How Will You Know if the Client is Ready for the Great Grounding? It's most likely to assume that the client is ready for the Great Grounding after performing all the cleansings and purification that I have mentioned, based on the principle of the 'pool cleaning' effect. But there are other signs as well: The guides can tell you. The person himself feels that 'things are moving inside'. He feels inner energetic activity, even though not necessarily painful ones. The person has stomachaches or a feeling that something is wrong. When you perform a surgical incision, insects and reptiles burst out. Sometimes the insect and reptiles burst out on their own even without surgery.
A general readiness on a large-scale basis happens usually in the time before the beginning of a New Year, since it is at that time that a window of opportunity opens for inner cleansing and purification. Many people have problems in their stomach at this time. Some conform to the conventional explanation of 'there is this bug going around now'. The fortunate people and the aware ones will take the opportunity for a deeper cleansing.
What Does that 'Dirt' Look Like? It looks like different kinds of snakes, sometimes a single snake, and sometimes an entire nest of snakes entangled in each other in a squirming bundle. After removing the snakes, you can find eggs at the bottom of the nest. Sometimes, soon after the performance of the surgical incision, flying insects will come out, such as butterflies or moths, or other unidentified forms, as well as other insects which might burst out such as: ants, grasshoppers, roaches, worms With all the insects and the reptiles, turbid fluids that look like black tar or other fluids may also spill out.
Treatment Procedure The beginning of the work focuses on the client's stomach area since that is where most of the insects and reptiles are located, and from where they spread through channels and passages to every area of the body. You have two choices to perform a great grounding. 1. Manual treatment. 2. Treatment with the help of the 'grounding group'. You can always combine both ways.
Manual Treatment 1. 2. Make an incision in the client's belly, (see chapter Energetic Surgery). If reptiles, insects, or flying creatures are coming out from the incision--wait and allow them to leave on their own. They will fade and disappear. 3. Look into the stomach and check what is there.
178
4.
If you encounter a snake nest--insert your hand into the stomach and remove the entire bundle of snakes from there. Hand them to the guides.
5.
If you find eggs at the bottom of the nest, remove them with your hands and give them to the guides. There is no danger of being bitten or harmed in any way.
Treatment with the 'Grounding Group' This group contains three angels that are in charge of the 'great grounding' process for a long period of time. Their names are Raz -El, Hod-El, and Barkhi-El. Close your eyes, imagine the three angels. You can receive an image of three figures standing on a sandy hill at a distance. Between you and them, there is a shaded valley. 1. 2. Call them and they will answer you. Connect the client with a thousand cha nnels that reach out to the grounding group. Inform them that you have connected the client and they will immediately take charge of the process and supervise it until it ends.
All the reptiles and insects are being drawn out through the channels in a process that may take days or weeks, depending on the client's inner contents. You should notify the client, first in order to receive his permission to perform the process, and second to prepare him for what comes next. Since the continuation of the grounding is done without the presence of the healer, the client should know what is to come. All that is ready for grounding is easily being drawn up. Sometimes when the grounding goes deeper, it may hurt a little in certain places. The client may also feel aches in his body if he does not let go of the 'dirt'. Therefore he should shift his attention to the painful areas and immediately say releasing phrases, (see chapter Block Removal). Only when he declares of his choice to let go, the block is released and is drawn into the channels. At times, the grounding starts at great intensity in order to get rid of large masses of reptiles and insects, but then the grounding group takes care of regulating the intensity of the process, alternating according to the need. The grounding will continue until its natural end. 'Dirt' that did not come out will have to stay in and mature. Warn the client in advance: the entire process could be tiring and exhausting, to a point of physical weakness. You can take a break for a few days then continue. The client himself can stop the great grounding and telepathically ask the healer to stop. After the client rests for a day or two, you can apply to the grounding group with a request to continue the process. There is no need to renew the connection with the grounding channels; they are still in place.
Canceling an Ancient Curse

An ancient curse is a curse that lies upon a person from previous incarnations, and passes with him from one incarnation to the next. Even if between the incarnations, a job of pardon and forgiveness at the soul level was done between the one who cursed and the one was cursed, it may happen that the two souls incarnate back to life and the ego reestablishes the curse, as if 'I haven't forgiven you!'
179
Canceling an ancient curse provides the opportunity to get rid of a collection of curses, whether they were placed during the current life or placed during other reincarnations. When a treatment looks as if it is stuck, nothing improves, the illness or the pain remains--it's time to check if there isn't an ancient curse that 'closes upon the treatment'. In any case, it is best to perform the canceling together with the process of 'the Great Grounding', because in many cases, curses may affix the negative stores which we want to remove by grounding, and only by canceling the ancient curse, are huge masses of insects and reptiles released.
Treatment Procedure 1. Summon the person who cursed. You do that by a declaration: "I invite the person that cursed John" He arrives and stands above the client like a hologram. His color will usually be black or grey. You may try to convince him to call off the curse but it will be a waste of time. Also, you don't have to spend time on finding out who is the one who cursed. Invite fire to burn him. You do that by declaring: "I invite the flame from Paradise and ask it to burn the one who cursed." The burning does not hurt by any means, the one who cursed--but purifies black energies. Watch what occurs now: the fire grabs the image of the one who cursed, starting at his feet, going upwards, up his body, until he's completely burnt. Automatically, a pipe arrives and immediately it sucks out the pile of ashes that lies on the floor. 3. Invite all the historical bodies of the one who cursed and ask the fire to burn them all. Watch what occurs now: the process accelerates as if at a fast motion. Every time that an image is being burnt, the ashes are being sucked out by the pipe, a new image appears. The images are changing rapidly, and they are all burnt according to their order. The process runs backwards through all the incarnations of the one who cursed. Towards the end, the first image of the person reappears, but this time it's in a white color and sparks of light come from it. The purification has been completes. 4. Send the purified image on its way and it will leave. Pay attention to the strong sensations that the client feels during this treatment, And the relief that he feels at its end. After you have experienced the process of canceling an ancient curse, and you are familiar with it, you can perform an extended and vast process of canceling all the ancient curses of all the people who have cursed the client, in order to accelerate the treatment. Invite all the people who have cursed the client and all their historical bodies. They will appear in large numbers. Ask the fire to stay and purify all of them. The process will take place automatically. Pay attention: if by any chance, you perform a canceling of an ancient curse for an acquaintance, don't be surprised to find your own image appearing between the people who cursed him. Be aware of the purification that you go through, it may be very interesting! You don't have to watch all that is occurring, in the meantime, you are free to do other things and ask the guides to let you know when everything is done, in order to go back and look at the purified images and send them on their way.
2.
180
On Diminishing the Devil and On Salvation by Metatron Jehovah (Channeling February 2004)
ME: "Metatron, you said that the devil is made of pure light. If so, then how does he block the light? Can light block light?" Metatron: "Yes, Margalit, if it is in a different state of matter. For example, can water block water? Yes--if it is frozen." ME: "I understand. Metatron, several months ago you asked me if I was ready to participate in a work to reform the devil. Can you explain to me the meaning of this?" Metatron: "Yes Margalit. Let's use again the example of water. If we take a drop of water and place it on a surface--it will not wet the surface unless it dissipates, meaning, the membrane of the drop is broken and its contents are spilled out. "If the surface is rough and slanted, the drop will roll and the roughness will crack it. Its contents will spill out and wet the surface. This example teaches on the work of the devil. If a person is not balanced and is not pure--he will be contaminated by the devil. "What will happen to the same drop if we place it on a balanced smooth surface? The drop will stay in its place, exposed to the sunlight and will evaporate. Change its state of matter. "And now, instead of a drop of water, imagine a drop of light with a membrane. In your imagination, enlarge the drop of light a million-fold or a billion-fold --this is the devil. Just as the drop of water cannot survive when it is exposed to the sun, in such a way the devil cannot stand in front of the light of the Creator. If the light of the Creator is able to radiate on him, part of the drop evaporates and turns into light. This light reunites with the light of the Creator, and the drop diminishes--this is actually a diminishing of the devil. Only the decrease is not in quantity but in essence." ME: "Can you reach a condition of diminishing the devil to zero, that is a complete evaporation of the drop? That the devil would merge with the light?" Metatron: "Margalit, this is the essence of the idea of salvation." ME: "When and how can this be possible?" Metatron: "When people understand the process and wish to participate in it out of a conscious choice." ME: "Is the devil ready for this or does he object? Is he cooperating or fighting his reformation?" Metatron: "Both answers are right, Margalit. The devil is like a light that is trapped inside the shell. The light itself aspires to merge with the light of the Creator, but the shell prevents it from happening. If people allow the merging, then the devil cooperates. It is not an act of choice on the devil's part. Nor voluntary, it's a basic law. "This job is laid upon people. By making a conscious choice to diminish the devil and merge it with the light, they cause this to happen, as in a chain reaction. The choice is made by the person and not by the devil." ME: "From this I understand that the devil has no choice to be evil, for example."
181
Metatron: "Margalit, the devil is not evil. He was created to fulfill a role. In fact he is very good because he fulfill the destiny given him by the Creator." ME: "When will the day come that the devil will be diminished to nothing?" Metatron: "It is already happening Margalit, day by day and hour by hour." ME: "How?" Metatron: "In any place where someone makes a choice to connect to the light --automatically another bit of diminishing the devil happens." ME: "How? Since people are not aiming directly the light of the Creator at the devil?" Metatron: "Actually they do, Margalit. Every enlightened person reflects the light of the Creator towards the devil." ME: "Then every person is like a little god, a little creator" Metatron: "Just like that Margalit, but skip the word 'little'. Every man is God, is a Creator. Again, there is no significance to the quantity but the essence." ME: "But there is still a lot of bad in the world. It looks like it's increasing instead of decreasing." Metatron: "Margalit, what does a drop of water do when it's exposed to light? Before it melts and dissipates it boils, it sears, it bubbles, and then it gives in to change its state of matter and evaporates." ME: "Oh, that's great! An amazing example! Thank you Metatron." Metatron: "Thank you Margalit."
Contemplating Salvation
I think about what Archangel Raphael and Metatron Jehovah taught me and a vision comes to my mind: Imagine that 'an international day of positiveness' would be declared, based on the principle of an international day of love, or an international day of aids, or a smoke-out day etc. 'An international day of positiveness' includes all people on earth, without discrimination of age, sex, religion, race or origin, in every corner on earth, even the most remote ones. And in it, for an entire day everyone decides out of free conscious choice on absolute positiveness! In this day you only think positive thoughts, and or you do only positive actions. You fill up with the light of the Creator. The devil will diminish to nothing. In that same day salvation will come! There will be no more wars, no violence, no diseases, no suffering, no death! Just a moment! Actually there is no need for an entire day like that. Metatron Jehovah said it is not a matter of quantity but essence. Then maybe, one 'international hour of positiveness' is enough. Or perhaps one minute? Or maybe even one second only? What an exciting idea! Perhaps the entire humanity can get organized to have one second of positiveness, to bring salvation right away, here and now? God why is it so difficult?
182
Part Five: Meditations and Exercises
Meditation--'In Nature' By Archangel Michael

The beginning of this meditation is a base from which at each time, we can go and flow in a new direction, according to the need and the goal that we wish to obtain. We start with a series of breathsrelaxation of the body Imagine that we are at our house, standing near the door, ready to go out on a trip. We open the door and go out. Outside--a surprise! Everything is different from what we know. A long path extends from our doorway and we start walking on it. The path passes through an open field, covered with grass and flowers. We walk on it and enjoy the beautiful bright day. The weather is perfect. The air is full of the scent of flowers and the smell of the earth after rain. Far ahead the path leads into a small green wood. We are heading there. We reach the woods, go between the trees and discover a small lovely patch of grass covered with flowers and in it a small brook.
First Development We feel the magic of the place and the wonderful energies that surround us. Around us there is a circle of fresh green trees. We feel a strong attraction to go to one of the nearby trees and hug it. Immediately we feel a strong flow of energy from the tree and we accept from it all the love we can absorb, and are filled with a fantastic feeling of love. We say goodbye to the tree, thank it, and move to the next tree. We hug the tree. Immediately we feel a strong flow of energy from the tree into us. This tree flows the energy of tranquility to us. We go on, moving from one tree to another and each one gives us a different energy --balance, peace of mind, happiness, self-acceptance, tolerance, and so on. After we have been filled with all the wonderful energies that the trees have given us, we feel drowsy and lie down on the grass to rest. We fall asleep (Wait) We wake up in our house, in our bed.
Second Development The place makes us want to lie down on our backs. We lie down on the green soft grass and look up. Trees are in a circle around us. Their tops are high; the br anches are moving in the wind, the leaves make a susurration noise. Occasionally, flickers of sunlight enter between the leaves and the branches. The more we look at the trees and listen to the susurration of the leaves, we hear a new sound rising and mingling--it's the sound of metal wind chimes. The sound comes to us from the susurration of the leaves. They ring in a gentle pleasant manner that inspires peace and tranquility in us (Listen for a while)
183
Suddenly there is a new sound coming up and taking the place of the previous sound. This time it arrives from a different tree. These are the sounds of wind chimes made of shells. We listen to the typical sound of the shells clacking against each other And again a new sound, these are wind chimes made of bamboo ceramic glass Finally all the trees are playing together in a harmonious orchestra of all kinds of wind chimes. The wind grows stronger and so does the chiming. Then the wind slowly decreases until the chimes are very faint. We fall asleep and rest for a while.
Third Development We are lying on the grass and look up, around us is a circle of trees. Next to us, the brook is murmuring. Noises of crickets and frogs mingle with the bird songs. Above us in the sky, a small white cloud floats. We look at it and sense that it is looking back at us. Slowly the cloud descends to us. Soon it will touch us. The cloud engulfs us with softness, like a pleasant down comforter. It goes underneath us, wrapping us and warming us. We feel secure and calm inside the cloud Suddenly the cloud starts to rise up, taking us with it. It goes up very slowly and we can feel the floating. Soon it will pass above the top of the trees. We look down and see the glade below us growing smaller. The cloud sails and takes us on a trip. We can see the entire landscape spread below us. A field of flowers, cows in the meadow, children playing, a tractor working in a field, a stream. We arrive above a golden beach. Now we are above the blue sea. From afar we can see a beautiful island in the middle of the sea. The cloud stops and starts to go back. Below we can see the beach again, a stream, a tractor working in a field children playing, cows in the meadow, a field of flowers. Here is our glade underneath us. The cloud slowly descends. It places us down exactly from where it picked us up. We feel the grass and the earth under our back. We say goodbye to the cloud and thank it. The cloud goes up again and returns to the sky above us. We close our eyes and doze off.
184
Meditation--'Filling with Golden Light' by Orin

You start with three breaths into the abdomen: one deep, and two shallow and relaxed breaths. Next, three breaths into the chest: one deep, and two shallow and relaxed breaths. We finish with three breaths to the head: one deep, and two shallow and relaxed breaths. Imagine that from the tip of the head, from the highest point of the head, hangs a golden thread which is dangling from the center of our head, as if the head is empty, like an empty box, an empty room. Imagine that we reach into the head and lightly pull the thread. Then we let go. The pull turns on a light. Invisible bulbs of unknown location have come on. The entire interior of our head is lit up with a golden light that banishes the darkness from all the corners. The light spreads between the folds of our brain; under the scalp to the skull. It spreads through our hair looking like we have dyed the hair with light and liquid gold. The light keeps spreading to the forehead, the face, behind the face, inside the sinuses, it crawls into our throat and from there it goes down to all the body parts: the chest, the abdomen, the limbs, etc. When we are filled with light, imagine that it bursts out like shining radiating lights from different orifices in our body: the nose, the mouth, the ears, all the pores in the skin. Everyone who looks at us know can see how illuminated and radiant we are. Slowly, each person at his own time and pace will return to the here and now, and open his eyes.
185
Meditation--'The Shell' by Orin

Start with a series of breaths. Relax the entire body. Imagine that we are in the middle of the sea on a yacht. The day is clear and beautiful. The water is blue and green and glitters in the sun. We enjoy the warmth. We stand and look down at the water. Near the boat a school of small silvery fish swim and accompany our sailing in a harmonious uniform movement. One little fish separates from the school, moves aside. We feel that it invites us to join it. We get off the boat and dip into the warm water. The fish leads and we swim after it. Suddenly we don't need to breathe oxygen anymore. We have become a creature that can dive in the water with ease and tranquility. Around us we discover an underwater forest, corals, algae, fish, sea creatures. The fish leads and we follow it. The entire marine forest shifts to the side, opens a passage and lets us go through. The fish leads us to an opening of a huge shell that is lying on the sea floor. At the opening of the shell, we stand on our feet and walk in deeper and deeper in a kind of spiral labyrinth. Inside it is dry and there is no water. The walls of the shell change their colors from pink to turquoise and to other colors--like a multimedia show. We arrive to a central hall, which is large and tall, we lie down on our back to rest. Now we can look up to the ceiling, we notice that it shines with an intense pink light. The more we look; we feel that the light is sent to us. We are flooded with pink light that surrounds us, paints us in pink, and absorbs into us through breathing and through our skin. (Continue the same way with other colors --sky blue, purple, green, silver, gold, white, and yellow.) We feel that we absorb all these lights into us, filling us with peace, with tranquility, with love, with friendship, with acceptance and approval. We feel warm and comfortable and we want to doze off. A strong transparent bubble descends. It comes down to us and surrounds us. There are beautiful colors on the surface of the bubble like on a soap bubble. We are in the bubble. It lifts us off the floor and floats us through the spiral corridors of the shell to the opening and out. It brings us up to the surface of the water where it bursts. We find ourselves right next to our boat. We climb up to the deck and sail home. Near the boat a school of small fish swims
186
Meditation--an Exercise for Inner Listening by Orin

Start with a series of breaths. Relax the entire body. We are taking a trip into the body: let's bring our hearing part to a very focused and concentrated state. We listen not only with our ears, but also with additional internal means. We listen to our breath, and feel the gentle motion of the chest rising and falling. Listen to the flow of air going in and out of our lungs. Listen to the breaths of the people that sit next to us --notice that this is a different kind of listening. (Allow people to differentiate between the two different kinds of listening for one or two minutes.) Now we take our ears, our inner ears on a trip. The right ear and the left ear join together in the center of our head to one very attentive inner ear. We lower the inner ear down our throat. It goes down and enters our chest and listens Our inner ear hears our heartbeats, feels our pulse, feels the rhythm and the strength of the work of the heart. Now our inner ear descends lower and moves into the center of the abdomen, where it listens. It can still hear our heartbeat, but now, it can also hear other events inside the stomach and in the inner o rgans Small passing movements the inner ear hears and feels if it's warm or cold around it, if it's crowded or roomy, if there is something there that we do not need, or if everything is calm and peaceful. Now this inner ear splits into ten little ears, baby ears, each one of them reaches another place in the body: one goes to the right leg, one goes to the left leg, one goes to the stomach, one to the chest, one to each hand, one to the lower back, one to the upper back, one to the throat, and one to the brain. We direct our stomach as if it is a different entity that lives inside of us and has a listening ability. We say to the stomach: 'Hello, my stomach,' we listen to it when it replies, 'Hi to you too.' We keep on and apply to each organ separately and wait for an answer, (listen to the answer.) After we greet each part of our body, we leave all the little ears scattered in the places where they have gone. We say goodbye from our entire body: 'Goodbye my body' and listen to the answer, 'Goodbye to you too.' We go back and listen to the voices around us in the room, voices that reach from further away, etc. Slowly come back to the present moment and wake up.
187
Meditation--'The Divine Bird' by Orin

Start with a series of breaths. Relax the entire body. Let's imagine that we sit at home, in a warm cozy room, in front of the window. It's raining outside and we sit in a comfortable soft easy chair, cuddled in a soft blanket and watching outside. On the window a drop of rain pings against the glass and drops down until it vanishes and disappears... Another drop Another drop Each moment there are more and more drops dripping down the window. Outside the rain gets stronger but we are warm and cozy. We can hear the wind blowing outside, see the trees bending, hear the susurration of the leaves. On the tree across from us we notice a bird standing on a branch under a few leaves, hiding from the rain, but the bird is wet. The more we look at her, the more we see that she looks back at us. We reach our hand and open the window a little bit. The bird spreads its wings, flies and lands on the window sill and watches us. Then the bird jumps inside and stands on the inner sill of the window. We close the window behind it. The bird dries out, shaking off the rain drops from its body. Suddenly it chirps one chirp, another chirp. We sense that it's not a regular bird. It says something to us: 'Thank you Blessing Love' We look at it enchanted, and suddenly we see that the feathers are drying up and changing their colors from a wet grey to a multitude of radiant colors--turquoise, orange, pink, green, and more. Then suddenly something happens, from each feather of the bird, a colorful thread is sent toward us and connects to us. More and more threads, colorful and radiant, thin and strong, are sent from the bird to us and they connect to various parts in our body: shoulders, forehead, chest, heart, a hundred golden shiny channels. We feel a flow from the bird to us through these channels. A marvelous energy of peace and quiet, harmony, reconciliation, and love fills us. (Give time to feel the process.) Then the bird starts to take back the threads one by one. The connections decrease until they disappear. The bird waves goodbye with her wings, flies, goes through the window and soars up into the sky. It looks like outside the rain has stopped and the sun is shining. We watch the bird as it flies. It flies up to a colorful rainbow in the sky and unites with it.
188
Meditation for Removing Anger by Orin

Start with a series of breaths. Relax the entire body. We walk in a remote area, barren and dry like a desert. There is nothing around us, only sand, and the dry, cracked ground. There are only a few brown dried up bushes but no other signs of life. In some odd way we don't feel bad in this place. We're not afraid; we're not too warm or too cold. We know that it is no accident that we arrived at this place, and we trust the higher guidance. We get a gut feeling so we decide to stop at a certain place. We stand still, look around and feel that this is the right place for us to stop. We know that miracles are going to happen here. We reach forward with one hand and a magic wand appears in it. This is a special wand, thin, lightweight, but potent. The more we look at it the more we see an energy flowing from its edge-- emitting from it are golden sparks of light. We kneel, and with the wand we draw a circle on the ground. The circle surrounds us so that we stand in the middle of it. Now we sit inside our circle with the wand in our hands. We expect that something marvelous is going to happen, we understand that it is coming from the magic wand. We lean forward and draw on the ground, as far as we can reach a fire. A flame of fire. The moment we finish-- it lights by itself. Lights up and burns in a beautiful orange fire, dancing in blue and red flames. The fire is small, not particularly big. We look at the fire, hypnotized. We feel warmth on our face, on our arms, on our entire body. The light of the fire illuminates our face, our body, and the more we look at the fire, we notice beautiful colors appearing and disappearing. At the same time, we feel that the fire acts as a very strong magnet. It pulls energetic channels from our body and a flow starts inside those channels. The fire pulls various angers from within us, and they leave our body one by one. We just let go, allow them to get out and leave; we don't stop them. Every time anger leaves us and reaches the fire, a new flame with a new color lights up and it burns and consumes our anger until it goes back to its original color. If we wish, we can name the anger, to know what is this anger, who are we angry with, what a particular person did to give rise to such anger in us. Now we hold our magic wand in our hand and strengthen the line of the circle around us. We paint it in blue. Once we finish, water starts flowing from the line of the circle. The water is blue, clean and clear, and fills the area of the circle as if it was a small pool. The water rises and stands around us as if it were inside a barrel, or inside transparent walls that hold it, and it reaches up to our neck. The water doesn't spill out; we sit inside our own bath or tub. The water is pleasant, warm, clean, and soaks us with feelings of safety and protection, purity and cleanliness. The water calms and pacifies all the systems of our body. The heart beats peacefully. The lungs breathe quietly. Our thoughts are half asleep. We sit for a while longer inside our tub, allowing the peace and tranquility to penetrate us and go into all the tight places, our most worried, stressed, nervous, places. They banish all the anxieties worries and stress from there. Now with our magic wand, we make a little hole in the wall of our barrel. Within seconds the water drains through the hole, flows out to our little fire and extinguishes the flames. The fire sears, smokes a little and then vanishes and disappears as if by magic. We find ourselves sitting on the ground as before. The ground is dry. We are dry. The circle line has been erased. Our magic wand has disappeared. There is only peace and quiet and tranquility.
189
Option for Prolonged Meditation or a Separate Meditation We hold our magic wand in our hand; we reach our hand high above our head and draw two clouds high up. We paint one cloud silver and the other one gold. We lower our hand and wait After a few seconds a drip starts. The two clouds rain small drops of gold and silver on us. We can feel the drops touching our skin, and each time the drops touch us, they dissipate and absorb into our skin, sending circles of silver and gold until our entire body is soaked in the silvery golden rain. The more we absorb the clearer we feel feelings of happiness and joy filling us, spreading throughout our body. We enjoy the sensation of lightness that spreads all over inside us. We let it spread, we allow it to go to our most confined areas, our most stressed and painful areas, our most dark ones--and they banish the harsh feelings from there and take their place. The clouds finish showering the rain on us and quickly disappear.
190
Meditation-- 'In the Planet of Purification' by Orin

We see ourselves in the highest place on earth, on a pointed extremely high mountain where we stand on the peak. It's nighttime, we can't see anything around us. We look at the stars and suddenly one star catches our attention, especially bright, twinkling with a very bright light. This star looks bigger than the other stars. The more we look at the star; we see that something is happening. Something starts to occur. From the star, a beam of light comes out in our direction. The light quickly advances, and before we understand what happens, it shines on us, flooding us with a bright light from head to toe. We are a bit blinded, and cast our eyes aside. Then we find out that the edge of the beam of light clings to us, surrounds us and gathers us to it. It lifts us up and takes us to the planet that sent it. We are surrounded with a bright yet warm light, pleasant, making us feel safe. We can't see anything but the beam of light. We allow ourselves to be carried by it without resisting. Suddenly the journey ends. We stand on firm ground and around us is a circle of light. We understand that we have arrived to the shining planet. This planet is a healing planet. It emits healing energies, calming energies, energies that weaken traumatic injuries or painful memories. On this planet we feel wonderful and everything around us is lit and warm. The air that we breathe goes into our lungs in wonderful warmth and calms all the systems in our body. We tour around. At first the place looks abandoned, but then we discover huge bubbles, like big balloons that can contain within them large creatures like people. These are purifying bubbles. The bubbles are at ground level. We pick up a bubble and get close to it. The bubble is transparent but inside beautiful colors float like a colorful fog, sky blue, pink, purple, and any color that we like. As soon as we touch the bubble we are swallowed by it and it closes around us. Inside the bubble we are purified, washed of stress, worries, anxieties, fears, frustrations, disappointments, anger, and other harsh feelings. They are being drawn out of our bodies and leave, leaving us calm and peaceful, washed and purified. When we finish, a strong beam of light touches the bubble, the bubbles softly dissipates and vanishes. It's the same beam of light that brought us here and now we go back to earth. The beam brings us back, straight home into our bed.
191
Meditation-- 'The Biggest Tree in the World' by Great Eagle

Breathing... Relaxation... Go into a meditative state. Imagine that you are in a wide field. The sun is shining in a deep blue sky. You are comfortable and you feel wonderful in this place. Now imagine yourself as a trunk of a tree. It's an immense trunk. Grow and send roots into the ground. The roots grow, keep spreading and branching quickly into the center of the earth, developing over a wide diameter. Grow and send up huge branches. From them more and more branches come out This is the biggest tree in the world. There isn't any tree larger than this in any place. Grow leaves and flowers on it. Now that you have reached the maximum size, feel how all the leaves and branches, trunk and roots are hollow. Ask for the assistance of the Creator. Ask Him to flow His light through you, and through the hollow branches, the trunk, and the roots. Send waves of light to the center of the earth. Feel the intense flow in you--it washes everything that you don't need from within you, leaving you purified and clean. Amplify the flow through you a hundred fold. After a few minutes, amplify it a hundred fold again. Allow the flow until the process decreases and ends by itself. Feel your immense strength--being the biggest tree in the world. Feel how you are connected to mother earth, how your head reaches to the sky. You are surrounded by very clear air. Feel how good it is to bathe in the heat of the sun and absorb it into you. Let the rain fall upon you and drink of the water. Feel the wholeness of being connected to the universe in the most complete way. You are an inseparable part of it. Leave the tree standing in the field and come back to the present moment. Bring with you all the good feelings that have filled you: the tranquility, the balance, the purity, the inner peace
192
Meditation--'The Holy Lake' by Great Eagle

Start with a series of breaths. Relax the entire body. Imagine that you are standing in the midst of a large field. Around you are flowers, trees, birds, butterflies. It is a perfect spring day. Look far into the sky. Something is flying towards you. The closer it gets the bigger it becomes. Now it is clear to you that it is a big eagle. The eagle lands next to you in the field. It is huge, almost as big as a plane, but it looks very amicable and gentle to you. It has wise eyes filled with a look of compassion. The eagle makes a gesture towards you and invites you to climb and sit upon its back. You sit and hug its neck, the two of you take off and climb at a steep angle into the sky. With in a few seconds you are above the clouds. At this height the air is clear and very clean, soaked with energies of peace and love. You breathe filling up with peace and calmness. From afar, you can see a mountain range with snow on the peaks. The closer you get, it looks like behind the range there is a valley hiding, surrounded by a ring of tall mountains. At the bottom of the valley is the holy lake, which is a secret lake. Its color is deep blue-green, turquoise. The eagle lands on the beach and you climb off it and stand on your feet. Imagine that you step forward into the water. Miraculously you are naked, wearing no clothes. You can immediately feel the quality of the water; it is special, filled with strong energies. The temperature of the water suits you perfectly and you are surrounded by peace and love. You lie on your back and float in the water. There is no need to move your hands or your legs. It's very easy to float in the holy lake. Now invite the water to enter your body and fill it up. The water enters through all the orifices, the chakras, and the pores in your skin. Allow the water to cleanse you, and take from you all that you do not need: physical pains, emotional pains, anger, fears, confusion, bitterness, etc Direct the water to enter all those places in your body in which you have blocks: pain, pressure, heaviness, loads, crowding, unease, etc., and purify those places. Behold and watch--at the front of your body, the part that is turned upwards to the sky, from the stomach, from the chest, and from all the other places--fountains of water erupt. Sprinkles of water spray high up. Doze off for a couple of minutes and give in to the hypnotic influence of the lake. When you wake up, you will be a new person--purified, balanced and full of energy.
193
Meditation--'The Worm' by Great Eagle

Start with a series of breaths. Relax the entire body. Enter a deep meditative state. Imagine that you fold in half. You place your hands on the ground. 'Insert' the upper part of your body into the ground. Now you are 'stuck' in the ground like a worm--on both sides. Ask the Creator to flow light into you, through your solar plexus, or your heart chakra. Flow it in both directions: towards the head and towards the legs, and through them to the ground. Wash your inner being from all that disturbs you, all that is stuck and blocked in you. Flow everything from you outside to mother earth. Increase the flow a hundred fold. After a few minutes, increase it again a hundred fold. Feel the strong flow; towards the end the flow will decrease. Be reborn again--rise up slowly by rolling vertebrae after vertebrae in your spine, up to a complete standing position. Count to three, at your own pace and wake up.
Meditation--'Opening Doors in the Body' by Great Eagle

Start with a series of breaths. Relax the entire body. Enter a deep meditative state. Imagine that you open a big door in your stomach. Open it outwards. Declare: (silently or aloud): 'I release all that I do not need from inside myself.' (The pain, the bitterness, the anger, the fear, etc.) See in your imagination how all the negative and harsh emotional loads leave your body through the door. You can imagine them as black smoke, or as black bats that rush out in huge flocks from your body. Continue to open more doors in your body: in the chest, in the head, in the nape, in the throat, in the shoulders, in the heart, in the back, in the elbows, in the knees, in the palms, in the soles of the feet, and more. Every time that you open a new door, declare: 'I release all that I do not need from inside myself.' If you have a localized problem: pain, pressure, heaviness, a load, crowding, discomfort in a certain area of the body--open a door exactly at that spot and let go Wait. Allow a flow until the process decreases and ends by itself. Come back to the here and now and wake up.
194
'The Babies' Train'-- A Repairing Experience Treatment by Rachel

(Biblical Jewish Mother) This is a repairing experience for people who suffer from emotional damage that emerges from the feelings that they were unwanted by their parents, rejected children. Guide the client in a series of breaths. Have the client relax his entire body.
Guiding the Client Imagine that you're at your parents' home, (the first home that you can remember). You're invisible but you can see everything. In the home, you see your parents, much younger. You can see them but they cannot see you. You know that this is a festive day because of the preparations in the home. Your parents are planning to go somewhere. They are dressed in their best clothes. Your father wears a tie, a suit, etc. Your mother wears an elegant hat, high heels, etc. They lock the door and leave the house. Follow them; they are walking down the street. People greet them on the way. You can see buildings, cars, children, etc. Your parents draw close to a train station. The station is abandoned. There aren't any other people there. Mom and Dad are standing on the platform and wait; they are excited. They look left and right at the tracks. There is a whistle blowing. A train pulls closer to the station. Now you can hear it, you can see it. It's a very luxurious train. A regal train. It has royal symbols in gold on it, and rich colors of crimson and blue. The train slides slowly to a stop. Steps descend from the first car. Mom and Dad climb them and go into the car. It is large and spacious. It looks like a baby's room. In the center there is a fancy crib. Around it there are toys, pillows, lace curtains etc. Mom and dad bend over the crib. You also bend and look inside. In the crib lies a baby who looks at all of you. It's an adorable baby, chubby, smiling, with a small patch of hair. He's awake and active. Mom and Dad agree that this is a very cute baby, but decide to check the other cars as well. They go through a doorway to the next car. There is a baby in a crib in there as well The same goes for the third and fourth cars. (There is no need to go beyond this. Three or four cars are sufficient to achieve the results. The client is the one who will continue and describe what the different babies look like.) The healer: 'Now remember the previous babies. Did you feel that anyone of them was actually the baby that was you?' See your parents in your imagination. Now they have to make a choice. They reach a decision. They go back to the car where you are. Now you are in the crib, looking at your parents from below. You can see the happiness in their eyes. They reach out to you, cuddle you, tickle you, they are very excited over how cute you are and much you look like them They pick you up and hug you and get off the train with you. The train starts moving now. It pulls away. Probably there is another set of parents waiting for it at the next station.
195
Meditation--Healing with Sounds by Archangel Raphael

Music and sounds have very strong healing powers. Apart from the tranquility that it provides, and the mere joy of listening to it, music can also serve as a powerful healing tool. All that we have to do is give the sounds the chance to take care of us. Treat the sounds as if they are individual entities, intelligent and with a soul, talk to them and receive them into our being. Start with a series of breaths. Continue by relaxing the entire body. Listen to the music. Imagine that we can see the sounds of music emerging from the loudspeakers, rising up in the air, dancing all the way towards us and reaching our ears. We can imagine the sounds in any way that we wish to--music notes, fluttering butterflies, little magical fairies and so onthere are endless images that we can use. For a while, we continue to follow the sounds that are dancing in the room, making their way to us Now we imagine that the sounds surround us like a gentle, fluttering silk clothsome of the sounds tickle ussome of the sounds caress ussome embrace ussome kiss ussome warm us upsome glide smoothly over our skinsome are playing with ussome are bouncing in mischief on our skin Now we silently call to the sounds and invite them to enter our body. They can enter through the ears, the mouth or other orifices in the body. We follow their entry into the body and sense what are they doing to usand again--some of them ticklekisswarm us upbouncesome dissipate inside us like gentle bubbles and get absorbed in We invite the sounds to enter internal organs in our body--the heart, the liver, the kidneys, the lungs and so onWe ask them to insert happiness and joy, light, wellbeing, lightness and magic into the organs, and to banish from them the darkness, heaviness, crowding, sadness and all that we do not need there. We ask the sounds to locate black pockets of black and negative energies inside our body and to dissipate them by light stingsor let the sounds go inside and burst like magical bubbles while bursting the black pockets along with themor surround and envelope the black pocket from the outside and gently break it apart until it disappears We request the sounds to enter stores of heavy emotional loads such as anger, fears, traumas etc. Let each sound locate on a trauma or anger and take them with it outside. Imagine that each sounds gathers part of the negative load and leaves with it through different places in the body. And so, like a trail of ants that are carrying food crumbs--the musical sounds fly up to the sky and each sounds carries with it a small part of our negativity We ask the sounds that keep arriving from the loudspeakers to fill us up from head to toe, and heal all that can be healed- energetic injuries, internal pain We ask that they locate places that are energetically low and fill them up Finally, we give thanks to the sounds for their fantastic work and ask them to stay with us as long as possible.
196
'The Black Box'--Cleaning the System from Emotional Loads--By Rachel

This could serve as an independent work, important and with excellent results. Or it can be done As a continuation to the work of releasing and forgiveness with the balloons, (see next meditation). Guide the client in a series of breaths. Have the client relax his entire body. Guiding the Client Your body and your emotional system are highly loaded. This overload blocks a correct energetic flow and hence creates a base for physical problems, psychological problems, cognitive problems and more. We shall do the following: we connect to the overload centers, discharge them and replace them with light and healing energy. After that, you will feel greatly relived, and will have access to treating and healing problematic areas in the body. Lie with your eyes closed. See in your imagination how you become aware and connected to the inside of your body. Check different places in your body and sense what you feel in them: the stomach, the chest, the back, the heart, the hands, the legs, and other places. Check if the place is light or heavy, soft or hard, relaxed or tense, spacious or crowded, hot or cold, blocked or flowing, lit up or dark, and so on. Now lets focus on the theme of your fears. Try to examine where in your body there is a center or centers where the fears are located. Do not hesitate--you can't go wrong. Any place that you mention could be the right place. "I feel that my fears are located in the pit of my stomach." Okay. See in your imagination that you insert a box into the pit of your stomach. (It could be a shoebox, a gift box, a bag, etc.) Now you gather fears from your lower stomach and place them in the box. They could be small or large fears, worries, concerns, anxieties, phobias You can imagine the fears like small scared faces that are hiding in the stomach. You catch the fears one by one and put them in the box. You know exactly where they are located and hide, and they cannot resist you. The power and the control are in your hands! Add the following declaration to the action: 'I catch my fears and pack them in the box. I am the boss here. The power is in my hands!' While you are packing, notice that the area of your lower stomach becomes more and more light and enlightened. Whereas, the place where the box is becomes heavy, pressing, feels bad, or even painful. Tel me when you finish packing all the fears that are in the pit of your stomach. "I think that there are no more fears around the box." Okay. Now let's pull fears from other places in the body to the pit of the stomach and into the box. Declare: "I command all my fears that are located in various areas of my body, (in the head, in the back, in the limbs, etc.,) to flow and arrive to the box in the stomach. I have the control! I am the boss here!" Notice the flow that comes from all over the body towards the box in the stomach. You can clearly feel it. Pay attention and tell me when do you feel that the box is completely full and is starting to overflow. After a few minutes: "Now the box is starting to overflow." Now close the box. If you want to, you can wrap it with a nice wrapping paper, and tie it with a ribbon, (or a string or a rubber band.)
197
Now repeat after me and declare: "I call upon God, the One and Only, I ask for your help. I release all my fears, I don't want them any more, I don't need them in my body God, I hand my package to you. Please take it away from me, and in its place, flow your light in me, fill me up, heal me" Imagine that you reach up to God with both hands and give him the box. Imagine that you see two hands, (or one hand) sent to you from the heavens and take the box away from you. Count silently to thirty, about half a minute. Take a deep breath straight into the place were the problems were initially located. By breathing out, remove and disperse whatever is left there. Feel how light you are, and enlightened, and spacious in the place where the box had been. Say thank you to God. The work will continue. This time we chose another subject and focus on it--hurts and humiliations /emotional pain/traumas /anger /confusion /low self-esteem/ shame/ weakness/ a burden of excess responsibility/ and so on. You can rep eat this work more than once. Each time it will become easier.
198
Forgiveness and Pardon--Releasing People and Hurts--By Rachel

Imagine that we are standing in an open field. Around us there are flowers and grass, above us is a clear blue sky without clouds. In one hand we are holding a bunch of balloons. We hold their strings tightly so that they will not fly away and escape from us. The balloons are transparent and fully inflated. Imagine in our mind a person, who hurt us badly, the hurt is still alive and painful in us to this day. In our imagination we put this person into one of the balloons. We decide in what position this person will be inside the balloon--standing or sitting, we decide if the person is looking at us or if his back is to us, we decide what kind of expression he has on his face--the entire image is under our control. We move the string of this balloon to our other hand and slowly release more and more string so that the balloon starts rising at a forty-five degree angle towards the horizon. As the balloon takes flight, we say in our heart: "I release you with light and love towards the future." We watch the balloon until we can no longer clearly see the person inside, until the balloon becomes a small distant spot, then we release the string completely and the balloon disappears. We repeat the releasing process for all the people who have hurt us. We can add more balloons according to the need. We can release balloons in couple or in groups depending on our feelings. We can release the same person for a second time if we feel that we have not released enough at the first time. After a while the exercise can be repeated to reinforce the letting go.
199
The Little Child inside Us--By Rachel

Creating the First Connection We close our eyes and see in front of us a transparent glass cell, sealed and closed on all sides. Inside there is a little boy/girl. The age will be defined by our subconscious when we start this work, it is the age where we 'got stuck' and stopped growing emotionally. Name We turn to the child and decide how to call him: Shall we call him by his 'real' name? Or just call him 'child'? If we decide to call him 'child'--other than being stuck in the emotional growth, there is also a disconnection in the internal identity. It means that the injury was so deep that the person unconsciously decides to disassociate. As if 'someone else' takes upon himself the hurt and not 'me'.
Relation It is best to treat this child with affection, to give him a nickname, to express love, compassion, appreciation, admiration, and so on towards him during the entire process. ('You're a wonderful brave child You are so strong, you are a hero --I admire you')
Releasing We help the child to get out of the cell by breaking and shattering a wall on both sides, (me from the outside and the little child from the inside.)
Connecting We embrace the little child. We tell him how much we missed him, how much we love him; we want to be with him. We take him on a trip to a beautiful flowering field.
Maturing We explain to the child that here he is going to grow up. We send him towards a tree at the edge of the field, to go around it and come back. He will come back older. We determine his new age. We embrace him and express our appreciation towards him. After a series of growth cycles, we go home together or we go to an imaginary house that we build in the field. We eat, shower, and go to sleep together.
200
Work For Releasing Anger--'The Cocoon'--By Kryon

In order to cleanse, to heal, to advance ourselves and to overcome various stuck issues in our lives, it is important to release anger that we hold inside us against different people. It makes no difference what the reason or cause is for the anger--has the person hurt us? Betrayed us? Abandoned us? Abused us? Or did something else to us? The mere keeping of anger inside us is hurting us more than anything, weakens us, takes up a lot of energies and creates blocks in us. The Exercise We close our eyes. Breathe deeply. We see in our mind's eye a person with whom we are very angry. We see him in front of us. We turn to him and tell him exactly what is the greatest anger that we hold against him. Then, for one minute, we freely express our anger without worrying that we hurt him or that we will destroy the relationship between us. We explain to that person where the anger comes from, what we think about him and what he did to us. We can connect to our most painful feelings, which are found behind the anger. (Hurt, humiliation, disappointment, sadness, and so on,) and express them in our words. Now we imagine that our anger is secreted and comes out of our nostrils in the form of a long thin filament that quickly surrounds and wraps the person in front of us from head to toe, until we create a 'cocoon' around them. (Just like a caterpillar that secrets a silk thread creating a cocoon around itself.) We put the cocoon in a box on the side. We repeat this process with another person with whom we are angry, and put his 'cocoon' in the box as well. We accumulate a few cocoons and close the box with a lid to allow the process of maturation. After a day, (twenty-four hours) we continue the process. We remove the lid of the box and check which one of the cocoons has hatched and turned into a beautiful butterfly, and who hasn't. We release the butterflies to the open air to fly free and enjoy. Those who haven't hatched from the cocoon have not matured yet. We will tell the cocoons that when they turn to butterflies we will set them free. We close the box for another day. If at the end of the process, there is any cocoon left --we will have to repeat the entire process from the start with this one. The process to release angers frees us and heals us as well as helps us to expand as a 'vessel' for receiving and transferring energies, information, and healing others. We can also do this process with: a deceased person/our soul/God and angels.
201
(Back Cover) About the author: Margalit Eilon was born in Israel in 1952. She is an educated, practical, family woman with twenty-six years of activity in the educational area, who had gone through a tremendous, magical turnover in her life. In an unexpected way, yet amazingly natural, Margalit became a channeler and a healer who assists people to get over their problems, their pains, and their illnesses. High spiritual guides, angels, and holy men have revealed themselves to her and taught her the secrets of healing for four years. Following her success in healing and helping people, Margalit runs workshops and courses in spiritual healing, channeling, past life regression, meditation, and self-awareness throughout Israel. The higher guidance also allows her to perform works that so far were considered as the sole territory of religious leaders: removing demons, possessions, and other diabolic entities. The knowledge, messages, and the secrets of healing the author now shares with the reader with love, as she carries the message: connect to the God inside you and create the miracle in your life. About the book: in this special, illuminating book, you can find practical guidance for energetic-spiritual treatment and healing. Here you can find a rich variety of easily applied yet powerful techniques that will advance and enrich you as a healer. Among the studied subjects: Canceling curses and the evil eye Releasing blocks Thought reading and telepathy Past life regression Techniques for flowing energies Working on the subconscious level Healing with Divine lights Retrieving lost soul parts Healing with Cosmic tools Balancing chakras and meridians, and more.
Being channeled, this book holds inside it high energies that will vibrate in your light body. Reading it, studying, and doing the exercises, may induce in you a real energetic transformation, and accelerate your spiritual development!

Angels' Healing: A Practical Guide For The Development of The Spiritual Healer

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Angels' Healing: A Practical Guide For The Development of The Spiritual Healer

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

About this book

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Index Blessings and Messages from the Guides

Part One: The Foundations of Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Part Two: The Nave Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Part Three: The Real Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing 10

Eilon, Angels' Healing 11

Part Four: High Spiritual Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing 12

Part Five: Meditations and Exercises

Eilon, Angels' Healing 13

Eilon, Angels' Healing 14

Eilon, Angels' Healing 15

Eilon, Angels' Healing 16

Eilon, Angels' Healing 17

Eilon, Angels' Healing 18

Eilon, Angels' Healing 19

Eilon, Angels' Healing 20

Eilon, Angels' Healing 21

Messages and Letters from Students

Eilon, Angels' Healing 22

Alisa Mizrachi, Holon

Eilon, Angels' Healing 23

Eilon, Angels' Healing 24

Eilon, Angels' Healing 25

Eilon, Angels' Healing 26

Eilon, Angels' Healing 27

Eilon, Angels' Healing 28

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Part One: The Foundations of Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Spiral Scribble: BBE

Continue to the second illustration.

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Eilon, Angels' Healing

BBE BBE BBE

The One Who Cursed BBE John BBE

Go to the third illustration.

Eilon, Angels' Healing

John BBE BBE

Go to the fourth illustration.

Eilon, Angels' Healing

BBE BBE BBE BBE BBE BBE BBE

Go to the fifth illustration.

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Go to the sixth illustration.

Eilon, Angels' Healing

Continue to the seventh Illustration.

Eilon, Angels' Healing